1.
Which of the following cont ain s one funda m e n t a l and one derive d unit?
A.
amp e r e
kilogr a m
B.
amp e r e
coulom b
C.
joule
newt o n
D.
joule
coulom b
(Tot al 1 mar k )
2.
The cur r e n t , I, throu g h a resis to r is me a s u r e d with a digital am m e t e r to be
0.10 A. The unce r t ai n t y in the calcul a t e d value of I 2 will be
A.
1 %.
B.
2 %.
C.
5 %.
D.
20 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
3.
A skydive r of mas s 80 kg falls vertic ally with a const a n t spee d of 50 m s –1 .
The upw a r d force acting on the skydive r is appr oxi m a t e ly
A.
0 N.
B.
80 N.
C.
800 N.
D.
4000 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
1
4.
Joseph runs along a long str aig h t tra ck. The varia tion of his spe e d v with
time t is show n below.
After 25 secon d s Josep h has run 200 m. Which of the following is cor r e c t at
25 secon d s ?
Ins t a n t a n e o u s
sp e e d / m s –1
Aver a g e spe e d / m
s –1
A.
8 m s –1
8 m s –1
B.
8 m s –1
10 m s –1
C.
10 m s –1
8 m s –1
D.
10 m s –1
10 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
2
5.
A car of mas s 1000 kg accel e r a t e s on a str ai g h t , flat, horizon t a l roa d with
an accele r a t i o n
a = 0.3 m s –2 .
The driving force F on the car is oppos e d by a resis tive force of 500 N.
The net (result a n t ) force on the car is
A.
200 N.
B.
300 N.
C.
500 N.
D.
800 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
3
6.
A tennis ball of mas s m moving horizon t a lly with spe e d u strike s a vertic al
tenni s racke t. The ball bounc e s back with a horizon t al spe e d v .
The mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in mom e n t u m of the ball is
A.
m (u + v ).
B.
m (u – v ).
C.
m (v – u ).
D.
zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
7.
A brot h e r and sister take the sam e time to run up a set of step s. The siste r
has a grea t e r mas s than her brot h e r . Which of the following is corr e c t ?
Has don e the mo s t
work
Has dev e l o p e d the
gre a t e s t pow e r
A.
brot h e r
brot h e r
B.
brot h e r
siste r
C.
siste r
brot h e r
D.
siste r
siste r
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
4
8.
A nucle a r power station prod u c e s 10 GW of elect ric al powe r . The powe r
gen e r a t e d by the nuclea r reaction s in the core of the rea c t o r is 25 GW. The
efficiency of the powe r station is
A.
15 %.
B.
35 %.
C.
40 %.
D.
60 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
9.
A cyclist rides arou n d a circul a r tra ck at a unifor m spe e d. Which of the
following corr e c tly gives the net horizont a l force on the cyclist at any given
insta n t of time?
Net horiz o n t a l forc e
alo n g dire c t i o n of
mot i o n
Ne t horiz o n t a l forc e
nor m a l to dire c t i o n of
mo t i o n
A.
zero
zero
B.
zero
non zero
C.
non zero
zero
D.
non zero
non zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )
10.
A solid piece of tungs t e n melts into liquid withou t a cha n g e in tem p e r a t u r e .
Which of the following is corr ec t for the molec ul e s in the liquid pha s e
comp a r e d with the molec ul e s in the solid pha s e ?
Kin e t i c en e r g y
Pot e n t i a l en e r g y
A.
sam e
gre a t e r
B.
sam e
sa m e
C.
grea t e r
gre a t e r
D.
grea t e r
sa m e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
5
11.
What is the mas s of car bo n- 12 tha t cont ai n s the sam e num b e r of atom s as
14 g of silicon- 28?
A.
6 g
B.
12 g
C.
14 g
D.
24 g
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12.
A heat e r of const a n t powe r heat s a liquid of mass m and specific hea t
capacity c . The grap h below shows how the tem p e r a t u r e of the liquid varies
with time.
The gra di e n t of the gra p h is k and no ene r gy is lost to the surr o u n d i n g s .
What is the powe r of the heat e r ?
A.
km c
B.
k
mc
C.
mc
k
D.
1
km c
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
6
13.
A tran sv e r s e wave travels from left to right. The diagr a m below show s how,
at a particul a r insta n t of time, the displa c e m e n t of particle s in the medi u m
varies with position. Which arrow rep r e s e n t s the direc tion of the velocity of
the particle mar k e d P?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
7
14.
The gra p h shows how the displa c e m e n t varies with time for an objec t
unde r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion.
Which gra p h shows how the object’s accel e r a ti o n a varies with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
8
15.
Light travels from air into glass as show n below.
What is the refr ac tive index of glas s?
A.
s in P
s in S
B.
s inQ
s in R
C.
s in P
s in R
D.
s inQ
s in S
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
9
16.
Which of the following elect r o m a g n e t i c waves has a freq u e n c y gr e a t e r
than that of visible light?
A.
Ultraviolet
B.
Radio
C.
Microw av e s
D.
Infra r e d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17.
One elect r o nv olt is equ al to
A.
1.6 × 10 –19 C.
B.
1.6 × 10 –19 J.
C.
1.6 × 10 –19 V.
D.
1.6 × 10 –19 W.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
10
18.
A batt e r y of inter n al resis t a n c e 2 Ω is conn e c t e d to an exte r n a l resist a n c e
of 10 Ω. The cur r e n t is 0.5 A.
What is the emf of the bat t e r y?
A.
1.0 V
B.
5.0 V
C.
6.0 V
D.
24.0 V
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
11
19.
In the circuit below, which of the following will caus e the gre a t e s t incr e a s e
in the readi n g of the voltm e t e r ?
A.
An incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e
B.
An incr e a s e in light inten sity
C.
A decr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e
D.
A decr e a s e in light intensi ty
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
12
20.
A sphe ric al plan e t of unifor m density has thr e e time s the mas s of the Eart h
and twice the aver a g e radius. The mag nit u d e of the gravit a tio n al field
str e n g t h at the surface of the Eart h is g .
What is the gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of the plane t ?
A.
6 g
B.
2
g
3
C.
3
g
4
D.
3
g
2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
21.
An elect r o n pass e s the nort h pole of a bar mag n e t as show n below.
What is the direction of the ma g n e t i c forc e on the elect r o n ?
A.
Into the pag e
B.
Out of the page
C.
To the left
D.
To the right
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
13
22.
Which of the following gives the corr e c t num b e r of proton s and neut r o n s in
14
a nucleu s of car bo n- 14 ( 6 C )?
Prot o n s
Ne u t r o n s
A.
8
6
B.
6
8
C.
14
6
D.
6
14
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23.
A fres hly prep a r e d sam pl e cont ain s 4.0 μg of iodine- 131. After 24 days, 0. 5
μg of iodine- 131 rem ai n. The best estim a t e of the half- life of iodine- 131 is
A.
8 days.
B.
12 days.
C.
24 days.
D.
72 days.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24.
Which of the following caus e s the gre a t e s t num b e r of ioniza tion s as it
pass e s throu g h 1 cm of air?
(The total ener gy of the ionizing radia tio n is the sam e .)
A.
An alpha particle
B.
A bet a particle
C.
A gam m a- ray
D.
An X-ray
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
14
25.
What is the pheno m e n o n that best explains why gre e n h o u s e gas e s absor b
infrar e d radiation?
A.
Reson a n c e
B.
Interf e r e n c e
C.
Refrac tion
D.
Diffractio n
(Tot al 1 mar k )
26.
In which of the following places will the albe do be gre a t e s t ?
A.
A forest
B.
A gras sl a n d
C.
An ocea n
D.
A polar ice cap
(Tot al 1 mar k )
27.
A wind tur bin e produ c e s a powe r P whe n the wind spe e d is v . Assumin g
that the efficiency of the turbi n e is const a n t , the best estim a t e for the
powe r prod u c e d when the wind spe e d beco m e s 2 v is
A.
2 P.
B.
4 P.
C.
6 P.
D.
8 P.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
15
28.
A sphe ric al black body has absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T 1 . The sur r o u n di n g s are
kept at a lower absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T 2 . What is the net powe r per unit
are a lost by the body?
A.
σT 1 4
B.
σT 2 4
C.
σ( T 1 4 – T 2 4 )
D.
σ( T 1 4 + T 2 4 )
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29.
The desig n of a nuclea r powe r station includ e s an elect ric a l gen e r a t o r . The
function of the gene r a t o r is to conve r t
A.
nuclea r ener gy to kinetic ene r gy.
B.
kinetic ener gy to ther m al ene r gy.
C.
ther m al ener gy to elect ric a l ene r gy.
D.
kinetic ener gy to elect ric al ene r gy.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30.
What is the unit of surfac e heat capa city?
A.
J kg –1 K–1
B.
J K –1
C.
J m –2 K–1
D.
J m –3 K–1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
16
31.
Data analysis ques tion.
The photog r a p h below shows a mag nifie d imag e of a dark cent r a l disc
sur r o u n d e d by conce n t r i c dark rings. These rings wer e prod u c e d as a
res ult of interfe r e n c e of monoc h r o m a t i c light.
The gra p h below shows how the ring diam e t e r D varies with the ring
num b e r n.
The inner m o s t ring corr e s p o n d s to n = 1. The corr e s p o n d i n g dia m e t e r is
labelled in the photo g r a p h . Erro r bars for the diam e t e r D are show n.
IB Questionbank Physics
17
(a)
Stat e on e piece of eviden c e tha t shows that D is not propo r tio n a l to n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
On the gra p h above, draw the line of bes t- fit for the data points.
(2)
(c)
Theory sugg e s t s that D 2 = kn .
A grap h of D 2 agains t n is show n below. Error bar s are show n for the
first and last data points only.
IB Questionbank Physics
18
(i)
Using the first grap h, calcul a t e the perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n t y in D 2 ,
of the ring n = 7.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that
suppo r t s the relation s hi p D 2 = kn .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use the secon d grap h to dete r m i n e the value of the cons t a n t k,
as well as its unce r t a i n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
19
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
20
(iv)
Stat e the unit for the const a n t k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
32.
This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field.
An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e
of 250 V, ent e r s a region of ma gn e t i c field of stre n g t h 0.12 T that is
direct e d into the plane of the pag e.
(a)
The elect r o n’s path while in the region of mag n e ti c field is a qua r t e r
circle. Show that the
(i)
spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
21
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
22
(ii)
radi us of the pat h is 4.5 × 10 –4 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m below shows the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n as it ent e r s
and leaves the region of ma gn e t i c field. The mag ni t u d e of the initial
mom e n t u m and of the final mom e n t u m is 8.6 × 10 –24 N s.
(i)
On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector
repr e s e n t i n g the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n .
(1)
(ii)
Show that the magni t u d e of the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the
elect r o n is
1.2 × 10 –23 Ns.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
23
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
24
(iii) The time the elect r o n spe n d s in the region of mag n e ti c field is
7.4 × 10 –11 s.
Estim a t e the magni t u d e of the aver a g e force on the elect r o n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
33.
This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.
A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with
cons t a n t spee d v along a horizon t al circle of radius r = 0.33 m. The string
is att ac h e d to the ceiling and make s an angle of 30° with the vertical.
(a)
(i)
On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to
repr e s e n t the forces on the ball in the position show n.
(2)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
25
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
34.
This ques tion is abou t a nuclea r rea c t o r .
(a)
Uraniu m is used as a fuel in a small res e a r c h nucle a r rea c t o r. The
235
conce n t r a t i o n of 9 2 U in a sam pl e of ura ni u m mus t be incr e a s e d
befor e it can be used as a fuel.
Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s by which the conc e n t r a t i o n of
incr e a s e d .
235
92 U
is
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The reac t o r produ c e s 24 MW of powe r. The efficiency of the reac t o r is
32 %. In the fission of one ura ni u m- 235 nucle u s 3.2 × 10 –11 J of ene r gy
is relea s e d .
Deter m i n e the mass of ura ni u m- 235 that unde r g o e s fission in one year
in this react o r .
IB Questionbank Physics
26
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c)
Explain what would happ e n if the mode r a t o r of this reac t o r wer e to be
rem ove d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
During its nor m al oper a tio n, the following set of reac tio n s take s plac e
in the reac t o r .
1
0n
 29328U 
239
92U

239
9 2U
(I)
239
0
9 3N p  –1 e v
(II)
239
239
0
9 3 N p  9 4P u  –1e v
IB Questionbank Physics
(III)
27
(i)
Stat e the nam e of the proc e s s repr e s e n t e d by reac tio n (II).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Com m e n t on the inte r n a t i o n a l implic atio n s of the prod u c t of
thes e reac tion s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
28
35.
This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c oscillations .
A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.
Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle
P in the mediu m .
Grap h 1
(a)
For par ticle P,
(i)
stat e how gra p h 1 shows that its oscillation s are not dam p e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
29
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
30
(iii) calcula t e its speed at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of
particl es in the mediu m at a partic ul a r insta n t of time.
Grap h 2
Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,
IB Questionbank Physics
31
(i)
the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).
(c)
The diagr a m shows the equilibriu m positions of six par ticle s in the
medi u m .
IB Questionbank Physics
32
(i)
On the diagr a m above, draw cros s e s to indic at e the positions of
thes e six particle s at the insta n t of time whe n the displa c e m e n t is
given by grap h 2.
(3)
(ii)
On the diagr a m above, label with the lette r C a par ticl e that is at
the cent r e of a com p r e s s i o n.
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
36.
This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the spe e d v of a ball of mas s
0.50 kg, that has been relea s e d from rest above the Eart h’s surfa c e .
The force of air resist a n c e is not negligible. Assum e that the accel e r a t io n
of free fall is
g = 9.81 m s –2 .
(a)
Stat e, witho u t any calcula tion s , how the gra p h could be use d to
dete r m i n e the dista n c e fallen.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
33
(b)
(i)
In the spac e below, dra w and label arrow s to rep r e s e n t
the forces on the ball at
2.0 s.
(1)
(ii)
Use the grap h opposit e to show that the accel e r a t io n of the ball
at 2.0 s is appr oxi m a t e ly 4 m s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the force of air resis t a n c e on the ball
at 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
34
(iv)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the air resist a n c e on the ball at t = 5.0
s is smaller than, equal to or gre a t e r tha n the air resist a n c e at t
= 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.
(i)
Show that the sum of the pot e n ti al and kinetic ene r gi e s of the
ball has decr e a s e d by 780 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The specific heat capa city of the ball is 480 J kg –1 K–1 . Estim a t e
the incr e a s e in the tem p e r a t u r e of the ball.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
35
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
36
(iii) Stat e an assu m p t i o n mad e in the esti m a t e in (c)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
37.
This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.
(a)
(i)
Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
239
The mas s of a nucle u s of plutoniu m ( 9 4 P u ) is 238.99 0 3 9 6 u.
Deduc e that the bindin g ene r gy per nucle on for pluto ni u m is 7.6
MeV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
37
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with nucle on num b e r A of the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon.
239
Plutoni u m ( 9 4 P u ) und e r g o e s nucle a r fission accor di n g to the rea c tion
given below.
239
1
9 4P u 0 n
(i)

91
146
1
3 8S r  5 6Ba x 0 n
Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Use the grap h to estim a t e the ene r gy rele a s e d in this rea c tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
38
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
39
(c)
Stable nuclei with a mass num b e r gre a t e r tha n about 20, cont ai n mor e
neut r o n s than proton s . By refe r e n c e to the prope r ti e s of the nucle a r
force and of the elect r o s t a t i c force, sugg e s t an explan a ti o n for this
obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
38.
This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.
(a)
Define
(i)
electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
40
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
41
(b)
A batt e r y of emf ε and negligibl e inter n al resist a n c e is conne c t e d in
series to two resisto r s . The cur r e n t in the circuit is I.
(i)
Stat e an equa tio n giving the total powe r delive r e d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s
resis to r R 2 is V 2 .
Using the law of the cons e rv a tio n of ene r gy, ded uc e the equ a tio n
below.
ε = V1 + V2
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
42
(c)
The grap h shows the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c s of two cond uc t o r s , X and Y.
On the axes below, sketc h gra p h s to show the variatio n with pote n ti al
differ e n c e V of the resist a n c e of cond u c t o r X (label this gra p h X) and
cond u c t o r Y (label this gra p h Y).
You do not nee d to put any num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
43
(d)
The condu c t o r s in (c) are conn e c t e d in serie s to a batt e r y of emf ε and
negligible inter n al resis t a n c e .
The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .
Using the grap h given in (c),
(i)
det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
44
39.
This ques tion is abou t the ene r gy bala nc e of the Ear t h.
(a)
The inten sity of the Sun’s radia tio n at the position of the Eart h is
appr oxi m a t ely
1400 W m –2 .
Sugg e s t why the aver a g e powe r receive d per unit are a of the Eart h is
350 W m –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m shows a simplifie d model of the ene r gy bala nc e of the
Eart h’s surfac e.
The diagr a m shows radi ation ent e ri n g or leaving the Eart h’s surfa c e
only.
The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and
that of the atmo s p h e r e is T A = 242 K.
(i)
Using the data from the diagr a m , stat e the emissivity of the
atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
45
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
46
(ii)
Show that the intensity of the radia tio n radia t e d by the
atm os p h e r e towar d s the Eart h’s surfa c e is 136 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) By refer e n c e to the ene r gy bala n c e of the Eart h’s surfa c e ,
calcula t e T E .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
(i)
Outline a mec h a ni s m by which part of the radia tion
radi at e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e is abso r b e d by gre e n h o u s e gas e s
in the atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
47
(3)
(ii)
Sugg e s t why the incomi n g solar radia tio n is not affect e d by the
mech a ni s m you outline d in (c)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Carbo n dioxide (CO 2 ) is a gre e n h o u s e gas. Stat e on e sour c e and
on e sink (object that re move s CO 2 ) of this gas.
Sourc e: ............................................................................................
..................
Sink: ................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
40.
This ques tion is abou t stan di n g (station a r y) wave s.
(a)
Descri b e two ways that sta n di n g waves are differ e n t from travelling
waves.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
An expe ri m e n t is car ri e d out to mea s u r e the spe e d of sound in air,
IB Questionbank Physics
48
using the appa r a t u s show n below.
A tube that is open at both ends is plac e d vertic ally in a tank of wate r ,
until the top of the tube is just at the surfa c e of the wate r . A tunin g
fork of freq u e n cy 440 Hz is soun d e d above the tube. The tube is
slowly rais e d out of the wat e r until the loudn e s s of the soun d reac h e s
a maxim u m for the first time, due to the form a tio n of a sta n di n g wave.
IB Questionbank Physics
49
(i)
Explain the form a tio n of a sta n di n g wave in the tube.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Stat e the position in the tube tha t is always a node.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) The tube is raise d a little furt h e r . Explain why the loudn e s s of the
soun d is no longe r at a maxim u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
50
(c)
The tube is rais e d until the loudn e s s of the soun d rea c h e s a maxim u m
for a secon d time.
Betwe e n the two positions of maxim u m loudn e s s , the tube has bee n
raise d by 36.8 cm.
The frequ e n c y of the sound is 440 Hz. Estim a t e the spee d of sound in
air.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
41.
This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.
The sound emitt e d by a car’s hor n has frequ e n c y f, as me a s u r e d by the
driver. An observ e r moves towa r d s the station a r y car at const a n t spe e d and
meas u r e s the frequ e n c y of the soun d to be f ′.
(a)
Explain, using a diagr a m , any differ e n c e betw e e n f ′ and f.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
51
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
52
(b)
The frequ e n c y f is 3.00 × 10 2 Hz. An obse rv e r moves towa r d s the
station a r y car at a const a n t spe e d of 15.0 m s –1 . Calcula t e the
obse rv e d frequ e n cy f ′ of the sound.
The spee d of soun d in air is 3.30 ×1 0 2 m s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
42.
This ques tion is abou t optical resolution and accom m o d a t i o n.
A woma n is walking along a straig h t pat h, which is at right angl es to a
telep h o n e line, as show n in the diagr a m below. Two birds are perc h e d on
the line, 0.40 m apar t.
(diagra m not to scale)
The diam e t e r of the pupil of the wom a n’s eye is 2.5 mm and the aver a g e
wavele n g t h of visible light is 550 nm.
(a)
Use the Rayleigh criterion to estim a t e the dista n c e D at which the
wom a n will just be able to see two sepa r a t e birds.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
53
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
The wom a n looks down at her watc h and is able to focus on it clea rly.
Explain how her eyes are able to focus on nea r object s as well as far
object s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
54
43.
This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.
In an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the photoel e c t ri c effect, light of freq u e n c y f
is inciden t on the met al surface A, show n in the diagr a m below. A pote n t i al
differ e n c e is applied betw e e n A and B. The photoel e c t ri c cur r e n t is
meas u r e d by a sensitive am m e t e r . (Note: the comple t e elect ric al circ uit is
not show n.)
When the frequ e n cy of the light is reduc e d to a cert ai n value, the cur r e n t
meas u r e d by the am m e t e r beco m e s zero. Explain how Einst ei n’s
photo el e c t r i c theo ry accou n t s for this obse rv a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
55
44.
This ques tion is abou t atomic spec t r a .
Diagr a m 1 shows some of the ene r gy levels of the hydrog e n atom. Diagr a m
2 is a rep r e s e n t a t i o n of part of the emission spec t r u m of atomic hydrog e n .
The lines show n rep r e s e n t tran si tion s involving the –3.40 eV level.
(a)
Deduc e that the ene r gy of a photon of wavel e n g t h 658 nm is 1.89 eV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
56
(b)
(i)
On dia g r a m 1 , dra w an arrow to show the elect r o n
tran si tion bet w e e n ene r gy levels that gives rise to the emission of
a photon of wavelen g t h 658 nm. Label this arro w with the lette r
A.
(1)
(ii)
On dia g r a m 1 , draw arrow s to show the elect r o n tra n si tion s
betw e e n ene r gy levels that give rise to the emis sion of photo n s of
wavele n g t h s 488 nm, 435 nm and 411 nm.
Label thes e arro w s with the lette r s B, C and D.
(1)
(c)
Explain why the lines in the emission spe ct r u m of atomic hydro g e n ,
show n in dia g r a m 2 , beco m e close r toge t h e r as the wavele n g t h of the
emitt e d photo n s decr e a s e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
45.
This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
Iodine- 124 (I-124) is an uns t a bl e radioisot o p e with proton num b e r 53. It
unde r g o e s bet a plus decay to form an isotop e of telluriu m (Te).
(a)
Stat e the reaction for the dec ay of the I-124 nuclide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
57
(b)
The grap h below show s how the activity of a sam pl e of iodine- 124
chan g e s with time.
(i)
Stat e the half- life of iodine- 124
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the activity of the sam pl e at 21 days.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
58
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
59
(iii) A sam pl e of an unkno w n radioisoto p e has a half- life twice tha t of
iodine- 124 and the sam e initial activity as the sam pl e of iodine124. On the axes opposit e , dra w a gra p h to show how the activity
of the sam pl e would cha n g e with time.
Label this grap h X.
(1)
(iv)
A secon d sam pl e of iodine- 124 has half the initial activity as the
origin al sam pl e of iodine- 124. On the axes opposit e, dra w a
grap h to show how the activity of this sam pl e would cha n g e with
time. Label this grap h Y.
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
46.
This ques tion is abou t analog u e and digital stor a g e .
As part of a physics lesson, Isobel and Claire eac h make an audio recor di n g
of their teac h e r . They then comp a r e the quality of their recor di n g s . Isobel’s
reco r di n g is in analog u e form a t whe r e a s Claire’s recor di n g is digital and
stor e d on a CD.
(a)
Stat e on e possible analog u e met h o d of stor a g e use d by Isobel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The first time the reco r di n g s are playe d, their qualitie s are identic al.
Outline whet h e r the quality of eac h recor di n g is expe c t e d to rem a i n
the sam e after many uses.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
60
(c)
Use the following infor m a ti o n to dete r m i n e the num b e r of bits use d in
Clair e’s digit al recor di n g.
Total time of recor di n g
= 30 minut e s
Sam plin g freq u e n c y = 40 kHz
For m a t of recor di n g = Ste r e o (2 cha n n e l s )
Num b e r of bits per sam pl e
= 16
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
47.
This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).
An imag e of the surfac e of the Eart h is recor d e d by a digital cam e r a from
an aero pl a n e. Each imag e cover s 144 km 2 of the Eart h’s surfa c e and is
reco r d e d by a squa r e CCD of are a 36 cm 2 .
(a)
Calcula t e the mag nifica tio n of the syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The CCD cont ai n s 1.0 × 10 8 pixels. Deduc e the minim u m dista n c e
betw e e n two points on Eart h that can be resolve d by this cam e r a .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
61
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
62
(c)
It is propos e d to improve the qua n t u m efficiency of the CCD. Sta t e the
effect, if any, on the resolution of the syst e m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
48.
This ques tion is abou t a Schmit t trigg e r .
The diagr a m below show s a Sch mit t trigg e r circ uit bas e d on an oper a t io n a l
amplifie r (op- amp).
The outpu t of this Schmit t trigg e r is positive satu r a ti o n (+13 V) or nega tive
satu r a ti o n (–13 V).
(a)
Stat e two prop e r t i e s of an ideal op- amp.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
63
(b)
Deter m i n e the input value tha t will caus e the outpu t to switc h from –
13 V to +1 3 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Explain how a Schmit t trigg e r can be use d to res h a p e a digital puls e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
64
49.
This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Erin is a pass e n g e r on a train making a call to a sta n d a r d fixed telep h o n e
line (“landline”) from her mobile phon e. The train move s Erin betw e e n
adjac e n t com m u ni c a t io n cells. Outline the cha n g e s , if any, tha t take place
in the
(a)
cellular excha n g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
public switch e d telep h o n e netwo r k (PSTN).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 2 mark s )
50.
This ques tion is abou t lengt h contr a c ti o n and simult a n e i ty.
(a)
Define proper lengt h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
A space s hi p is travelling to the right at spe e d 0.75 c, thro u g h a tunn el
which is open at both ends. Obse rv e r A is sta n di n g at the cent r e of
one side of the tunn el. Obse rv e r A, for whom the tunn el is at rest,
mea s u r e s the lengt h of the tunn el to be 240 m and the lengt h of the
space s hi p to be 200 m. The diag r a m below shows this situa tion from
the pers p e c t ive of obse rv e r A.
IB Questionbank Physics
65
Observ e r B, for whom the spac e s hi p is station a r y, is sta n di n g at the
cent r e of the spac e s hi p.
(i)
Calculat e the Lorent z factor, γ, for this situa tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the lengt h of the tunn el accor di n g to obs e rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the lengt h of the spa c e s hi p accor di n g to obse rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv)
Accor din g to obse rv e r A, the spa c e s hi p is compl e t e ly inside the
tunn el for a shor t time. Sta t e and explain whet h e r or not,
accor di n g to obs erv e r B, the spac e s hi p is eve r compl e t ely inside
the tunn el.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
66
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
67
(c)
Two sour ce s of light are locat e d at eac h end of the tunn el. The
diagr a m below show s this situa tion from the pers p e c tiv e of obse rv e r
A.
Accordi n g to observ e r A, at the insta n t whe n obse rv e r B pas s e s
obse rv e r A, the two sour c e s of light emit a flash. Obse rv e r A see s the
two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly. Discus s whet h e r or not obse r v e r B sees
the two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51.
This ques tion is abou t meso n s .
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by an exch a n g e par ticle.
IB Questionbank Physics
68
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
69
(b)
In 1935, the physicist Hide ki Yukawa pre dic t e d that the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s was medi a t e d by particle s calle d
meson s . Given that the rang e of the stron g inte r a c t io n is
appr oxi m a t ely 1.5 × 10 –15 m, calcula t e a possible value for the res t
mas s of a meso n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A meson called the pion was det e c t e d in cosmic ray reac tio n s in 1947
by Powell and Occhialini. The pion com e s in thr e e possible cha r g e
stat e s: π + , π – and π 0 The Feyn m a n diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s a
possible reac tion in which a pion particip a t e s .
Stat e and explain whet h e r the meso n prod u c e d is a π + , π – or a π 0 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
70
(d)
Stat e the possible spin num b e r s of meso n s and explain your answ e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e)
Explain why, accor di n g to the qua r k model, it is not possible for a
particl e to consist of two up qua r k s only.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
52.
A particle of mas s m is moving with const a n t spee d v in unifor m circul a r
motion. What is the total work done by the cent ri p e t a l force during one
revolutio n?
A.
Zero
B.
m v2
2
C.
mv 2
D.
2π mv 2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
71
IB Questionbank Physics
72
53.
Which of the following is equivale n t to the principl e of ene r gy
cons e r v a t i o n?
A.
Newt o n’s first law
B.
The first law of ther m o dy n a m i c s
C.
Newt o n’s secon d law
D.
The secon d law of ther m o d y n a m i c s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54.
An ideal gas und e r g o e s the the r m o d y n a m i c cha n g e s rep r e s e n t e d in the P –
V diagr a m below
(P → Q → R → P).
Volume / m 3
Which of the following is the net work done by the gas in a cycle?
A.
4.5 × 10 5 J
B.
3.0 × 10 5 J
C.
1.0 × 10 5 J
D.
Zero
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
73
55.
Light travels from air into glass as show n below.
The refr ac tive index of the glas s is
A.
s in3 0
s in8 0
B.
s in8 0
s in3 0
C.
s in6 0
s in1 0
D.
s in1 0
s in6 0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
56.
The funda m e n t a l (first har m o nic) frequ e n c y for a partic ul a r orga n pipe is
330 Hz. The pipe is close d at one end but open at the othe r . What is the
frequ e n c y of its secon d har m o ni c ?
A.
110 Hz
B.
165 Hz
C.
660 Hz
D.
990 Hz
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
74
57.
Light is diffract e d at a single slit. Which of the following gra p h s best
repr e s e n t s how the inten sity I of the diffrac t e d light varies with the
diffractio n angle θ?
A.
B.
C.
IB Questionbank Physics
75
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
58.
Light of wavele n g t h λ is emitt e d by two point sour c e s . The light pass e s
thro u g h a circul a r ape r t u r e of diam e t e r b and is rec eive d by an obse rv e r .
The angul a r sep a r a t i o n of the sour c e s from the obse r v e r’ s position is θ. The
sour c e s are not resolve d by the obse rv e r . Which of the following
mat h e m a t i c al relation s hi p s applie s?
A.
λ
θ < 1.22 b
B.
λ
θ > 1.22 b
C.
λ
θ = 1.22 b
D.
λ
θ = b
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
76
59.
Plane- polarize d light is incide n t nor m ally on a polariz e r which is able to
rota t e in the plane per p e n di c ul a r to the light as show n below.
In diagr a m 1, the intensity of the incide n t light is 8 W m –2 and the
tran s mi t t e d inten si ty of light is 2 W m –2 . Diagr a m 2 show s the polariz e r
rota t e d 90° from the orient a t io n in diagr a m 1. What is the new tra n s m i t t e d
inten si ty?
A.
0 W m –2
B.
2 W m –2
C.
6 W m –2
D.
8 W m –3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
77
60.
A light- dep e n d e n t resis to r (LDR) and a fixed resisto r are conne c t e d in the
poten ti al divider circuit show n below.
The voltm e t e r read s 3.0 V. Which of the following chan g e s would caus e the
readi n g on the voltm et e r to incr e a s e ?
A.
Swap pi n g the positions of the LDR and the fixed resisto r
B.
Incr e a si n g the resist a n c e of the fixed resis to r
C.
Incr e a si n g the amou n t of light shining on the LDR
D.
Decr e a s i n g the amou n t of light shining on the LDR
(Tot al 1 mar k )
61.
A coil of wire has a large num b e r of turn s. It is move d relative to a fixed
mag n e ti c field. The emf gen e r a t e d will be equal to the
A.
rat e of chan g e of magn e t i c flux linka g e .
B.
rat e of chan g e of the magn e ti c flux throu g h the coil.
C.
chan g e of mag n e t i c flux linka g e .
D.
chan g e of the mag n e ti c flux thro u g h the coil.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
78
62.
A sinus oid al ac powe r supply has rms voltag e V and supplie s rms cur r e n t I.
What is the maxim u m insta n t a n e o u s powe r delive r e d ?
A.
B.
2 VI
2 VI
C.
VI
D.
VI
2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
79
63.
A positively char g e d par ticle follows a circul a r path as show n below.
Which of the following elect ric fields could have caus e d the cha r g e d
par ticl e to follow the above pat h?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
80
64.
A stone is throw n from a cliff and it lands in the sea as show n below. Air
resis t a n c e is negligible.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s is corr e c t whilst the stone is in motion?
A.
The vertic al compo n e n t of the stone’s displa c e m e n t is const a n t .
B.
The horizont al compo n e n t of the stone’s displa c e m e n t is const a n t .
C.
The vertic al compo n e n t of the stone’s velocity is const a n t .
D.
The horizont al compo n e n t of the stone’s velocity is cons t a n t .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
81
65.
Which of the diag r a m s below bes t rep r e s e n t s the equipot e n t i al surfa c e s
arou n d two identical point mas s e s ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
82
66.
Which of the following grap h s repr e s e n t s how the total ene r gy E of an
orbitin g sat ellite varies with orbital radius r?
A.
B.
C.
IB Questionbank Physics
83
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
67.
The diagr a m below show s a circ uit involving a photo el e c t r i c cell. Whe n UV
light is shon e onto the met al catho d e , elect r o n s are emitt e d esta blis hi n g a
photoc u r r e n t .
Which of the following chan g e s could caus e the photoc u r r e n t to stop?
A.
Incr e a si n g the poten ti al differe n c e of the powe r supply.
B.
Incr e a si n g the frequ e n c y of the UV light.
C.
Incr e a si n g the intensity of the UV light.
D.
Chan gi n g the met al surfac e to one with a smalle r work function.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
84
68.
Elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V . Their
de Broglie wavel en g t h is λ. The accel e r a t i n g pote n ti al differ e n c e is
incr e a s e d to 2 V . Which of the following gives the new de Broglie
wavele n g t h ?
A.
2λ
2λ
B.
λ
2
C.
D.
λ
2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
69.
Which of the following ene r gy level diag r a m s bes t rep r e s e n t s the kine tic
ene r gy E K of the “elect r o n in a box” model, whe r e an elect r o n is confine d to
move in one dim en sio n ? The varia bl e n is an inte g e r (1, 2, 3, 4 etc. ).
A.
B.
IB Questionbank Physics
85
C.
D.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
70.
A proton is confine d within a nucle u s. What is the orde r of ma gni t u d e of
the unce r t a i n t y in its mom e n t u m ?
A.
10 –30 Ns
B.
10 –20 Ns
C.
10 –10 Ns
D.
1 Ns
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
86
71.
Differe n t nuclides spont a n e o u s ly und e r g o radioa c tive dec ay, emittin g
eithe r α, β or γ radi ation.
Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies all the emission s tha t do not
have discr e t e ener gi e s ?
A.
α
B.
β
C.
γ
D.
α and γ
(Tot al 1 mar k )
72.
The half- life of a radioac tive isotop e is 10 days. What is the perc e n t a g e of
the sam pl e rem ai ni n g after 25 days?
A.
0 %
B.
18 %
C.
25 %
D.
40 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )
73.
Which of the following fuels has the highe s t ene r gy density?
A.
Coal
B.
Gas
C.
Oil
D.
Uraniu m
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
87
74.
The decim al num b e r 18 is rep r e s e n t e d in bina ry by a five bit digital
num b e r . Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the least- significa n t bit
(LSB) and the most- significan t bit (MSB) of the bina ry num b e r ?
LSB
MS B
A.
0
0
B.
0
1
C.
1
0
D.
1
1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
75.
A CD stor e s digital inform a t io n with a serie s of bum p s (lands) and pits. The
dept h of each pit is d . Which of the following is the most appr o p ri a t e
wavele n g t h of laser light to recove r the infor m a ti o n?
A.
d
2
B.
d
C.
2d
D.
4d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
76.
Which of the following digital device s is least likely to use a char g e- couple d
device (CCD) in its const r u c t io n?
A.
Fax machin e
B.
Cam e r a
C.
Watch
D.
X-ray machi n e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
88
77.
Data analysis ques tion.
The photog r a p h below shows a mag nifie d imag e of a dark cent r a l disc
sur r o u n d e d by conce n t r i c dark rings. These rings wer e prod u c e d as a
res ult of interfe r e n c e of monoc h r o m a t i c light.
The gra p h below shows how the ring diam e t e r D varies with the ring
num b e r n.
The inner m o s t ring corr e s p o n d s to n = 1. The corr e s p o n d i n g dia m e t e r is
labelled in the photo g r a p h . Erro r bars for the diam e t e r D are show n.
IB Questionbank Physics
89
(a)
Stat e on e piece of eviden c e tha t shows that D is not propo r tio n a l to n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
On the gra p h opposit e, dra w the line of best- fit for the data points.
(2)
(c)
It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n D and n is of the form
D = cn p
whe r e c and p are const a n t s .
Explain what grap h you would plot in orde r to det e r m i n e the value of
p.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
90
(d)
1
Theory sugg e s t s that p = 2 and so D 2 = kn (whe r e k = c 2 ).
A grap h of D 2 agains t n is show n below. Error bar s are show n for the
first and last data points only.
(i)
Using the first grap h, calcul a t e the perc e n t a g e unc e r t a i n t y in D 2 ,
of the ring n = 7.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Based on the secon d gra p h, stat e on e piec e of evide nc e that
suppo r t s the relation s hi p D 2 = kn .
IB Questionbank Physics
91
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use the secon d grap h to dete r m i n e the value of the cons t a n t k,
as well as its unce r t a i n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iv)
Stat e the unit for the const a n t k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
78.
This ques tion is abou t a prob e in orbit.
A prob e of mas s m is in a circul a r orbit of radius r arou n d a sphe ri c al
plane t of mas s M .
IB Questionbank Physics
92
(diagra m not to scale)
IB Questionbank Physics
93
(a)
Stat e why the work done by the gravit a tio n a l force durin g one full
revolution of the prob e is zero.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Deduc e for the prob e in orbit that its
(i)
spee d is v =
GM
r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)

(ii)
total ener gy is E =
GM m
2r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
94
(c)
It is now requi r e d to place the prob e in anot h e r circul a r orbit furth e r
away from the plane t.
To do this, the prob e’s engin e s will be fired for a very short time.
Stat e and explain whet h e r the work done on the prob e by the engin e s
is positive, neg ative or zero.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
79.
This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
95
(b)
Unpola rize d light is incide n t on the surfa c e of a plastic. The angle of
inciden c e is θ.
The reflect e d light is viewe d thro u g h an analys e r whos e tra n s m i s sio n
axis is vertical.
The variatio n with θ of the inte n si ty I of the tra n s m i t t e d light is show n
in the grap h.
(i)
Explain why ther e is an angle of incide n c e , for which the
inten si ty of the tran s mi t t e d light is zero.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
96
(ii)
Calculat e the refr ac tive index of the plastic.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Unpola rize d light from a sour c e is split, so that the r e is a path
differ e n c e of half a wavel e n g t h betw e e n the two bea m s .
A lens brings the light to focus at point P on a scre e n . The lens does
not introd u c e any addition a l path differ e n c e .
Stat e and explain whet h e r any light would be obse rv e d at P, in the
case in which the polarize r s have their tra n s m i s sio n axes
(i)
par allel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
97
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
98
(ii)
at right angles to each othe r.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
80.
This ques tion is abou t ther m o dy n a m i c s .
The P–V diagr a m shows the expa n sio n of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas, from
stat e A to stat e B.
The tem p e r a t u r e of the gas in stat e A is 400 K.
(a)
Calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the gas in stat e B.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
99
(b)
(i)
Calculat e the work done by the gas in expa n di n g from
stat e A to stat e B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the amou n t of the r m a l ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d during the
expa n sio n from stat e A to sta t e B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
The gas is isoth e r m a lly comp r e s s e d from stat e B back to stat e A.
(i)
Using the P–V diagr a m axes above, dra w the variation of
pres s u r e with volum e for this isoth e r m a l comp r e s s io n.
(1)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the ma gni t u d e of the the r m a l ene r gy
tran sf e r r e d in this case would be less tha n, equ al to or gre a t e r
than the ther m a l ene r gy tra n sf e r r e d in (b)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
100
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
101
81.
This ques tion is abou t circula r motion.
A ball of mas s 0.25 kg is attac h e d to a string and is ma d e to rota t e with
cons t a n t spee d v along a horizon t al circle of radius r = 0.33 m. The string
is att ac h e d to the ceiling and make s an angle of 30° with the vertical.
(a)
(i)
On the diagr a m above, draw and label arrow s to
repr e s e n t the forces on the ball in the position show n.
(2)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the ball is in equilibri u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
102
(b)
Deter m i n e the spee d of rota tio n of the ball.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
82.
This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs) and photon s .
(a)
Stat e on e factor that affect s the resolutio n of an imag e obtain e d with
a CCD.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Stat e on e adva n t a g e of a CCD imag e, comp a r e d to an imag e on
ordina ry photo g r a p h i c film.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
103
(c)
Light of inten si ty 5.3 × 10 –3 W m –2 and frequ e n c y 3.9 × 10 14 Hz is
inciden t on a pixel of a CCD. The are a of the pixel is 4.2 × 10 –12 m 2
and the quan t u m efficiency is 80 %.
The capacit a n c e of the pixel is 14 pF.
(i)
Show that the num b e r of photon s incide n t on the pixel of the
CCD per secon d is 8.6 × 10 4 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Calculat e the char g e that acc u m ul a t e s in the pixel durin g a time
of 25 ms.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the poten ti al differ e n c e at the ends of the pixel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
104
(iv)
Calculat e the mom e n t u m of one of the incide n t photon s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
105
(v)
Using your ans w e r to (c)(iv), estim a t e the pres s u r e exer t e d by
the photon s in (c)(i) on the pixel of the CCD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
83.
This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c oscillations .
A longit u di n al wave travels throu g h a mediu m from left to right.
Grap h 1 show s the variation with time t of the displa c e m e n t x of a particle
P in the mediu m .
Grap h 1
IB Questionbank Physics
106
(a)
For par ticle P,
(i)
stat e how gra p h 1 shows that its oscillation s are not dam p e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
calcula t e the mag nit u d e of its maxim u m accele r a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) calcula t e its speed at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
stat e its directio n of motion at t = 0.12 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
107
(b)
Grap h 2 shows the variatio n with position d of the displa c e m e n t x of
particl es in the mediu m at a partic ul a r insta n t of time.
Grap h 2
Deter m i n e for the longit u di n a l wave, using gra p h 1 and gra p h 2,
(i)
the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
108
Grap h 2 – repr o d u c e d to assist with answ e ri n g (c)(i).
(c)
The diagr a m shows the equilibriu m positions of six par ticle s in the
medi u m .
(i)
On the diagr a m above, draw cros s e s to indic at e the positions of
thes e six particle s at the insta n t of time whe n the displa c e m e n t is
given by grap h 2.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
109
(ii)
On the diagr a m above, label with the lette r C a par ticl e that is at
the cent r e of a com p r e s s i o n.
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
84.
This ques tion is abou t mech a ni c s and the r m a l physic s.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the spe e d v of a ball of mas s
0.50 kg, that has been relea s e d from rest above the Eart h’s surfa c e .
The force of air resist a n c e is not negligible. Assum e that the accel e r a t io n
of free fall is
g = 9.81 m s –2 .
(a)
Stat e, witho u t any calcula tion s , how the gra p h could be use d to
dete r m i n e the dista n c e fallen.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
110
(b)
(i)
In the spac e below, dra w and label arrow s to rep r e s e n t
the forces on the ball at 2.0 s.
(1)
(ii)
Use the grap h opposit e to show that the accel e r a t io n of the ball
at 2.0 s is appr oxi m a t e ly 4 m s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the magni t u d e of the force of air resis t a n c e on the ball
at 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
111
(iv)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the air resist a n c e on the ball at t = 5.0
s is smaller than, equal to or gre a t e r tha n the air resist a n c e at t
= 2.0 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
After 10 s the ball has fallen 190 m.
(i)
Show that the sum of the pot e n ti al and kinetic ene r gi e s of the
ball has decr e a s e d by 780 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The specific heat capa city of the ball is 480 J kg –1 K–1 . Estim a t e
the incr e a s e in the tem p e r a t u r e of the ball.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
112
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
113
(iii) Stat e an assu m p t i o n mad e in the esti m a t e in (c)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
85.
This ques tion is abou t nuclea r physics.
(a)
(i)
Define bindin g ener g y of a nucle u s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
239
The mas s of a nucle u s of plutoniu m ( 9 4 P u ) is 238.99 0 3 9 6 u.
Deduc e that the bindin g ene r gy per nucle on for pluto ni u m is 7.6
MeV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
114
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with nucle on num b e r A of the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon.
239
Plutoni u m ( 9 4 P u ) und e r g o e s nucle a r fission accor di n g to the rea c tion
given below.
239
1
94Pu  0 n
(i)

91
3 8S r
 15466Ba x 01 n
Calculat e the num b e r x of neut r o n s prod u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Use the grap h to estim a t e the ene r gy rele a s e d in this rea c tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
115
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
116
(c)
Stable nuclei with a mass num b e r gre a t e r tha n about 20, cont ai n mor e
neut r o n s than proton s . By refe r e n c e to the prope r ti e s of the nucle a r
force and of the elect r o s t a t i c force, sugg e s t an explan a ti o n for this
obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
86.
This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .
The wav efunction ψ for an elect r o n confine d to move within a “box” of
linea r size
L = 1.0 × 10 –10 m, is a stan di n g wave as show n.
IB Questionbank Physics
117
IB Questionbank Physics
118
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by a wavefu n c tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Stat e the position nea r which this elect r o n is most likely to be found.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
Calcula t e the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
The ene r gy, in joules, of the elect r o n in a hydro g e n atom, is given by
2.1 81 0 1 8

n2
E =
whe r e n is a positive inte g e r . Calcula t e the
wavelen g t h of the photo n emitt e d in a tra n si tion from the first excit e d
stat e of hydro g e n to the grou n d stat e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
119
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
120
(e)
The elect r o n stays in the first excite d stat e of hydrog e n for a time of
appr oxi m a t ely
∆t = 1.0 × 10 –10 s.
(i)
Dete r mi n e the unce r t a i n t y in the ene r gy of the elect r o n in the
first excit ed stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to your answ e r to (e)(i), why the photo n s
emitt e d in tran si tion s from the first excite d sta t e of hydro g e n to
the grou n d stat e will, in fact, have a small rang e of wavele n g t h s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
121
(f)
Diagr a m 1 show s the thr e e lowes t ene r gy levels for an elect r o n in the
hydrog e n atom.
Using the ener gy axis on diagr a m 2, dra w the thr e e lowes t ene r gy
levels for the elect r o n in a box model. You do not have to put any
num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
87.
This ques tion is abou t elect ri c circ uit s.
(a)
Define
(i)
electro m o ti v e force (emf ) of a batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
electrical resista n c e of a condu c t o r .
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
122
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
A batt e r y of emf ε and negligibl e inter n al res ista n c e is conne c t e d in
series to two resisto r s .
The cur r e n t in the circuit is I.
(i)
Stat e an equa tio n giving the total powe r delive r e d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The poten ti al differ e n c e acros s resisto r R 1 is V 1 and that acros s
resis to r R 2 is V 2 .
Using the law of the cons e rv a tio n of ene r gy, ded uc e the equ a tio n
below.
ε = V1 + V2
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
123
(c)
The grap h shows the I-V cha r a c t e r i s ti c s of two cond uc t o r s , X and Y.
On the axes below, sketc h gra p h s to show the variatio n with pote n ti al
differ e n c e V of the resist a n c e of cond u c t o r X (label this gra p h X) and
cond u c t o r Y (label this gra p h Y).
You do not nee d to put any num b e r s on the vertical axis.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
124
(d)
The condu c t o r s in (c) are conn e c t e d in serie s to a bat t e r y of emf ε and
negligible inter n al resis t a n c e .
The powe r dissip a t e d in eac h of the two resisto r s is the sam e .
Using the grap h given in (c),
(i)
det e r m i n e the emf of the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
calcula t e the total powe r dissipa t e d in the circ uit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
125
88.
This ques tion is abou t the ene r gy bala nc e of the Ear t h.
(a)
The inten sity of the Sun’s radia tio n at the position of the Eart h is
appr oxi m a t ely
1400 W m –2 .
Sugg e s t why the aver a g e powe r receive d per unit are a of the Eart h is
350 W m –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m shows a simplifie d model of the ene r gy bala nc e of the
Eart h’s surfac e.
The diagr a m shows radi ation ent e ri n g or leaving the Eart h’s surfa c e
only.
The aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e is T E and
that of the atmo s p h e r e is T A = 242 K.
(i)
Using the data from the diagr a m , stat e the emissivity of the
atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
126
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
127
(ii)
Show that the intensity of the radia tio n radia t e d by the
atm os p h e r e towar d s the Eart h’s surfa c e is 136 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) By refer e n c e to the ene r gy bala n c e of the Eart h’s surfa c e ,
calcula t e T E .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
(i)
Outline a mec h a ni s m by which part of the radia tion
radi at e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e is abso r b e d by gre e n h o u s e gas e s
in the atm os p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
128
(3)
(ii)
Sugg e s t why the incomi n g solar radia tio n is not affect e d by the
mech a ni s m you outline d in (c)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Carbo n dioxide (CO 2 ) is a gre e n h o u s e gas. Stat e on e sour c e and
on e sink (object that re move s CO 2 ) of this gas.
Sourc e: ............................................................................................
..................
Sink: ................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
89.
This ques tion is abou t motion in a ma gn e t i c field and elect r o m a g n e t i c
inductio n
An elect r o n, that has been accele r a t e d from rest by a pote n ti al differ e n c e
of 250 V, ent e r s a region of ma gn e t i c field of stre n g t h 0.12 T that is
direct e d into the plane of the pag e.
IB Questionbank Physics
129
(a)
The elect r o n’s path while in the region of mag n e ti c field is a qua r t e r
circle. Show that the
(i)
spee d of the elect r o n afte r accele r a t i o n is 9.4 × 10 6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
130
(ii)
radi us of the pat h is 4.5 × 10 –4 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) time the elect r o n spen d s in the region of ma g n e ti c field is 7.5 ×
10 –11 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The diagr a m below shows the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n as it ent e r s
and leaves the region of ma gn e t i c field. The mag ni t u d e of the initial
mom e n t u m and of the final mom e n t u m is 8.6 × 10 –24 Ns.
(i)
On the diagr a m above, draw an arro w to indica t e the vector
repr e s e n t i n g the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n .
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
131
(ii)
Show that the magni t u d e of the cha n g e in the mom e n t u m of the
elect r o n is
1.2 × 10 –23 Ns.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Estim a t e the magni t u d e of the aver a g e force on the elect r o n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
A squa r e loop of condu c ti n g wire is place d nea r a str ai g h t wire
car ryin g a const a n t curr e n t I. The wire is in the sam e plan e as the
loop.
The loop is mad e to move with const a n t spe e d v towa r d s the wire.
IB Questionbank Physics
132
(i)
Explain, by refer e n c e to Far a d a y’s and Lenz’s laws of
elect r o m a g n e t i c inductio n, why work must be done on the loop.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Sugg e s t what beco m e s of the work done on the loop.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
90.
This ques tion is abou t som e of the plane t s in the solar syste m .
Four of the plane t s in the solar syste m are Mars, Venus, Jupite r and
Nept u n e .
(a)
List thes e plane t s in orde r of incre a si n g dista n c e from the Sun.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
133
(b)
List thes e plane t s in orde r of decr e a si n g diam e t e r .
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
91.
This ques tion is abou t the Hert zs p r u n g–R u s s e ll (HR) diagr a m and using it
to det e r m i n e some prop e r t i e s of sta r s.
The diagr a m below show s the grid of an HR diagr a m , on which the
position s of select e d star s are show n. (L S = luminosity of the Sun.)
(a)
(i)
Draw a circle arou n d the sta r s that are red giant s.
Label this circle R.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
134
(ii)
Draw a circle arou n d the sta r s that are white dwarfs. Label this
circle W.
(1)
(iii) Draw a line throu g h the sta r s tha t are main sequ e n c e sta r s.
(1)
(b)
Explain, witho u t doing any calcul a tion, how astro n o m e r s can dedu c e
that star B has a large r diam e t e r tha n sta r A.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Using the following dat a and inform a ti o n from the HR diagr a m , show
that star A is at a dista n c e of abou t 800 pc from Eart h.
Appa r e n t brigh t n e s s of the Sun
3
1.4 × 10 W m
=
–2
Appa r e n t brigh t n e s s of sta r A = 4.9 ×
10
–9
Wm
–2
Mea n dista n c e of Sun from Eart h
=
1.0 AU
1 pc
= 2.1 × 10 5 AU
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
135
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
136
(d)
Explain why the dista n c e of sta r A from Eart h canno t be det e r m i n e d
by the met ho d of stellar par allax.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
92.
This ques tion is abou t cosmology.
(a)
Stat e how the obser v e d red- shift of many galaxies is explaine d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Explain how the cos mic micro w a v e backg r o u n d (CMB) radia tio n is
consis t e n t with the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Calcula t e the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e whe n the peak wavel e n g t h
of the CMB was equal to the wavel e n g t h of red light (7.0 × 10 –7 m).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
137
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
138
93.
This ques tion is abou t the main sequ e n c e sta r Khad (Phi Orionis).
The luminosity of Khad is 2.0 × 10 4 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity of the
Sun.
(a)
Assumin g that the expon e n t n in the mas s–lumi no si ty relation is 3.5,
show that the mass of Khad is about 17 solar mas s e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Outline the likely evolution of the sta r Khad afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
94.
This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law and the age of the unive r s e .
IB Questionbank Physics
139
(a)
(i)
Stat e Hubbl e’s law.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
140
(ii)
Stat e why Hubbl e’s law cannot be use d to det e r m i n e the dista n c e
from Eart h to near by galaxie s, suc h as Andro m e d a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
1
(i)
Show that H 0 is an esti m a t e of the age of the
univer s e, wher e H 0 is the Hubbl e const a n t .
(b)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Assumi n g H 0 = 80 km s –1 M pc –1 , estim a t e the age of the
univer s e in secon d s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
95.
This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
In orde r to test a tem po r a r y radio com m u ni c a ti o n link, an audio signal is
broa d c a s t using amplit u d e modul a tio n (AM). The powe r spect r u m of the
res ulti ng carri e r wave is show n below.
IB Questionbank Physics
141
IB Questionbank Physics
142
(a)
Use the inform a t io n in the powe r spec t r u m to det e r m i n e the
(i)
frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
frequ e n c y of the audio signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) ban d wi d t h of this signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
(i)
(FM).
Disting ui s h betw e e n AM and frequ e n c y modul a tio n
AM: .................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
FM: ..................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Outline on e advan t a g e and on e disa dv a n t a g e of using FM as
oppos e d to AM for the tra n s m i s sio n.
Advant a g e : ......................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Disadva n t a g e : .................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
143
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
144
96.
This ques tion is abou t data tran s m i s sio n syste m s .
The block diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s an elect r o nic syste m , S 1 , which
conver t s an analog u e input signal into a serial digital outpu t signal rea dy
for tran s m i s sio n. It involves thre e sepa r a t e syste m blocks labelle d A, B and
C.
(a)
Stat e whet h e r the signal betw e e n block A and block B is analog u e ,
digital or multiplex e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Stat e the function of syste m block A.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
A similar syste m , S 2 , is bas e d on the sam e syste m blocks as S 1 , but
has fewer signal lines betw e e n block B and block C, as show n below.
Explain what differ e n c e s , if any, the r e are betw e e n S 1 and S 2 with
res p e c t to the maxim u m quality of the rep r o d u c t io n of the analog u e
signal after tran s m i s sio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
145
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
The serial digit al outp u t signal is tra n s m i t t e d using an optic al fibre
link. The atte n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of the optic al fibre is –4 dB km –1 .
(i)
Define atten u a tio n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The input powe r to the fibre optic cable is 100 mW and the
outp u t powe r at the end of the cable is 1 mW. Dete r m i n e the
lengt h of the cable.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e two proce s s e s that mus t take place in orde r for this digital
signal to be tran s m i t t e d over a very long dist a n c e .
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
146
97.
This ques tion is abou t satellit es .
A geos t a t io n a r y satellite is used by one count r y to broa d c a s t infor m a ti o n to
a differ e n t count r y.
(a)
Stat e which part of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spe ct r u m is use d for this type
of com m u ni c a t i o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
147
(b)
Explain two disadv a n t a g e s of using a polar satellite for this type of
com m u ni c a t io n, when comp a r e d with using a geost a tio n a r y satellite.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Outline on e possible ethic al issue associa t e d with this broa d c a s t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
98.
This ques tion is abou t a Schmit t trigg e r .
The diagr a m below show s a Sch mit t trigg e r circ uit bas e d on an oper a t io n a l
amplifie r (op- amp).
IB Questionbank Physics
148
The outpu t of this Schmit t trigg e r is positive satu r a ti o n (+13 V) or nega tive
satu r a ti o n (–13 V).
IB Questionbank Physics
149
(a)
Stat e two prop e r t i e s of an ideal op- amp.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Deter m i n e the input value tha t will caus e the outpu t to switc h from –
13 V to +1 3 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Explain how a Schmit t trigg e r can be use d to res h a p e a digital puls e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
150
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
151
99.
This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Erin is a pass e n g e r on a train making a call to a sta n d a r d fixed telep h o n e
line (“landline”) from her mobile phon e. The train move s Erin betw e e n
adjac e n t com m u ni c a t io n cells. Outline the cha n g e s , if any, tha t take place
in the
(a)
cellular excha n g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
public switch e d telep h o n e netwo r k (PSTN).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 2 mark s )
10 0 . This ques tion is abou t dispe r sio n.
(a)
Stat e an appr oxi m a t e value for the wavele n g t h of visible light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Descri b e what is mean t by dispe r si o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
152
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
153
(c)
A nar r o w bea m , consisti n g of a mixtu r e of red and blue light, is
inciden t upon a rect a n g u l a r glass block. The nor m al to the incide n t
surfac e is show n.
On the diag r a m above, dra w labelle d lines to show the pat h s of the
red and blue bea m s , as they pass thro u g h the glass block and out to
the air on the othe r side.
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 1 . This ques tion is abou t a convex lens.
The diagr a m below, draw n to scale, shows a small object O plac e d in front
of a thin convex (conver gi n g) lens. The focal points of the lens are show n,
labelled F. The lens is repr e s e n t e d by the straig h t line XY.
IB Questionbank Physics
154
(a)
(i)
Define the ter m focal point .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t the pat hs of two rays in orde r to
locat e the position of the imag e form e d by the lens. Label the
imag e I.
(3)
(iii) Explain whet h e r the imag e is real or virtual.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
A conver gi n g lens, of focal lengt h 5.0 cm, is use d as a simple
magnifying glass to view an object of lengt h 0.80 cm. The obse rv e r’s
eye is very close to the lens. The image is form e d at the nea r point (25
cm).
(i)
Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the objec t from the lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
155
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the lengt h of the imag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
10 2 . This ques tion is abou t using a diffra c tio n gra tin g to view the emission
spect r u m of sodiu m.
Light from a sodiu m disch a r g e tube is incide n t nor m a lly upon a diffra ctio n
gratin g having 8.00 × 10 5 lines per met r e . The spec t r u m cont ai n s a doubl e
yellow line of wavelen g t h s 589 nm and 590 nm.
(a)
Deter m i n e the angul a r sepa r a t i o n of the two lines whe n viewe d in the
secon d order spect r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
156
(b)
Stat e why it is mor e difficult to obse rv e the doubl e yellow line whe n
viewe d in the first orde r spect r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 3 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.
Elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 25 kV and strike
a molybd e n u m targ e t .
The res ulti n g X-ray spect r u m is show n below.
The accel e r a t i n g pot en ti al differ e n c e is cha n g e d to 15 kV.
(a)
Calcula t e the minim u m wavele n g t h of the X-rays produ c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
157
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
On the gra p h above, sketc h the X-ray spect r u m that would be
prod u c e d .
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
158
10 4 . This ques tion is abou t wedg e film inte rfe r e n c e .
One flat, glass slide is place d at an angle on top of a secon d identic al slide.
The slides are in cont a c t along one short edge and are sepa r a t e d at the
othe r edge by a thin piece of pape r, as show n below.
(diagra m not to scale)
A thin wedg e of air of variabl e thickn e s s , t , is tra p p e d betw e e n the two
slides. The arr a n g e m e n t is viewe d nor m a lly from above, using light of
wavele n g t h 590 nm. The glass plate s are coat e d, so that reflection only
takes place at the botto m surfa c e of the top plat e and the top surfa c e of the
botto m plate.
A series of str aig h t bright and dark fringe s , equally sepa r a t e d and par allel
to the shor t edge of the slides, is see n.
(a)
Deduc e that the thickn e s s of the air wedg e t that gives rise to a brigh t
fringe, is given by 2 t = (m +
1
2
)λ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
159
(b)
The lengt h of the air wedg e , L , is 8.2 cm. The bright fringe s are each
sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e of 1.2 mm. Calcula t e the thickn e s s of the
pape r.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
10 5 . This ques tion is abou t lengt h contr a c ti o n and simult a n e i ty.
(a)
Define proper lengt h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
A space s hi p is travelling to the right at spe e d 0.75 c, thro u g h a tunn el
which is open at both ends. Obse rv e r A is sta n di n g at the cent r e of
one side of the tunn el. Obse rv e r A, for whom the tunn el is at rest,
mea s u r e s the lengt h of the tunn el to be 240 m and the lengt h of the
space s hi p to be 200 m. The diag r a m below shows this situa tion from
the pers p e c t ive of obse rv e r A.
IB Questionbank Physics
160
Observ e r B, for whom the spac e s hi p is station a r y, is sta n di n g at the
cent r e of the spac e s hi p.
IB Questionbank Physics
161
(i)
Calculat e the Lorent z factor, γ, for this situa tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the lengt h of the tunn el accor di n g to obs e rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the lengt h of the spa c e s hi p accor di n g to obse rv e r B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv)
Accor din g to obse rv e r A, the spa c e s hi p is compl e t e ly inside the
tunn el for a shor t time. Sta t e and explain whet h e r or not,
accor di n g to obs erv e r B, the spac e s hi p is eve r compl e t ely inside
the tunn el.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
162
(c)
Two sour ce s of light are locat e d at eac h end of the tunn el. The
diagr a m below show s this situa tion from the pers p e c tiv e of obse rv e r
A.
Accordi n g to observ e r A, at the insta n t whe n obse rv e r B pas s e s
obse rv e r A, the two sour c e s of light emit a flash. Obse rv e r A see s the
two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly. Discus s whet h e r or not obse r v e r B sees
the two flashe s simult a n e o u s ly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
163
10 6 . This ques tion is abou t relative velocitie s and ene r gy at rela tivistic spe e d s .
Two identic al rocket s are moving along the sam e str ai g h t line as viewe d
from Eart h.
Rocket 1 is moving away from the Eart h at spe e d 0.80 c rela tiv e to the
Eart h and rocket 2 is moving away from rocke t 1 at spe e d 0.60 c relat iv e
to rock e t 1 .
(a)
Calcula t e the velocity of rocke t 2 rela tive to the Eart h, using the
(i)
Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n equ a tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
relativistic tran sfo r m a t i o n equ a tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Comm e n t on your ans w e r s in (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
164
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
165
(c)
The rest mas s of rocke t 1 is 1.0 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the relat ivi s t i c
kinetic ener gy of rocke t 1, as me a s u r e d by an obs e rv e r on Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
10 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t .
The diagr a m below show s the ess e n ti al feat u r e s of the app a r a t u s used in
the Michelso n–Mo rl ey experi m e n t .
IB Questionbank Physics
166
(a)
Stat e and explain how this appa r a t u s was use d to try to mea s u r e the
spee d of the Eart h relative to the ethe r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b)
Stat e the res ult of this expe ri m e n t and explain how this res ult
suppo r t s the special theo ry of relativity.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
167
10 8 . This ques tion is abou t gravit a tio n a l red- shift.
Two identic al laser s are situa t e d on the surfa c e of the Eart h. One is
direct e d horizon t ally towa r d s obse rv e r A, who me a s u r e s the frequ e n c y to
be 4.62 × 10 14 Hz. The othe r is dire c t e d vertic ally upw a r d s towa r d s
obse rv e r B, who is at a height of 1.00 × 10 2 m
(a)
(i)
Stat e how the freq u e n c y as mea s u r e d by obs e rv e r B
comp a r e s with the freq u e n c y as mea s u r e d by obse rv e r A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the differ e n c e in freq u e n c y bet w e e n the lase r light as
meas u r e d by obse rv e r s A and B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e on e assu m p ti o n tha t you ma d e in (a)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
168
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
169
(b)
The laser s are now place d on a spa c e s hi p, which is acc el e r a t i n g
upw a r d s at a const a n t rate of 9.81 m s –2 , far away from any othe r
mas s e s as shown below. The dista n c e of obse rv e r D from the lase r is
1.00 × 10 2 m. Obse rv e r C is at the botto m of the spa c e s hi p.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the equivale n c e principle, the frequ e n ci e s
mea s u r e d by observ e r s C and D, as comp a r e d to obse rv e r s A and B.
.........................................................................................................................
.............
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
170
10 9 . This ques tion is abou t soun d inte nsi ty levels.
As part of a safety inspec tion of a new factory, a data logge r mea s u r e s the
inten si ty of the soun d s gen e r a t e d by the mac hi n e s . The soun d inten sity
levels nee d to be within acce p t a bl e limits.
(a)
Define intensit y and intensit y level .
Inten sit y: .................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Inten sit y
level: ...............................................................................................
..............
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The data logge r is moved betw e e n five differ e n t location s in the
factory (A → E).
The readi n g s are show n below.
(i)
Loca t i o n
Rea di n g on dat a log g e r /
mW m –2
A
302
B
158
C
891
D
413
E
524
Dete r mi n e the intensi ty level at the noisies t location.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
171
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
172
(ii)
Using your ans w e r to (b)(i), discus s whe t h e r or not it is
nece s s a r y for the mac hin e ope r a t o r s to use ear prot e c t o r s whe n
workin g in this factory.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) One possibl e effect on hea ri n g of long- ter m expos u r e to noise is
tinnitu s . Outline what is me a n t by tinnitu s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
11 0 . This ques tion is abou t medic al imagin g.
A patie n t is susp e c t e d of having a parti al blocka g e in his intes ti n e as it
leads away from his stom a c h . Possible me dic al imagi n g tech ni q u e s includ e
X-ray photo g r a p h y, ultr a s o u n d and the use of an endos c o p e .
(a)
When prod u ci n g the X-ray photo g r a p h , the dose is kept to a minim u m
by a tech ni q u e called enh a n c e m e n t .
(i)
Outline why the dos e nee d s to be kept to a minim u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
173
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
174
(ii)
Describ e on e possible enha n c e m e n t tech ni q u e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Discus s any extr a proc e d u r e s that are nee d e d to get an
app r o p r i a t e imag e of the inte s tin e in this situa tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
A succe s sf ul ultr a s o u n d scan relies on cha n g e s of acous tic impe d a n c e
arou n d the struc t u r e being imag e d .
(i)
Define acous tic impe d a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e the SI unit in which it is me a s u r e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
175
(iii) Explain, in ter m s of acous tic impe d a n c e , why gel nee d s to be
applied on the surfac e of the skin befor e the ultra s o u n d scan.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
The blocka g e is cut out and re mov e d in a proc e d u r e which involves a
laser and an endos co p e .
(i)
Outline how it is possible to use a lase r as a scalpel (knife).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
By refer r i n g to the role playe d by optic fibre s, disc us s how an
endos co p e is used in this situa tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
176
IB Questionbank Physics
177
11 1 . This ques tion is abou t radiation in me dicin e.
A nucle a r stres s test is used to inves tig a t e the blood flow within a patie n t’s
hea r t durin g exer cis e.
The radioisot o p e thalliu m- 201 is inject e d into the patie n t’s blood and a
gam m a- ray det ec t o r is then use d to recor d its distrib u tio n within the hea r t
muscle.
The following infor m a t io n about this proc e d u r e is availabl e.
Mass of patien t = 75 kg
Dose equivale n t for a nucle a r stre s s test = 25 mSv
(a)
The quality factor of the ga m m a- rays is 1. Dete r m i n e the ene r gy
absor b e d by the patien t as a res ult of the thallium injection.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Sugg e s t whet h e r you would expe c t the ene r gy calcula t e d in (a) to
res ult in a significan t incre a s e in the patie n t’s tem p e r a t u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
178
(c)
On aver a g e , 1 in every 1000 patie n t s who und e r t a k e a nucle a r str e s s
test go on to develop canc e r as a result of the radioa c tive dos e that
they received durin g the test.
(i)
By refer r i n g to the conc e p t of bala n c e d risk, outline why the test
may still be of benefit to the patie n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The hospit al tech nicia n who admini st e r s the test could also
receive an incr e a s e d dos e.
Outline how film badg e s are use d to prot e c t tec hni ci a n s from
receiving exces sive dos es of radia tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
11 2 . This ques tion is abou t meso n s .
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by an exch a n g e par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
179
(b)
In 1935, the physicist Hide ki Yukawa pre dic t e d that the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s was medi a t e d by particle s calle d
meson s . Given that the rang e of the stron g inte r a c t io n is
appr oxi m a t ely 1.5 × 10 –15 m, calcula t e a possible value for the res t
mas s of a meso n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A meson called the pion was det e c t e d in cosmic ray reac tio n s in 1947
by Powell and Occhialini. The pion com e s in thre e possibl e cha r g e
stat e s: π + , π – and π 0 The Feyn m a n diagr a m below rep r e s e n t s a
possible reac tion in which a pion particip a t e s .
Stat e and explain whet h e r the meso n prod u c e d is a π + , π – or π 0 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
180
(d)
Stat e the possible spin num b e r s of meso n s and explain your answ e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e)
Explain why, accor di n g to the qua r k model, it is not possible for a
particl e to consist of two up qua r k s only.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
181
11 3 . This ques tion is abou t accel er a ti n g par ticle s.
The diagr a m below show s the basic struc t u r e of a cyclotr o n.
Char g e d particle s are emitt e d from a sour c e at the cent r e . They move in a
vacuu m throu g h two D-shap e d cavitie s or “dee s”. Ther e is a unifor m
mag n e ti c field direc t e d into the pag e, within the region of the dee s.
(a)
Outline why the voltag e applie d acros s the dee s must cha n g e polarity
every half revolutio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
182
(b)
Show that the frequ e n c y, f, of the applied pote n ti al differ e n c e is given
by the expr e s sio n
qB
f = 2 πm
whe r e
q = char g e of particle
m = mas s of particle
B = mag n e t i c field stre n g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Stat e two disadv a n t a g e s of using a cyclotr o n rath e r tha n a
synch r o t r o n to accel e r a t e particle s.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
Explain why it is nece s s a r y to acc ele r a t e particl e s to high spee d s in
orde r to crea t e new par ticl e s of large mass.
IB Questionbank Physics
183
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
184
(e)
High ene r gy particles are used to prob e the nucle u s. Explain why
alph a particle s would give bett e r resolution tha n proton s moving at
the sam e spee d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
11 4 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy and cons e rv a tio n laws.
Two proton s moving at the sam e spe e d in opposit e direc tio n s, collide with
each othe r produ ci n g thr e e proto n s and an anti- proton, as show n below.
p + p →p + p + p + p
(a)
Calcula t e the minim u m possibl e kinetic ene r gy of on e of the colliding
proto n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
185
(b)
Explain why the following rea c tion is not possible, even if the colliding
particl es have enou g h ene r gy.
p + n →p + p + p
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
11 5 . This ques tion is abou t cosmology and string s .
(a)
The bindin g ener gy of a helium nucle u s is abou t 28 MeV. Calcula t e
the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e above which helium nuclei could not
have exist e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Stat e two fund a m e n t a l differ e n c e s betw e e n the sta n d a r d model and
the theo ry of string s.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
186
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
187
11 6 . Which of the following will red uc e ran do m erro r s in an expe ri m e n t ?
A.
Using an instr u m e n t having a gre a t e r precision
B.
Checkin g the calibr a ti o n of the inst r u m e n t use d
C.
Checkin g for zero erro r on the instr u m e n t use d
D.
Repe a ti n g readi n g s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
11 7 . A body accele r a t e s from rest with a unifor m accele r a t i o n a for a time t . The
unce r t ai n t y in a is 8 % and the unc e r t a i n t y in t is 4 %. The unc e r t a i n t y in
the spee d is
A.
32 %.
B.
12 %.
C.
8 %.
D.
2 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
11 8 . Which of the following lists two scala r qua n ti tie s ?
A.
emf, mom e n t u m
B.
emf, weigh t
C.
impuls e, kinetic ener gy
D.
magn e t i c flux, kinetic ener gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
188
11 9 . The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the acc el e r a t io n a of an objec t.
Which of the following is the cha n g e in velocity of the object in the time
interv al 0 to 4 s?
A.
–8 m s –1
B.
–4 m s –1
C.
+4 m s –1
D.
+8 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
189
12 0 . A car accele r a t e s from rest. The accele r a t i o n incr e a s e s with time. Which
grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the spe e d v of the car?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12 1 . Which of the following is the condition for a body to be in tra n sl a tio n a l
equilibriu m ?
A.
The result a n t force on the body in any direc tio n is zero.
B.
The velocity of the body in any direc tion is zero.
C.
No exte r n al force is acting on the body.
D.
No work is done on the body.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
190
12 2 . A stone attac h e d to a string is moving in a horizon t a l circle. The const a n t
spee d of the stone is v .
The diagr a m below show s the ston e in two differ e n t positions , X and Y.
Which of the following shows the direc tio n of the cha n g e of velocity of the
ston e when moving from position X to position Y?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
191
12 3 . The gra p h shows the variation with force F of the exte nsio n s of a sprin g.
The work done in chan gi n g the exte n sion of the sprin g from 3.0 cm to 6.0
cm is
A.
15 N cm.
B.
30 N cm.
C.
45 N cm.
D.
60 N cm.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12 4 . The ener gy of the molec ul e s of an ideal gas is
A.
ther m al only.
B.
ther m al and pote n ti al.
C.
poten ti al and kinetic.
D.
kinetic only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
192
12 5 . Oil with volum e V has specific heat capa city c at tem p e r a t u r e T . The
density of oil is ρ.
Which of the following is the the r m a l capa ci ty of the oil?
A.
ρcV
B.
cV
ρ
C.
ρcVT
D.
cV
ρT
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12 6 . The volum e of an ideal gas in a cont ai n e r is incre a s e d at const a n t
tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is/ar e cor r e c t abou t the
molecul e s of the gas?
I.
Their spee d rem ai n s const a n t .
II.
The frequ e n cy of collisions of molec ul e s with unit are a of the
cont ai n e r wall decr e a s e s .
III.
The force betw e e n the m dec r e a s e s .
A.
I only
B.
I and II only
C.
I and III only
D.
II and III only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
193
12 7 . A particle oscillat es with simple har m o ni c motion with period T .
At time t = 0, the particl e has its maxim u m displ ac e m e n t . Which gra p h
shows the variation with time t of the kinetic ene r gy E k of the par ticle?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
194
12 8 . An object is und e r g oi n g simple har m o nic motion with light dam pi n g. The
natu r al frequ e n c y of oscillation of the objec t is f 0 . A periodic force of
frequ e n c y f is applied to the object. Which of the following gra p h s best
shows how the amplit u d e a of oscillation of the object varie s with f?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
195
12 9 . The gra p h shows meas u r e m e n t s of the heigh t h of sea level at differe n t
times t in the Bay of Fundy.
Which of the following gives the app r oxi m a t e am plit u d e and period of the
tides?
Amplit u d e
Peri o d
A.
6.5 m
6 hour s
B.
13 m
12 hour s
C.
6.5 m
12 hour s
D.
13 m
6 hour s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
196
λ
13 0 . Two waves meet at a point. The waves have a path differ e n c e of 4 . The
phas e differe n c e betw e e n the waves is
A.
π
8 rad.
B.
π
4 rad.
C.
π
2 rad.
D.
π rad.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 1 . Two elect r o d e s , sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d , in a vacuu m are maint ai n e d at a
cons t a n t pote n ti al differ e n c e . An elect r o n, accel e r a t e d from one elect r o d e
to the other , gains kinetic ener gy E k . The dist a n c e betw e e n the elect r o d e s
1
is now chan g e d to 3 d .
What is the gain in kinetic ener gy of an elect r o n that is accele r a t e d from
one elect r o d e to the other ?
A.
Ek
3
B.
Ek
C.
3 Ek
D.
9 Ek
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
197
13 2 . The gra p h shows the I–V char a c t e r i s ti c s of two resisto r s .
When resisto r s X and Y are conn e c t e d in serie s, the cur r e n t in the resisto r s
is 2.0 A. What is the resist a n c e of the serie s com bin a tio n of X and Y?
A.
7.0 Ω
B.
1.3 Ω
C.
1.1 Ω
D.
0.14 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 3 . The definition of the amp e r e refe r s to the
A.
num b e r of elect r o n s passin g a given point per secon d.
B.
force betw e e n par allel cur r e n t- car ryin g condu c t o r s .
C.
powe r dissip at e d per unit resist a n c e .
D.
amou n t of char g e tran sf e r r e d per secon d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
198
13 4 . A space c r af t travels away from Eart h in a strai g h t line with its motor s shut
down. At one insta n t the spee d of the spac e c r a f t is 5.4 km s –1 . After a time
of 600 s, the spee d is 5.1 km s –1 . The aver a g e gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h
acting on the spac e c r af t during this time inte rv al is
A.
5.0 × 10 –4 N kg –1
B.
3.0 × 10 –2 N kg –1
C.
5.0 × 10 –1 N kg –1
D.
30 N kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 5 . Two isol ated point char g e s , –7 μC and +2 μC, are at a fixed dist a n c e apa r t .
At which point is it possible for the elect ric field str e n g t h to be zero?
(not to scale)
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 6 . A long str ai g h t wire carri es an elect ric cur r e n t per p e n di c ul a r ly out of the
pap e r . Which of the following repr e s e n t s the ma gn e t i c field patt e r n due to
the curr e n t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
199
13 7 . Which nucleon s in a nucleu s are involve d in the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n and
the stron g short- ran g e nuclea r inte r a c ti o n?
Coul o m b int er a c t i o n
Str o n g sh or t- ran g e
int e r a c t i o n
A.
proton s
proto n s , neut r o n s
B.
proton s
neut r o n s
C.
proton s
proto n s
D.
proton s , neut r o n s
neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
13 8 . Two sam pl e s of radioa ctiv e subs t a n c e s X and Y have the sam e initial
activity. The half- life of X is T and the half- life of Y is 3 T . After a time of 3 T
the ratio
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cX
e
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cY
e is
A.
8.
B.
4.
C.
1
4.
D.
1
8.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
200
13 9 . The nuclea r equ atio n below is an exa m pl e of the tra ns m u t a t i o n of mer c u r y
into gold.
2
1H
 18909H g 
197
7 9 Au
+ X
The particle X is a
A.
gam m a- ray photon.
B.
heliu m nucleu s .
C.
proto n.
D.
neut r o n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
14 0 . The Sank ey diag r a m of a fossil- fuelled powe r station is show n below.
Which of the following bes t identifies the the r m a l ene r gy rem ov e d by wat e r
and the useful elect ric al ener gy outpu t of the station?
Ther m a l en er g y
re m o v e d
Us e f u l el e c t r i c a l en e r g y
out p u t
A.
2
1
B.
2
3
C.
3
1
D.
1
2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
201
14 1 . World ener gy resou r c e s include coal, nucle a r fuel and geot h e r m a l ene r gy.
Which of the following lists thes e resou r c e s in orde r of pri m a r y ene r gy use
in the world?
A.
nuclea r , geot h e r m a l , coal
B.
nuclea r , coal, geot h e r m a l
C.
coal, geot h e r m a l , nuclea r
D.
coal, nucle a r , geot h e r m a l
(Tot al 1 mar k )
14 2 . Which of the following proce s s e s leads to the produ c tio n of a nucle u s of
plutoni u m- 239 from a nucleu s of ura ni u m- 238?
A.
Neut r o n capt u r e by uraniu m nucle u s
B.
Radioa ctive decay of uraniu m nucle u s
C.
Elect r o n capt u r e by uraniu m nucle u s
D.
Nucle a r fission of urani u m nucle u s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
202
14 3 . Wate r is cont ai n e d in a tidal basin behin d a dam. The wat e r has a dept h h
at high tide and zero at low tide, as show n in the diagr a m .
The gravit a tion al pote n ti al ene r gy of the wate r stor e d in the basin betw e e n
a high tide and a low tide is propo r tio n a l to
A.
h.
B.
h.
C.
h 2.
D.
h 3.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
203
14 4 . Surfac e X has a tem p e r a t u r e T X and emissivity ε x . Surfa c e Y has a
tem p e r a t u r e T Y and emis sivity ε y . The two surfa c e s emit radi a tion at the
sam e rat e.
TX
What is the ratio TY ?
1
A.
εy

ε
 x
4



B.
εx

εy

4







4
C.
εy

ε
 x




4
D.
εX

 εy

1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
14 5 . Large area s of rainfor e s t s are cut down and bur n e d every year. The result
of thes e actions is
A.
red uc e d albed o.
B.
red uc e d car bo n fixation.
C.
incr e a s e d evapo r a t io n rat e.
D.
incr e a s e d mas s of atmos p h e r i c met h a n e .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
204
14 6 . Data analysis ques tion.
The spee d v of waves on the surfa c e of dee p wate r dep e n d s only on the
wavele n g t h λ of the waves. The dat a gath e r e d from a par tic ul a r region of
the Atlantic Ocea n are plott e d below.
The unce r t a i n t y in the speed v is ±0. 3 0 m s –1 and the unc e r t a i n t y in λ is too
small to be show n on the diagr a m .
(a)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to the gra p h,
(i)
why v is not directly propo r tio n a l to λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
the value of v for λ = 39 m.
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
205
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
206
(b)
It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n v and λ is of the form
v = a λ
whe r e a is a const a n t . To test the validity of this hypot h e s i s, values of
v 2 agains t λ are plott e d below.
(i)
Use your answ e r to (a)(ii) to show that the absolut e unce r t a i n t y
in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 39 m is ±5 m 2 s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The absolut e uncer t a i n t y in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 2.5 m is ±1 m 2
s –2 . Using this value and the value in (b)(i), const r u c t error bars
for v 2 at the dat a points for
IB Questionbank Physics
207
λ = 2.5 m and 39 m.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
208
(iii) Stat e why the plott e d dat a in (b)(ii) sugg e s t that it is likely that v
is propo r tio n al to
λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv)
Use the grap h above to det e r m i n e the cons t a n t a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(v)
Theory shows that a =
k
2 π . Dete r mi n e a value for k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
209
14 7 . This ques tion is abou t kine m a t i c s.
Lucy stan d s on the edg e of a vertic al cliff and throw s a ston e vertic ally
upwa r d s .
The stone leaves her han d with a spe e d of 15 m s –1 at the insta n t her hand
is 80 m above the surfac e of the sea. Air resist a n c e is negligibl e and the
accele r a ti o n of free fall is 10 m s –2 .
(a)
Calcula t e the maxim u m heigh t rea c h e d by the ston e as me a s u r e d from
the point wher e it is throw n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
210
(b)
Deter m i n e the time for the stone to rea c h the surfa c e of the sea afte r
leaving Lucy’s hand.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
14 8 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy (hea t).
(a)
Disting ui s h betw e e n inter n a l ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Descri b e, with refer e n c e to the ene r gy of the molec ul e s , the
differ e n c e in inter n al ener gy of a piec e of iron and the inter n al ene r gy
of an ideal gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
211
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
212
(c)
A piece of iron is place d in a kiln until it rea c h e s the tem p e r a t u r e θ of
the kiln. The iron is then quickly tra n sf e r r e d to wat e r held in a
ther m ally insulat e d cont ai n e r . The wat e r is stirr e d until it rea c h e s a
ste a dy tem p e r a t u r e . The following data are availa bl e.
Ther m al capa city of the piece of iron
K–1
Ther m al capa city of the wate r
10 3 J K –1
Initial tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r
Final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r
= 60 J
= 2.0 ×
= 16 °C
= 45 °C
The ther m al capa ci ty of the cont ai n e r and insula tion is negligible.
(i)
Stat e an expr e s s io n, in ter m s of θ and the above dat a, for the
ene r gy tran sf e r of the iron in cooling from the tem p e r a t u r e of the
kiln to the final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the incre a s e in inte r n a l ene r gy of the wat e r as the iron
cools in the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use your answ e r s to (c)(i) and (c)(ii) to det e r m i n e θ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
213
14 9 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion (SHM) and a wave in a
string.
(a)
By refer e n c e to simple har m o ni c motion, stat e wha t is mea n t by
amplit u d e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
A liquid is cont ain e d in a U-tube.
Dia g r a m 1 Dia gr a m 2
The pres s u r e on the liquid in one side of the tube is incr e a s e d so tha t
the liquid is displac e d as show n in diag r a m 2. Whe n the pres s u r e is
sudd e nly relea s e d the liquid oscillat e s .
The dam pi n g of the oscillation s is small.
(i)
Describ e what is mea n t by da m pi n g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
214
(ii)
The displac e m e n t of the liquid surfa c e from its equilibri u m
position is x . The accele r a ti o n a of the liquid in the tube is given
by the expr e s si o n

a =
2g
x
l
wher e g is the accele r a t io n of free fall and l is the total lengt h of
the liquid colum n.
The total lengt h of the liquid colum n in the tube is 0.32 m.
Dete r mi n e the period of oscillation.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
A wave is travelling along a strin g. The string can be modelle d as a
single line of particles and each particl e execu t e s simple har m o ni c
motion. The period of oscillation of the particle s is 0.80 s.
The grap h shows the displa c e m e n t y of par t of the string at time t = 0.
The dist an c e along the string is d.
IB Questionbank Physics
215
(i)
On the grap h, draw an arro w to show the dire c tion of motion of
par ticl e P at the point mark e d on the string.
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the velocity of particle P.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Show that the spee d of the wave is 5.0 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv)
On the grap h above, label with the lette r X the position of
IB Questionbank Physics
216
par ticl e P at t = 0.40 s.
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
15 0 . This ques tion is abou t unified atomic mass unit and a nucle a r rea c tio n.
(a)
Define the ter m unified atomic mas s unit .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
217
(b)
The mas s of a nucleu s of rut h e rf o r di u m- 254 is 254.1 0 0 1 u. Calcula t e
the mas s in GeV c –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
In 1919, Ruthe r fo r d produ c e d the first artificial nucle a r tra n s m u t a t i o n
by bomb a r di n g nitrog e n with α-par ticle s. The rea c tion is repr e s e n t e d
by the following equ atio n.
α+
(i)
14
7N
 187 O + X
Identify X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The following dat a are availa bl e for the rea c tio n.
Rest mass of α
Rest mass of
14
7N
Rest mass of
17
8O
= 3.742 8 GeV c –2
= 13.09 4 2 GeV c –2
+ X
= 16.83 8 3 GeV c –2
The initial kinetic ene r gy of the α-par ticle is 7.68 MeV.
Dete r mi n e the sum of the kinetic ene r gi e s of the oxyge n nucle u s
and X. (Assu m e that the nitrog e n nucle u s is station a r y.)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
218
(d)
The reac tion in (c) prod u c e s oxyge n (O-17). Othe r isotop e s of oxyge n
includ e O-19 which is radioa c tive with a half- life of 30 s.
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by the ter m isotop e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Define the ter m radioactiv e half- life .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(e)
A nucleu s of the isotop e O-19 dec ays to a stable nucle u s of fluorin e.
The half- life of O-19 is 30 s. At time t = 0, a sam pl e of O-19 cont ai n s a
larg e num b e r N 0 nuclei of O-19.
On the grid below, draw a gra p h to show the variation with time t of
the num b e r N of O-19 nuclei rem ai ni n g in the sam pl e . You should
conside r a time of t = 0 to t = 120 s.
IB Questionbank Physics
219
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
15 1 . This ques tion is abou t power prod u c tio n and global war mi n g.
(a)
In any cyclical proc es s design e d to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l
ener gy to work, some ene r gy is always deg r a d e d . Explain what is
mea n t by degr a d e d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A nuclea r powe r station uses ura ni u m- 235 (U- 235) as fuel. Outline the
(i)
proce s s e s and ener gy chan g e s that occur thro u g h which the r m a l
ene r gy is produ c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
220
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
221
(ii)
role of the heat exch a n g e r of the rea c t o r and the tur bi n e in the
gen e r a t io n of elect ric al ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Identify on e proce s s in the powe r station whe r e ene r gy is degr a d e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
The maxim u m powe r outp u t of the Drax coal- fired powe r station in the
UK is 4.0 GW. Dete r mi n e the minim u m mas s of pur e U-235 that would
be requir e d by a nuclea r powe r sta tion to provide the sam e maxim u m
annu al ener gy outpu t as the Drax powe r station.
Ener gy density of U-235
= 82 TJ kg –1
1 year
= 3.2 × 10 7 s
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
222
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
223
(e)
The Drax powe r station produ c e s an enor m o u s amou n t of carbo n
dioxide, a gas classified as a gre e n h o u s e gas. Outline, with refe r e n c e
to the vibratio n al beh aviou r of molec ul e s of car bo n dioxide, wha t is
mea n t by a gre e n h o u s e gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(f)
It has bee n sugg e s t e d that the prod u c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s by
coal- fired powe r station s has incre a s e d global war mi n g . One piec e of
eviden c e to suppo r t this sugg e s ti o n is the incre a s e in sea- level due to
an incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the ocea n s . Over the past 100 yea rs it is
sugg e s t e d that sea- levels have rise n by 6.4 × 10 –2 m due to volum e
expan si o n.
Using the following dat a, det e r m i n e the aver a g e rise in tem p e r a t u r e
in the top levels of the ocea n s in the last 100 years.
Mean dept h of ocea n s that is affect e d by global war mi n g
4.0 × 10 2 m
Coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n of sea wat e r
5.1 × 10 –5 K–1
=
=
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
224
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 18 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
225
15 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c cha r g e .
(a)
A plastic rod XY is held at end X. The end Y is rubb e d with a piec e of
cloth and, as a res ult, the end Y beco m e s elect ric ally cha r g e d .
The proce d u r e is now rep e a t e d using a coppe r rod and it is found tha t
the copp e r rod rem ai n s elect ric ally neut r a l. Explain thes e
obse rv a tio n s in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of cond u c t o r s and insulat o r s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
IB Questionbank Physics
226
(b)
Two plastic rods each have a positive char g e + q situa t e d at one end.
The rods are arr a n g e d as show n.
Assum e that the char g e at the end of eac h rod beha v e s as a point
char g e . Draw, in the shad e d are a on the diagr a m , the elect ric field
patt e r n due to the two cha r g e s .
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
15 3 . This ques tion is abou t power and efficie ncy.
A bus is travelling at a const a n t spe e d of 6.2 m s –1 along a section of road
that is incline d at an angle of 6.0° to the horizont al.
IB Questionbank Physics
227
(a)
(i)
The bus is rep r e s e n t e d by the black dot show n below.
Draw a labelled sketc h to rep r e s e n t the force s acting on the bus.
●
(4)
(ii)
Stat e the value of the rat e of cha n g e of mom e n t u m of the bus.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The total outp u t powe r of the engin e of the bus is 70 kW and the
efficiency of the engin e is 35 %. Calcula t e the input powe r to the
engin e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
The mas s of the bus is 8.5 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the rat e of incr e a s e of
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy of the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
228
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
Using your ans w e r to (c) and the dat a in (b), estim a t e the magni t u d e
of the resistive forces acting on the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e)
The engin e of the bus sudd e nly stops workin g.
(i)
Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the net force opposin g the motion of
the bus at the inst an t at which the engin e stops.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Discus s, with refer e n c e to the air resis t a n c e , the cha n g e in the
net force as the bus slows down.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
229
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 17 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
230
15 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .
(a)
A resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is mad e from copp e r wire of radi us 0 .18
mm. The resistivity of coppe r is 1.7 × 10 –8 Ω m. Dete r m i n e the lengt h
of copp e r wire used to make the resisto r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (a) gua r a n t e e s tha t the resist a n c e
is within 10 % of 1.5 Ω , provide d tha t the powe r dissipa tio n in the
resisto r does not exce e d 1.0 W.
(i)
Sugg e s t why the resist a n c e of the resis to r mi ght be gre a t e r tha n
1.65 Ω if the powe r dissipa tion in the resisto r is gre a t e r tha n 1.0
W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Show that, for a powe r dissipa tio n of 1.0 W, the curr e n t in a
resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is 0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
231
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
232
(iii) The 1.5 Ω resisto r is conne c t e d in series with a varia bl e resis to r
and batt e r y of emf 6.0 V and inte rnal resist a n c e 1.8 Ω.
Estim a t e the resist a n c e R of the variabl e resisto r that will limit
the curr e n t to 0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
15 5 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g (station a r y) wave s.
The diagr a m repr e s e n t s a stan di n g wave of wavele n g t h λ set up on a string
of lengt h L .
The string is fixed at both ends.
(a)
For this stan di n g wave
IB Questionbank Physics
233
(i)
stat e the relation s hi p betw e e n λ and L.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
label, on the diag r a m , two antino d e s wher e the string is
vibratin g in phas e. Label the antinod e s with the lette r A.
(2)
(b)
The stan di n g wave has wavele n g t h λ and frequ e n c y f. Sta t e and
explain, with res p e c t to a sta n di n g wave, what is rep r e s e n t e d by the
prod u c t f λ.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
15 6 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and resolution.
A stud e n t meas u r e s the aper t u r e of the iris of one of her eyes as 2.0 mm in
sunligh t and 7.0 mm in moonligh t. The inten sity at her eye of sunlight is
106 times grea t e r than the inte n si ty of moonlig h t.
(a)
(i)
Dete r mi n e the following ratio.
p ow e ro f lig h te n t e r in tgh ee yein s u n lig h t
p o w e rof lig h te n t e r in tgh ee yein m o o n lig h t
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
234
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
235
(ii)
Sugg e s t why your answ e r in (a)(i) indica t e s that the cha n g e in
diam e t e r of the iris is not the princip al mec h a ni s m by which the
eye is able to adjus t to differ e n t light inte n sitie s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
(i)
Stat e the Rayleigh crite rion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to the Rayleig h crite rio n, whe t h e r the
ability of the eye to resolve the imag e of two object s is gre a t e r in
sunligh t or in moonligh t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
236
(c)
Outline the differ e n t functions of the rods and the cones on the retin a
of the eye in their res po n s e to sunligh t and to moonligh t.
Rods: .......................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Cones: .....................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
15 7 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the photo el e c t r i c effect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
237
(b)
Light of frequ e n cy 8.7 × 10 14 Hz is incide n t on the surfa c e of a met al
in a photocell.
The surf ac e area of the met al is 9.0 × 10 –6 m 2 and the inte n sity of the
light is
1.1 × 10 –3 W m –2 .
(i)
Deduc e that the maxim u m possible photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t in the
photoc ell is 2.7 nA.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of photo el e c t r o n s rele a s e d from the
met al surfac e is 1.2 eV. Calcula t e the value of the work function
of the met al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
15 8 . This ques tion is abou t the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
(a)
Stat e the de Broglie hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
238
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
239
(b)
Deter m i n e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of a proto n tha t has bee n
accel e r a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e of 1.2 kV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Explain why a precis e knowle d g e of the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the
proto n implies that its position cannot be obs e rv e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
15 9 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
13
Nitrog e n- 13 ( 7 N ) is an isotop e that is use d in medic al diagn osi s. The dec ay
cons t a n t of nitrog e n- 13 is 1.2 × 10 –3 s –1 .
(a)
(i)
Define decay cons ta n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
240
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
241
(ii)
A sam pl e of nitrog e n- 13 has an initial activity of 800 Bq. The
sam pl e canno t be use d for diagno s ti c pur po s e s if its activity
beco m e s less than 150 Bq. Dete r m i n e the time it take s for the
activity of the sam pl e to fall to 150 Bq.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
(i)
Calculat e the half- life of nitrog e n- 13
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Outline how the half- life of a sam pl e of nitrog e n- 13 can be
meas u r e d in a labor a t o r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
242
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
243
(c)
Nitro g e n- 13 und e r g o e s β + dec ay. Outline the expe ri m e n t a l evide nc e
that sugg e s t s anot h e r particle, the neut ri n o, is also emitt e d in the
decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
16 0 . This ques tion is abou t digital sam plin g.
(a)
A comp a c t disc stor e s music in digit al form. The music is sam pl e d at a
frequ e n c y of 44.1 kHz. Each sa m pl e consis t s of two 16- bit wor ds.
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by digital form.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The disc stor e s music that takes one hour for playba c k.
Dete r mi n e the minim u m num b e r of bits that are stor e d on the
disc.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
244
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
245
(b)
A pag e from a book has 45 lines of writing. Eac h line of the book has,
on aver a g e , 65 lett e r s and spa c e s . The text of the book is to be stor e d
on comp a c t disc whe r e eac h lette r or spac e on a line is rep r e s e n t e d by
an eight- bit num b e r . Deter m i n e the num b e r of pag e s of text tha t can
be stor e d on a comp a c t disc simila r to that in (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
16 1 . This ques tion is abou t a digital cam e r a .
(a)
By refer e n c e to what is mea n t by a pixel, desc ri b e the struc t u r e of a
char g e- couple d device (CCD).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
The CCD in a cam e r a has an are a of 16 cm 2 and is divide d into 5.6
meg a pix els.
The cam e r a is used to take a photog r a p h with a linea r ma gnific a tion
of 0.030.
(i)
Calculat e the sepa r a t i o n of pixels on the CCD.
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
246
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
247
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the minim u m sepa r a ti o n of two point s on an object
such that they may be see n sepa r a t e ly on the imag e. Diffrac tio n
effect s at the lens may be ignor e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
16 2 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier (op- amp) circuit.
The circuit diagr a m is for a non- inver tin g amplifie r.
The oper a ti o n al amplifier is ideal.
Calculat e the
(a)
gain of the amplifier circuit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
248
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
249
(b)
input pote n ti al V IN at which the amplifier satu r a t e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
16 3 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Describ e the role of the cellula r exch a n g e durin g the making of a call from
a mobile phon e.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
250
16 4 . This ques tion is abou t relativity.
Carri e is in a spac es hi p that is travelling towa r d s a sta r in a str ai g h t- line at
cons t a n t velocity as obse rv e d by Pete r . Pete r is at rest relative to the sta r.
(a)
Car ri e meas u r e s her spac e s hi p to have a lengt h of 100 m. Pete r
mea s u r e s Carrie’s spac es hi p to have a lengt h of 91 m.
(i)
Explain why Carrie mea s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of the spa c e s hi p.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Show that Carri e travels at a spe e d of appr oxi m a t e l y 0.4 c
relative to Pete r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Accordi n g to Carri e, it take s the sta r ten year s to rea c h her. Using
your ans w e r to (a)(ii), calcula t e the dist a n c e to the sta r as mea s u r e d
by Peter .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
251
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
252
(c)
Accordi n g to Pete r, as Carrie pas s e s the sta r she send s a radio signal.
Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Carri e, for the mes s a g e to reac h
Pete r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
253
16 5 . This ques tion is abou t a light clock.
Describ e the principle of a light clock.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 2 mark s )
16 6 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.
The quar k cont e n t of a π + meso n includ e s an up qua r k.
The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the decay of a π + meso n.
IB Questionbank Physics
254
(a)
Identify the par ticles labelle d A and B.
A: .............................................................................................................
....................
B: .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
(b)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to their prop e r t i e s , two differ e n c e s betw e e n a
photon and a W boson.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
The appr oxi m a t e rang e of the weak inte r a c ti o n is 10 –18 m. Dete r mi n e ,
in kg, the likely mass of the W boson.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
16 7 . This ques tion is abou t stra n g e n e s s .
(a)
Outline two prop e r t i e s of str a n g e n e s s .
1. .............................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
255
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
256
(b)
The following particle inte r a c ti o n is propos e d .
p + π – → K– + π +
In this inter a c ti o n, char g e is cons e r v e d .
Stat e, in ter m s of baryo n and stra n g e n e s s cons e rv a t i o n, whet h e r the
inter a c ti o n is possible.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
16 8 . This ques tion is abou t the prope r ti e s of a sta r.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by a
(i)
cons t ella tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
stellar clust e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
257
(b)
Some dat a for the variabl e sta r Betelg e u s e are given below.
Avera g e absolut e ma gni t u d e
Avera g e appa r e n t mag nit u d e
Avera g e appa r e n t brigh t n e s s
Radius
= 790 solar radii
= –5.1
= + 0.60
= 1.6 × 10 –7 W m –2
The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 10 26 W and it has a surfa c e
tem p e r a t u r e of 5700 K.
(i)
Show that the dista n c e from Eart h to Betelge u s e is about 4.0 ×
10 18 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e , in ter m s of the luminosity of the Sun, the luminosity
of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
258
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
On the Hertzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above,
(i)
label the position of Betelg e u s e with the lette r B.
(1)
(ii)
sketc h the position of main sequ e n c e star s.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
259
(d)
Some star s, such as Betelg e u s e , are in combi n a tio n with a comp a nio n
sta r formin g a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m . Descri b e and explain the
char a c t e r i s ti c s of a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
16 9 . A force F is applied to a body moving along a str ai g h t line. A resis tive force
f acts on the body.
Both forces act along the sam e straig h t line as the motion of the body. The
rat e of chan g e of mom e n t u m of the body is equal to
A.
F – f.
B.
F.
C.
F + f.
D.
f.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
260
17 0 . The diagr a m below show s a unifor m elect ri c field of str e n g t h E. The field is
in a vacuu m .
An elect r o n ente r s the field with a velocity v in the dire c tion show n. The
elect r o n is moving in the plan e of the pape r . The path followe d by the
elect r o n will be
A.
par a b olic.
B.
in the directio n of E.
C.
in the directio n of v .
D.
circul a r.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 1 . A space c r af t moves from point X to point Y in the gravit a tion a l field of
Eart h. At point X, the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al is –14 MJ kg –1 . At point Y, the
gravit a tion al poten t i al is –2 MJ kg –1 . Which of the following desc ri b e s the
direction of the motion of the spac e c r a f t rela tive to Eart h and the cha n g e in
gravit a tion al poten t i al?
Dire c t i o n of
Moti o n
Chan g e in gravit a t i o n a l
pot e n t i a l
A.
towa r d s Eart h
+1 2 MJ kg –1
B.
towa r d s Eart h
–12 MJ kg –1
C.
away from Eart h
+1 2 MJ kg –1
D.
away from Eart h
–12 MJ kg –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
261
17 2 . A space c r af t is in orbit at a dista n c e r from the cent r e of the Eart h. The
engine of the space c r af t is fired and it moves to a new orbit of radi us 2 r.
Which of the following desc ri b e s the varia tio n s in kine tic ene r gy and total
ene r gy of the space c r af t ?
Kin e t i c
en e r g y
Tot al en e r g y
A.
decr e a s e
incr e a s e
B.
decr e a s e
decr e a s e
C.
incr e a s e
incr e a s e
D.
incr e a s e
decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 3 . The volum e of an ideal gas in a cont ai n e r is incre a s e d at const a n t
tem p e r a t u r e . Which of the following sta t e m e n t s is/ar e cor r e c t abou t the
molecul e s of the gas?
I.
Their spee d rem ai n s const a n t .
II.
The frequ e n cy of collisions of molec ul e s with unit are a of the
cont ai n e r wall decr e a s e s .
III.
The force betw e e n the m dec r e a s e s .
A.
I only
B.
I and II only
C.
I and III only
D.
II and III only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
262
17 4 . During an adiab a tic expa n sio n, a gas does 50 J of work agains t the
sur r o u n di n g s . It is then cooled at cons t a n t volum e by removing 20 J of
ene r gy from the gas. The mag nit u d e of the total cha n g e in inte r n a l ene r gy
of the gas is
A.
70 J.
B.
50 J.
C.
30 J.
D.
20 J.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 5 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e volum e relations hi p for a fixed mas s of an
ideal gas that unde r g o e s a cycle XYZ.
In which part(s) of the cycle is exte r n a l work done on the gas?
A.
Y → Z only
B.
Y → Z and Z → X only
C.
X → Y and Z → X only
D.
X → Y only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
263
17 6 . A string vibrat e s with fund a m e n t a l frequ e n c y f. The wavele n g t h of the
soun d produ c e d in air is λ. Which of the following cor r e c tly gives the
frequ e n c y of vibration of the fourt h har m o ni c of the string and the
wavele n g t h of the sound in air?
Freq u e n c y
Wave l e n g t h
A.
f
2
λ
4
B.
4 f
4λ
C.
f
2
4λ
D.
4 f
λ
4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 7 . A rada r spee d gun is used to me a s u r e the spee d of a car. The car is moving
with spee d v away from the gun.
The rada r emits microw av e s of frequ e n c y f and spe e d c . Which of the
following is the frequ e n cy of the microw a v e s mea s u r e d at the gun afte r
reflection by the car?
A.
 2v 
f

c


f +
B.
v 
 f
f + c 
C.
 2v 
f

f –  c 
D.
v 
 f
f – c 
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
264
17 8 . An optically active subs t a n c e
A.
compl et ely absor b s polariz e d light.
B.
unpol arize s polarized light.
C.
polarize s unpola riz e d light.
D.
rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
17 9 . The diagr a m below show s two identic al filame n t lamps sepa r a t e d by a
small dista n c e. Light from the lamps is incide n t on a nar r o w slit behin d a
gree n filter. The slit is par allel to the filame n t of eac h lamp.
A photog r a p h is taken of the lamps throu g h the slit. The imag e s of the
filam e n t s on the photog r a p h are just resolve d.
The gre e n filter is replac e d by a red filter and the n by a violet filter. For
each filter a photog r a p h is take n of the lamps throu g h the slit. Which of the
following corr e c tly describ e s the resolution of the imag e s using a red and
using a violet filter?
Red filt er
Viol e t filt e r
A.
resolve d
resolve d
B.
resolve d
not resolve d
C.
not resolve d
resolve d
D.
not resolve d
not resolve d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
265
18 0 . Two resis to r s , of resis t a n c e R 1 and R 2 , are conn e c t e d in serie s with a cell of
emf ε and negligibl e inter n al resist a n c e .
Which expr e s si o n gives the pote n ti al differe n c e acros s the resis to r of
resis t a n c e R 1 ?
A.
 R1

 R1 R 2

ε

B.
 R1 R 2

 R1

ε

C.
 R2

 R1 R 2

ε

D.
 R1 R 2

 R2

ε

(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
266
18 1 . The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the mag n e t i c flux φ thro u g h a
coil that is rotati n g in a unifor m magn e t i c field.
The mag ni t u d e of the emf induc e d acros s the ends of the coil is maxim u m
at time(s)
A.
t 1 and t 3 .
B.
t 2 and t 4 .
C.
t 3 only.
D.
t 4 only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 2 . The rms cur r e n t ratin g of an elect ric hea t e r is 4 A. What direc t cur r e n t
would produ c e the sam e powe r dissipa tio n in the elect ric hea t e r ?
4
A
A.
2
B.
4 A
C.
4 2A
D.
8 A
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
267
18 3 . Two sam pl e s of radioa ctiv e subs t a n c e s X and Y have the sam e initial
activity. The half- life of X is T and the half- life of Y is 3 T . After a time of 3 T
the ratio
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cX
e
a c t ivit of
y s u b s t a n cY
e is
A.
8.
B.
4.
C.
1
4.
D.
1
8.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 4 . In a fission reaction, the total mas s and the total binding ene r gy befor e the
reaction are M i and E i res p e c t ively, whe r e the binding ene r gy is define d as
a positive quan tity. After the rea c tion the total mas s is M f and the total
bindin g ener gy is E f . Which of the following corr e c tly comp a r e s the total
mas s e s and the total binding ene r gi e s ?
Total ma s s
Total bindi n g
en e r g y
A.
Mf > Mi
Ef < Ei
B.
Mf > Mi
Ef > Ei
C.
Mf < Mi
Ef < Ei
D.
Mf < Mi
Ef > Ei
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
268
18 5 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a met al surf ac e and elect r o n s are
relea s e d . The intensi ty of the incide n t light is incre a s e d . What cha n g e s , if
any, occur in the rat e of emission of elect r o n s and the kinetic ene r gy of the
emitt e d elect r o n s ?
Rat e of emi s s i o n of
el e c t r o n s
Kin e t i c en e r g y of th e
e m i t t e d el e c t r o n s
A.
incr e a s e
incr e a s e
B.
decr e a s e
no cha n g e
C.
decr e a s e
incr e a s e
D.
incr e a s e
no cha n g e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 6 . An elect r o n is confine d to move in one dim e n sio n in a box of lengt h L .
Which of the following gives the mom e n t u m of the elect r o n in its lowes t
ene r gy stat e?
A.
h
4L
B.
h
2L
C.
h
L
D.
2h
L
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
269
18 7 . The diagr a m below show s som e of the ene r gy levels availa ble to an
elect r o n in a caesiu m atom.
Photon s of ener gy 0.9 eV pass thro u g h a sa m pl e of low pres s u r e caesiu m
vapou r . Which of the following gives the ene r gy tra n si tion of the elect r o n
when a photon is abso r b e d ?
A.
From –3.9 eV to 0
B.
From –2.5 eV to –1.6 eV
C.
From –1.6 eV to –2.5 eV
D.
From 0 to –3.9 eV
(Tot al 1 mar k )
18 8 . The mag ni t u d e of the unce r t a i n t y in the position of a par ticle is equal to the
de Broglie wavel en g t h of the particl e. Which of the following is the
minim u m unce r t a i n t y in the mom e n t u m p of the par ticle?
A.
p
4π
B.
4π
p
C.
h
p
D.
p
h
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
270
18 9 . Which of the following provide s evide n c e for the qua n tiz a tio n of nucle a r
ene r gy levels?
I.
Alpha particle s have discr e t e value s of kinetic ene r gi e s
II.
Gam m a- ray photo n s have discr e t e ene r gi e s
III.
Atomic line emission spec t r a
A.
I only
B.
II only
C.
I and II only
D.
I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 0 . A radioac tive subs t a n c e S has a dec ay const a n t λ S , subs t a n c e T has a dec ay
cons t a n t λ T . Initially, a sam pl e of S cont ai n s N S nuclei and a sa m pl e of T
cont ai n s N T nuclei. The initial activity of both sam pl e s is the sam e .
NS
The ratio N T is
A.
1
B.
λS
λT
C.
λT
λS
D.
λSλT
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
271
19 1 . Which of the following desc ri b e s the role of the atmos p h e r e in the
gree n h o u s e effect?
A.
The atm os p h e r e is tran s p a r e n t to all solar radia tio n.
B.
The atm os p h e r e absor b s infrar e d radia tio n from the grou n d.
C.
The atm os p h e r e scat t e r s red light more tha n blue light.
D.
Clouds in the atmos p h e r e preve n t abso r p t io n of infra r e d radia tion.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 2 . What is the value of the bina ry num b e r 1100 1 in decim al nota tion?
A.
50
B.
38
C.
25
D.
19
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 3 . A CCD cam e r a is used to capt u r e the image of a paintin g. The are a of the
paintin g is 2.0 m 2 and the are a of the imag e is 50 mm 2 . Which of the
following is the linear mag nific a tion of the imag e ?
A.
2.5 × 10 –5
B.
5.0 × 10 –3
C.
2.0 × 10 2
D.
4.0 × 10 4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
272
19 4 . An analog u e signal is sam pl e d at time inte rval s t . Each sam pl e is conve r t e d
to a digital num b e r having n bits. What is the total num b e r of bits produ c e d
in a time T ?
A.
nT
t
B.
nt
T
C.
ntT
D.
n
Tt
(Tot al 1 mar k )
19 5 . Data analysis ques tion.
The spee d v of waves on the surfa c e of dee p wate r dep e n d s only on the
wavele n g t h λ of the waves. The dat a gath e r e d from a par tic ul a r region of
the Atlantic Ocea n are plott e d below.
The unce r t a i n t y in the speed v is ±0. 3 0 m s –1 and the unc e r t a i n t y in λ is too
small to be show n on the diagr a m .
IB Questionbank Physics
273
(a)
Draw a best- fit line for the data.
(1)
(b)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to the line you have dra w n in (a),
(i)
why v is not directly propo r tio n a l to λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
the value of v for λ = 39 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
It is sugg e s t e d that the rela tion s hi p betw e e n v and λ is of the form
v = a λ
whe r e a is a const a n t . To test the validity of this hypot h e s i s, values of
v 2 agains t λ are plott e d below.
IB Questionbank Physics
274
(i)
Use your answ e r to (b)(ii) to show tha t the absolut e unc e r t a i n t y
in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 39 m is ±5 m 2 s –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The absolut e uncer t a i n t y in v 2 for a wavele n g t h of 2.5 m is ±1 m 2
s –2 . Using this value and the value in (c)(i), const r u c t error bar s
for v 2 at the dat a points for
λ = 2.5 m and 39 m.
(1)
(iii) Stat e why the plott e d dat a in (c)(ii) sugg e s t tha t it is likely tha t v
is propo r tio n al to
λ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv)
Use the grap h above to det e r m i n e the cons t a n t a .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
275
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
276
(v)
Theory shows that a =
k
2 π . Dete r mi n e a value for k .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
19 6 . This ques tion is abou t kine m a t i c s.
Lucy stan d s on the edg e of a vertic al cliff and throw s a ston e vertic ally
upwa r d s .
The stone leaves her han d with a spe e d of 15 m s –1 at the insta n t her hand
is 80 m above the surfac e of the sea. Air resist a n c e is negligibl e and the
accele r a ti o n of free fall is 10 m s –2 .
(a)
Calcula t e the maxim u m heigh t rea c h e d by the ston e as me a s u r e d from
the point wher e it is throw n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
277
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
278
(b)
Deter m i n e the time for the stone to rea c h the surfa c e of the sea afte r
leaving Lucy’s hand.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
19 7 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy (hea t).
(a)
Disting ui s h betw e e n inter n a l ene r gy and the r m a l ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
A piece of iron is place d in a kiln until it rea c h e s the tem p e r a t u r e θ of
the kiln. The iron is then quickly tra n sf e r r e d to wat e r held in a
ther m ally insulat e d cont ai n e r . The wat e r is stirr e d until it rea c h e s a
ste a dy tem p e r a t u r e . The following data are availa bl e.
Ther m al capa city of the piece of iron
IB Questionbank Physics
= 60 J
279
K–1
Ther m al capa city of the wate r
10 3 J K –1
Initial tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r
Final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r
= 2.0 ×
= 16 °C
= 45 °C
The ther m al capa ci ty of the cont ai n e r and insula tion is negligible.
IB Questionbank Physics
280
(i)
Stat e an expr e s s io n, in ter m s of θ and the above dat a, for the
ene r gy tran sf e r of the iron in cooling from the tem p e r a t u r e of the
kiln to the final tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the incre a s e in inte r n a l ene r gy of the wat e r as the iron
cools in the wat e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (b)(ii)
to det e r m i n e θ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
19 8 . This ques tion is abou t the unified atomic mass unit and a nucle a r rea c tio n.
(a)
Define the ter m unified atomic mas s unit .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The mas s of a nucleu s of rut h e rf o r di u m- 254 is 254.1 0 0 1 u. Calcula t e
the mas s in GeV c –2 .
IB Questionbank Physics
281
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
282
(c)
In 1919, Ruthe r fo r d produ c e d the first artificial nucle a r tra n s m u t a t i o n
by bomb a r di n g nitrog e n with α-par ticle s. The rea c tion is repr e s e n t e d
by the following equ atio n.
α+
(i)
14
7N

17
8O
+ X
Identify X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The following dat a are availa bl e for the rea c tio n.
Rest mass of α
Rest mass of
14
7N
Rest mass of
17
8O
= 3.742 8 GeV c –2
= 13.09 4 2 GeV c –2
+ X
= 16.83 8 3 GeV c –2
The initial kinetic ene r gy of the α-par ticle is 7.68 MeV.
Dete r mi n e the sum of the kinetic ene r gi e s of the oxyge n nucle u s
and X. (Assu m e that the nitrog e n nucle u s is station a r y.)
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
283
19 9 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e s of stat e of a gas.
(a)
A cylinde r fitted with a piston cont ai ns 0.23 mol of heliu m gas.
The following data are availa ble for the heliu m with the piston in the
position show n.
Volume
Press u r e
Temp e r a t u r e
(i)
= 5.2 × 10 –3 m 3
= 1.0 × 10 5 Pa
= 290 K
Use the dat a to calcula t e a value for the univer s a l gas const a n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Stat e the assu m p t io n mad e in the calcul a tio n in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The gas is now comp r e s s e d isothe r m a lly by the piston so that the
volum e of the gas is red uc e d . Explain why the comp r e s s i o n must be
car ri e d out slowly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
284
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
285
(c)
After the comp r e s s i o n, the gas is now allowe d to expa n d adia b a ti c a lly
to its original volum e. Use the first law of the r m o dy n a m i c s to explain
whet h e r the final tem p e r a t u r e will be less tha n, equal to or gre a t e r
than 290 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
20 0 . This ques tion is abou t the emf induc e d in a coil.
(a)
Define magn e t i c flux .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
286
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
287
(b)
A coil is rotat e d at const a n t spee d in a region of unifor m ma g n e ti c
field.
The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the emf ε induc e d in the
coil for one cycle of rota tio n.
(i)
On the grap h label, with the lette r T, a time at which the flux
linkag e in the coil is a maxim u m .
(1)
(ii)
Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the rat e of cha n g e of flux at t = 4.0
ms. Explain your answ e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the root me a n squ a r e value of the induc e d emf.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
288
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
20 1 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c cha r g e and resis t a n c e .
(a)
A plastic rod XY is held at end X. The end Y is rubb e d with a piec e of
cloth and, as a res ult, the end Y beco m e s elect ric ally cha r g e d .
The proce d u r e is now rep e a t e d using a coppe r rod and it is found tha t
the copp e r rod rem ai n s elect ric ally neut r a l. Explain thes e
obse rv a tio n s in ter m s of the prop e r ti e s of cond u c t o r s and insulat o r s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
IB Questionbank Physics
289
(b)
Two plastic rods each have a positive char g e + q situa t e d at one end.
The rods are arr a n g e d as show n.
Assum e that the char g e at the end of eac h rod beha v e s as a point
char g e . Draw, in the shad e d are a on the diagr a m
(i)
the elect ric field patt e r n due to the two cha r g e s .
(2)
(ii)
a line to repr e s e n t an equipot e n ti a l surfa c e. Label the line with
the lett e r V.
(1)
(c)
A resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is mad e from copp e r wire of radi us 0 .18
mm. The resistivity of coppe r is 1.7 × 10 –8 Ω m. Dete r m i n e the lengt h
of copp e r wire used to make the resisto r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
290
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
291
(d)
The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (c) gua r a n t e e s tha t the resist a n c e
is within 10 % of 1.5 Ω , provide d tha t the powe r dissipa tio n in the
resisto r does not exce e d 1.0 W.
(i)
Sugg e s t why the resist a n c e of the resis to r might be gre a t e r tha n
1.65 Ω if the powe r dissipa tion in the resisto r is gre a t e r tha n 1.0
W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Show that, for a powe r dissipa tio n of 1.0 W, the curr e n t in a
resis to r of resist a n c e 1.5 Ω is 0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
292
(iii) The 1.5 Ω resisto r is conn e c t e d in seri es with a varia bl e resis to r
and batt e r y of emf 6.0 V and inte r n a l resist a n c e 1.8 Ω.
Estim a t e the resist a n c e R of the variabl e resisto r that will limit
the curr e n t to
0.82 A.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
20 2 . This ques tion is abou t orbit al motion.
(a)
A satellite, of mass m , is in orbit about Eart h at a dista n c e r from the
cent r e of Eart h. Deduc e that the kinetic ene r gy E K of the sat ellite is
equal to half the magni t u d e of the pote n ti al ene r gy E P of the satellite.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
293
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
294
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with dist a n c e r of the Eart h’s
gravit atio n al poten ti al V .
Values of V for r < R , whe r e R is the radius of Eart h, are not show n.
The satellite in (a) has a mas s of 8.2 × 10 2 kg and it is in orbit at a
dista n c e of 1.0 × 10 7 m from the cent r e of Eart h. Using data from the
grap h and your ans w e r to (a), calcula t e for the satellite
(i)
its total ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
its orbit al spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
295
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
296
(iii) the ener gy it mus t gain to move to an orbit a dista n c e 2.0 × 10 7
m from the cent r e of the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
20 3 . This ques tion is abou t power prod u c tio n and global war mi n g.
(a)
In any cyclical proc es s design e d to continu o u s ly conve r t the r m a l
ener gy to work, some ene r gy is always deg r a d e d . Explain what is
mea n t by degr a d e d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A nuclea r powe r station uses ura ni u m- 235 (U- 235) as fuel. Outline the
(i)
proce s s e s and ener gy chan g e s that occur thro u g h which the r m a l
ene r gy is produ c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
297
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii)
role of the heat exch a n g e r of the rea c t o r and the tur bi n e in the
gen e r a t io n of elect ric al ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Identify on e proce s s in the powe r station whe r e ene r gy is degr a d e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
The maxim u m powe r outp u t of the Drax coal- fired powe r station in the
UK is 4.0 GW. Dete r mi n e the minim u m mas s of pur e U-235 that would
be requir e d by a nuclea r powe r sta tion to provide the sam e maxim u m
annu al ener gy outpu t as the Drax powe r station.
IB Questionbank Physics
298
Ener gy density of U-235 = 82 TJ kg –1
1 year
= 3.2 × 10 7 s
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
299
(e)
It has bee n sugg e s t e d that the prod u c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s by
coal- fired powe r station s has incre a s e d global war mi n g . One piec e of
eviden c e to suppo r t this sugg e s ti o n is the incre a s e in sea- level due to
an incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the ocea n s . Over the past 100 yea rs it is
sugg e s t e d that sea- levels have rise n by 6.4 × 10 –2 m due to volum e
expan si o n.
Using the following dat a, det e r m i n e the aver a g e rise in tem p e r a t u r e
in the top levels of the ocea n s in the last 100 years.
Mean dept h of ocea n s that is affect e d by global war mi n g
4.0 × 10 2 m
Coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n of sea wat e r
5.1 × 10 –5 K–1
=
=
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
20 4 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device (CCD).
(a)
Stat e two advan t a g e s of storing infor m a ti o n in a digit al form rat h e r
than an analog u e form.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
300
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
301
(b)
A CCD is effectively a silicon chip that is divide d into small are a s
called pixels.
Each pixel is provide d with elect r o d e s . Outline how light incide n t on a
pixel prod u c e s a chan g e in pote n t i al differ e n c e acros s the pixel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Light of frequ e n cy 7.2 × 10 14 Hz and inte n si ty 1.6 mW m –2 is incide n t
on a pixel for a time of 18 ms. The are a of the pixel is 2.0 × 10 –10 m 2
and its capacit a n c e is 12 pF. The res ultin g cha n g e in pote n ti al
differ e n c e acros s the pixel is 10 μV.
(i)
Deduc e that the num b e r of photo n s incide n t on the pixel is 1.2 ×
10 4 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the quan t u m efficiency of the pixel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
302
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
20 5 . This ques tion is abou t power and efficie ncy.
A bus is travelling at a const a n t spe e d of 6.2 m s –1 along a section of road
that is incline d at an angle of 6.0° to the horizont al.
(a)
(i)
The bus is rep r e s e n t e d by the black dot show n below.
Draw a labelled sketc h to rep r e s e n t the force s acting on the bus.
●
(4)
(ii)
Stat e the value of the rat e of cha n g e of mom e n t u m of the bus.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
303
(b)
The total outp u t powe r of the engin e of the bus is 70 kW and the
efficiency of the engin e is 35 %. Calcula t e the input powe r to the
engin e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
304
(c)
The mas s of the bus is 8.5 × 10 3 kg. Dete r mi n e the rat e of incr e a s e of
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy of the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
Using your ans w e r to (c) and the dat a in (b), estim a t e the magni t u d e
of the resistive forces acting on the bus.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
305
20 6 . This ques tion is abou t photo el e c t r i c effect and de Broglie wavele n g t h .
The diagr a m is a rep r e s e n t a t i o n of appa r a t u s use d to study the
photo el e c t r i c effect.
Light from the monoc h r o m a t i c sour c e is incide n t on a catho d e plac e d in an
evacu a t e d tube.
A variable voltag e supply is conn e c t e d betw e e n anod e and catho d e and the
photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t is regis t e r e d by the micro a m m e t e r . The sketc h gra p h
shows how the photoel e c t ri c cur r e n t I varies with the pote n ti al differe n c e
V betw e e n anod e and catho d e for two sour c e s of light, A and B, of differ e n t
frequ e n ci e s and intensi ti es.
IB Questionbank Physics
306
(a)
Explain with refer e n c e to the Einst ei n model, which gra p h, A or B,
corr es p o n d s to the light with the gre a t e r frequ e n c y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b)
The frequ e n c y of the light that prod u c e s gra p h A is 8.8 × 10 14 Hz. The
magni t u d e of V A is 1.6 V.
(i)
Stat e the value of the maxim u m ene r gy, in eV, of the elec t r o n s
emitt e d from the catho d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the work function, in eV, of the surfa c e of the catho d e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
307
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
308
(c)
The frequ e n c y of the incide n t light is incr e a s e d but the inte n sity
rem ai n s const a n t .
Explain why this incr e a s e in frequ e n c y res ult s in a cha n g e to the
maxim u m photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t (satu r a ti o n cur r e n t ) .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
The elect r o n s emitt e d from the photo- catho d e have an associa t e d de
Broglie wavele n g t h .
Descri b e what is mean t by the de Broglie wavele n g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
20 7 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion (SHM), wave motion and
polarization.
(a)
By refer e n c e to simple har m o ni c motion, stat e wha t is mea n t by
amplit u d e.
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
309
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
310
(b)
A liquid is cont ain e d in a U-tube.
Dia g r a m 1 Dia gr a m 2
The pres s u r e on the liquid in one side of the tube is incr e a s e d so tha t
the liquid is displac e d as show n in diag r a m 2. Whe n the pres s u r e is
sudd e nly relea s e d the liquid oscillat e s .
The dam pi n g of the oscillation s is small.
(i)
Describ e what is mea n t by da m pi n g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The displac e m e n t of the liquid surfa c e from its equilibri u m
position is x . The accele r a ti o n a of the liquid in the tube is given
by the expr e s si o n

a =
2g
x
l
wher e g is the accele r a t io n of free fall and l is the total lengt h of
the liquid colum n.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the motion of the liquid, the
significan c e of the minus sign.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
311
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The total lengt h of the liquid colum n in the tube is 0.32 m.
Dete r mi n e the period of oscillation.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
A wave is travelling along a strin g. The string can be modelle d as a
single line of particles and each particl e execu t e s simple har m o ni c
motion. The period of oscillation of the particle s is 0.80 s.
The grap h shows the displa c e m e n t y of par t of the string at time t = 0.
The dist an c e along the string is d.
IB Questionbank Physics
312
(i)
On the grap h, draw an arro w to show the dire c tion of motion of
par ticl e P at the point mark e d on the string.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
313
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the velocity of particle P.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Show that the spee d of the wave is 5.0 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv)
On the grap h above, label with the lette r X the position of
par ticl e P at t = 0.40 s.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
314
(d)
The string in (c) is fixed at both ends and is mad e to vibra t e in a
vertical plane in its first har m o ni c.
(i)
Describ e how the stan di n g wave in the string gives rise to the
first har m o ni c.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Outline how a travelling wave in a string can be use d to desc rib e
the nat u r e of polarize d light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
315
(e)
James is weari n g polarize d sungl a s s e s and views the sunlight
reflect e d from the smoot h surf ac e of a lake.
The angle θ is the angle betw e e n the surfa c e of the lake and Jame s’s
line of sight.
Calcula t e the value of θ at which the reflec t e d sunlight from the
surfac e is minimize d.
The refra ctive index of the wate r is 1.3.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 25 mark s )
20 8 . This ques tion is abou t the prope r ti e s of a sta r.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by a
(i)
cons t ella tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
316
(ii)
stellar clust e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
317
(b)
Some dat a for the variabl e sta r Betelg e u s e are given below.
Avera g e absolut e ma gni t u d e
Avera g e appa r e n t mag nit u d e
Avera g e appa r e n t brigh t n e s s
Radius
= 790 solar radii
= –5.1
= + 0.60
= 1.6 × 10 –7 W m –2
The luminosity of the Sun is 3.8 × 10 26 W and it has a surfa c e
tem p e r a t u r e of 5700 K.
(i)
Show that the dista n c e from Eart h to Betelge u s e is about 4.0 ×
10 18 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e , in ter m s of the luminosity of the Sun, the luminosity
of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
318
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
On the Hertzs p r u n g–R u s s e ll diagr a m above,
(i)
label the position of Betelg e u s e with the lette r B.
(1)
(ii)
sketc h Betelge u s e’s likely evolution a r y path.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
319
(d)
Some star s, such as Betelg e u s e , are in combi n a tio n with a comp a nio n
sta r formin g a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m . Descri b e and explain the
char a c t e r i s ti c s of a spect r o s c o pi c bina ry syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
20 9 . This ques tion is abou t the density of the unive r s e .
(a)
Explain, with refer e n c e to the possible fate of the unive r s e , the
significan c e of the critical density of matt e r in the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
320
(b)
Sugg e s t on e reas o n why it is difficult to estim a t e the density of mat t e r
in the univer s e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 0 . This ques tion is abou t the evolution of sta r s.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the
(i)
Chan d r a s e k h a r limit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Oppe n h ei m e r –Volkoff limit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
321
(b)
Sugg e s t how your ans w e r s in (a) can be use d to pre dic t the fate of a
main sequ e n c e star.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 1 . This ques tion is abou t the Hubbl e cons t a n t .
(a)
Outline the mea s u r e m e n t s that mus t be take n in orde r to dete r m i n e a
value for the Hubbl e const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
322
(b)
One esti m a t e of the Hubbl e const a n t is 60 km s –1 Mpc –1 . Cygnus A is a
radio galaxy at a dist an c e of 6.0 × 10 8 ly from Eart h. Calcula t e , in km
s –1 , the rece s sio n al spee d of Cygnus A rela tive to the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 2 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
(a)
Outline what is mean t by the modula tio n of a wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The frequ e n c y spect r u m of the signal from a radio tra n s m i t t e r is
show n below.
IB Questionbank Physics
323
(i)
Stat e the nam e of this form of radio tra n s m i s sio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e the frequ e n c y of the car rie r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the band wi d t h of this signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
21 3 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Describ e the role of the cellula r exch a n g e durin g the making of a call from
a mobile phon e.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
324
IB Questionbank Physics
325
21 4 . This ques tion is abou t the tran s m i s s io n of signals.
The signal from a micro p h o n e is amplified and the n tra ns m i t t e d to a dista n t
receive r.
The variation with time t of the amplified signal befor e tran s m i s si o n is
show n below.
(a)
The amplified signal is tran s m i t t e d using a coaxial cable as illust r a t e d .
On the axes below, sketc h the wavefor m of the signal at point X afte r
tran s m i s sio n along the coaxial cable.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
326
(b)
A secon d tran s m i s sio n syste m , as show n below, uses a cable
cont ai nin g many sepa r a t e fibre s (multi- core optic cable).
(i)
Sugg e s t why a multi- core optic cable is requi r e d rath e r tha n a
single- core optic fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e what circuit s should be includ e d in the tra n s m i s sio n syste m
so that a single- core optic fibre may be use d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
327
(c)
The receive d signal of the secon d tra n s m i s s io n syste m is show n below.
Calcula t e the
(i)
minim u m num b e r of outp u t bits of the ADC.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
sam plin g frequ e n c y of the ADC.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d)
Stat e on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of the coaxial cable
tran s m i s sio n as comp a r e d with the fibre optic cable.
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : .........................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
328
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
21 5 . This ques tion is abou t signal powe r and atte n u a t i o n.
An optic fibre in a telep h o n e syste m has lengt h 48 km. The noise powe r in
the optic fibre is
2.5 × 10 –18 W.
(a)
The signal- to- noise ratio is not to fall below 25 dB. Show that the
minim u m signal power in the fibre is 7.9 × 10 –16 W.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The att e n u a t i o n per unit lengt h of the signal in the fibre is 2.7 dB km –
1
. Use the data in (a) to dete r m i n e the powe r of the input signal to the
fibre so that the signal- to- noise ratio does not fall below 25 dB.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
329
21 6 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier (op- amp) circuit.
The diagr a m shows an incom pl e t e circ uit.
The oper a ti o n al amplifier is ideal.
(a)
On the incom pl e t e diag r a m above, desig n a circ uit for a non- inver tin g
amplifier.
(2)
(b)
Calcula t e the
(i)
gain of the amplifier circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
input poten ti al V IN at which the amplifie r satu r a t e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
330
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
331
21 7 . This ques tion is abou t prope r ti e s of elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.
(a)
Stat e two prop e r t i e s that are com m o n to all elect r o m a g n e t i c waves.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A single lens is used to form a mag nifie d real imag e of an objec t.
Explain, with refer e n c e to the dispe r sio n of light, why the imag e has
colour e d edg e s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Outline why a clear sky is blue in colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
332
21 8 . This ques tion is abou t a conve r gi n g lens.
(a)
Define angular magnificatio n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A thin conver gi n g lens of focal lengt h 4.5 cm is to be use d as a
magnifying glass.
The obse rv e r places the lens close to her eye. The leas t dista n c e of
distinct vision is 24 cm.
(i)
Show that the dista n c e of the object from the lens is 3.8 cm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the ang ul a r ma g nific a tio n prod u c e d by the lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
333
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
334
(c)
Sugg e s t two reas o n s why, for high mag nifica tion s , a combin a tio n of
lens e s is used rath e r than a single lens.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
21 9 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e of light.
Two coher e n t nar r o w bea m s of light pass throu g h two identic al evac u a t e d
tubes, as show n below.
The two coher e n t nar r o w beam s are brou g h t to a focus at point P on a
scre e n .
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by cohe r e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to the wavele n g t h , the condition tha t must be
satisfied for a brigh t fringe to be form e d on the scre e n at point P.
IB Questionbank Physics
335
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
336
(c)
Air is allowe d to ent e r gra d u a lly into one of the evac u a t e d tube s . The
bright n e s s of the light at point P is see n to decr e a s e and the n incr e a s e
again repe a t e d ly.
(i)
Stat e the effect on the wavele n g t h of the light in the evac u a t e d
tube as the air is introd u c e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Sugg e s t why ther e is a variatio n in the bright n e s s of the light at
point P.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
22 0 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray diffrac tion.
An X-ray tube fitted with a coppe r targ e t emits radia tion with a
char a c t e r i s ti c wavele n g t h of 1.54 × 10 –10 m.
(a)
Explain why the char a c t e r i s t ic wavele n g t h is dep e n d e n t on the tar g e t
mat e ri al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
337
(b)
The X-ray bea m is inciden t on a sodiu m chloride cryst al. The minim u m
angle θ at which the X-rays of wavele n g t h 1.54 × 10 –10 m reinforc e
const r u c t iv ely when scat t e r e d from a plane of atom s in the cryst al is
15.9°, as show n below.
(i)
Calculat e the dista n c e d betw e e n neigh b o u r i n g plan e s of atom s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e any othe r values of θ at which maxim u m inten sity
occu r s for the X-ray bea m scatt e r e d from the cryst al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
338
(c)
Stat e why it is pref er a bl e to mea s u r e mor e than one angle θ in orde r
to det e r m i n e the spacin g of the plan e s of atom s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
22 1 . This ques tion is abou t relativity.
Carri e is in a spac es hi p that is travelling towa r d s a sta r in a str ai g h t- line at
cons t a n t velocity as obse rv e d by Pete r . Pete r is at rest relative to the sta r.
(a)
Car ri e meas u r e s her spac e s hi p to have a lengt h of 100 m. Pete r
mea s u r e s Carrie’s spac es hi p to have a lengt h of 91 m.
(i)
Explain why Carrie mea s u r e s the prop e r lengt h of the spa c e s hi p.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Show that Carri e travels at a spe e d of appr oxi m a t e l y 0.4 c
relative to Pete r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
339
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Accordi n g to Carri e, it take s the sta r ten year s to rea c h her. Using
your ans w e r to (a)(ii), calcula t e the dist a n c e to the sta r as mea s u r e d
by Peter .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Accordi n g to Pete r, as Carrie pas s e s the sta r she send s a radio signal.
Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Carri e, for the mes s a g e to reac h
Pete r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
340
(d)
Car ri e and Louise, two obse rv e r s in a spa c e s hi p, view a light sour c e
place d close to Car rie. When the spac e s hi p is travelling at a const a n t
velocity, they both mea s u r e the frequ e n c y of the light sour c e and
obtain identic al values.
The mag ni t u d e of the velocity of the spac e s hi p incre a s e s .
Stat e and explain any chan g e s to the freq u e n c y of the light sourc e , as
mea s u r e d by Louis e, that occur during the accel e r a t io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
22 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mec h a ni c s .
(a)
Calcula t e the pote n ti al differe n c e thro u g h which a proto n, sta r ti n g
from rest, mus t be accel e r a t e d for its mas s–e n e r g y to be equ al to
thr e e times its rest mas s- ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
341
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
342
(b)
Calcula t e the mom e n t u m of the proto n afte r accel e r a ti o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
22 3 . This ques tion is abou t the Michels o n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t .
(a)
(i)
Outline the pur po s e of the expe ri m e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e and explain why Michelso n and Morley rota t e d the
app a r a t u s throu g h 90°.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
343
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
344
(b)
Stat e and explain the signific a n c e of the res ul t of the expe ri m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
22 4 . This ques tion is abou t spac e ti m e .
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by spa c e ti m e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Stat e the shap e of the pat h in spac e ti m e of a body
(i)
moving at cons t a n t velocity.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
345
(ii)
orbitin g the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
346
(c)
Explain how spac eti m e is use d to desc ri b e the gravit a tio n a l attr a c ti o n
betw e e n Eart h and a satellite orbitin g the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
22 5 . This ques tion is abou t heari n g.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the
(i)
inten si ty I of a sound wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
thre s h ol d inten sity I 0 of hea ri n g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
347
(b)
A pneu m a t i c drill prod u c e s noise of inten sity level 98 dB at the ear of
a worke r.
(i)
Calculat e the intensi ty of the noise at the ear.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The intensity level at which discomfo r t is felt is 108 dB. Seve r al
pneu m a t i c drills, each one produ ci n g an inte n si ty level of noise of
98 dB at the ear, are being used at the sam e time. Dete r m i n e the
num b e r of pne u m a t i c drills that must be in use befor e the
work e r , who has no hea ri n g prot e c tio n, expe ri e n c e s disco mfor t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
348
22 6 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .
The diagr a m shows part of a cross- section thro u g h the leg of a patie n t who
is unde r g oi n g an ultr as o u n d scan.
Data for the spee d c of ultr a s o u n d in differ e n t media are show n below,
toget h e r with values for the acous tic impe d a n c e Z .
(a)
c / m s –1
Z / kg m –2 s –1
air
3.3 × 10 2
4.3 × 10 2
gel
1.5 × 10 3
1.5 × 10 6
muscl e
1.5 × 10 3
1.4 × 10 6
bone
4.1 × 10 3
7.8 × 10 6
Use the data from the table to calcula t e a value for the density of
bone.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The fraction F of the inten si ty of an ultr a s o u n d wave reflect e d at the
boun d a r y betw e e n two media having acous tic impe d a n c e s Z 1 and Z 2 is
given by the following equ a tio n.
IB Questionbank Physics
349
(Z 1  Z 2 ) 2
2
F = ( Z 1 Z 2 )
IB Questionbank Physics
350
Deter m i n e the fraction F for the boun d a r y betw e e n
(i)
air and muscle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
gel and muscl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Use your answ e r s in (b) to explain the nee d for a gel on the patie n t’s
skin.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
351
22 7 . Outline the princi ples of the prod u c tio n of an imag e using comp u t e d
tomog r a p h y (CT).
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 5 mark s )
22 8 . This ques tion is abou t radiation expos u r e .
(a)
A radiation worke r is accide n t a lly expos e d to a sourc e of radia tio n.
Stat e why it is easier to mea s u r e the expos u r e rath e r tha n the
absor b e d dose for the worke r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
352
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
353
(b)
Expos u r e to γ-radiation may be mea s u r e d using a small met al can. The
can cont ai n s
3.6 × 10 –3 g of dry air at atmos p h e r i c pres s u r e . A met al wire,
insulat e d from the can, is situa t e d along the axis of the can, as show n
below.
A pot en ti al differ e n c e is applied betw e e n the can and the cent r a l wire.
The can is expos e d to γ-radia tio n for a time of 90 s. During this time,
the sensitive am m e t e r recor d s a cur r e n t of 4.8 × 10 –7 A.
(i)
Dete r mi n e the expos u r e prod u c e d by the γ-radia tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The ener gy req ui r e d to produ c e one ion- pair in air is 34 eV.
Dete r mi n e the rat e, in watts, of deposition of ene r gy in the air in
the can.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
354
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
355
22 9 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.
The quar k cont e n t of a π + meso n includ e s an up qua r k.
The Feyn m a n diagr a m repr e s e n t s the decay of a π + meso n.
(a)
Identify the par ticles labelle d A and B.
A: .............................................................................................................
....................
B: .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
(b)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to their prop e r t i e s , two differ e n c e s betw e e n a
photon and a W boson.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
The appr oxi m a t e rang e of the weak inte r a c ti o n is 10 –18 m. Dete r mi n e ,
in kg, the likely mass of the W boson.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
356
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
357
23 0 . This ques tion is abou t a synch r o t r o n .
(a)
Stat e and explain how the particle s in a sync h r o t r o n bea m are
accel e r a t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b)
In a synch r o t r o n , bea m s of proton s and antipr o t o n s attain ene r gi e s of
1400 GeV.
The radius of the synch r o t r o n is 4.9 km.
(i)
The mag n e t i c field stre n g t h in the synch r o t r o n is 0.95 T.
Dete r mi n e , statin g any assu m p t i o n s you make, the mas s of a
proton in the bea m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
358
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
359
(ii)
Outline why, even at the very high ene r gi e s of this par ticle bea m ,
the collisions are unlikely to lead to the cre a tion of a single
unbou n d quar k.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Outline two ben efits of inter n a ti o n a l coope r a ti o n in the const r u c t i o n
and use of high- ener gy particle accele r a t o r s .
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
23 1 . This ques tion is abou t stra n g e n e s s .
(a)
Outline two prop e r t i e s of str a n g e n e s s .
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
360
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
361
(b)
The following particle inte r a c ti o n is propos e d .
p + π – → K– + π +
In this inter a c ti o n, char g e is cons e r v e d .
Stat e, in ter m s of baryo n and stra n g e n e s s cons e rv a t i o n, whet h e r the
inter a c ti o n is possible.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
23 2 . This ques tion is abou t deep inelas tic scat t e r i n g.
(a)
Outline what is mean t by dee p inelas ti c scatt e r i n g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Sugg e s t , with refer e n c e to asym p t o ti c free do m , why dee p inelas tic
scat t e r i n g experi m e n t s indica t e tha t qua r k s beh av e as free particl e s
within a nucleo n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
362
(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
363
23 3 . This ques tion is abou t conditions in the early unive r s e .
At one mom e n t in the early unive r s e the aver a g e particle ene r gy was 500
keV.
Nucleosy n t h e s i s is thou g h t to have bee n the domin a n t mec h a ni s m for
par ticl e inter a c ti o n at this time.
(a)
Show that the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e at which nucleosy n t h e s i s
occur r e d is
4 × 10 9 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Nucleo syn t h e s i s was only domin a n t for a shor t time in the early
univer s e . Explain why the time was shor t and why nucleosy n t h e s i s did
not re- occur.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
23 4 . The best esti m a t e for the time it take s light to cross the nucle u s of the
hydro g e n atom is
IB Questionbank Physics
364
A.
10 –23 s.
B.
10 –20 s.
C.
10 –15 s.
D.
10 –7 s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
365
23 5 . The lengt h of each side of a suga r cube is mea s u r e d as 10 mm with an
unce r t ai n t y of ±2 mm.
Which of the following is the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the volum e of the
suga r cube?
A.
±6 mm 3
B.
±8 mm 3
C.
±4 0 0 mm 3
D.
±6 0 0 mm 3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23 6 . The time taken for a stone drop p e d from res t to fall vertic ally thro u g h 16 m
is 2.0 s. Based on thes e meas u r e m e n t s , wha t is the bes t estim a t e for the
accele r a ti o n of free fall?
A.
4.0 m s –2
B.
8.0 m s –2
C.
9.8 m s –2
D.
10 m s –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23 7 . A woode n block is sliding down an incline d plane at const a n t spe e d. The
mag ni t u d e of the friction al force betw e e n the block and the plan e is equ al
to
A.
zero.
B.
the mag nit u d e of the weigh t of the block.
C.
the mag nit u d e of the compo n e n t of weight of the block par allel to the
plan e.
D.
the mag nit u d e of the compo n e n t of the nor m al rea c tio n par allel to the
plan e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
366
23 8 . Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t of New to n’s secon d law of
motion?
A.
A force acting on a body is propo r tio n a l to the mas s of the body.
B.
The rate of chan g e of mom e n t u m of a body is equ al to the net exte r n a l
force acting on the body.
C.
The mom e n t u m of a body is propo r tio n a l to the net exte r n a l force
acting on the body.
D.
A force acting on a body is propo r tio n a l to the accele r a ti o n of the
body.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
23 9 . A ball of weigh t W is travelling horizon t ally towa r d s a vertic al wall. It
strikes the wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally. The cha n g e in the mag nit u d e of
the mom e n t u m of the ball is ∆p. Which of the following is the mag nit u d e of
the impuls e that the ball impa r t s to the wall?
A.
W + ∆p
B.
W – ∆p
C.
W
D.
∆p
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
367
24 0 . Two object s unde r g o an inelas tic collision. Which of the following is corr e c t
in resp e c t of both the cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m and the cons e r v a ti o n of
total ener gy of the syste m ?
Mo m e n t u m
Tot al en e r g y
A.
cons e r v e d
not cons e rv e d
B.
cons e r v e d
cons e r v e d
C.
not cons e rv e d
not cons e rv e d
D.
not cons e rv e d
cons e r v e d
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 1 . A particle P is moving anti- clockwis e with const a n t spe e d in a horizont a l
circle.
Which diagr a m corr e c tly shows the direc tio n of the velocity v and
accele r a ti o n a of the par ticle P in the position show n?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
368
24 2 . Two object s are in ther m al cont a c t with eac h othe r . Which of the following
will det er m i n e the directio n of the tra n sf e r of the r m a l ene r gy betw e e n the
bodies?
A.
The mas s of each body
B.
The area of cont a ct betw e e n the bodies
C.
The specific heat cap acity of eac h body
D.
The tem p e r a t u r e of each body
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 3 . The mole is define d as
A.
1
1 2 the mas s of an atom of the isotop e car bo n- 12.
B.
the amou n t of a subst a n c e that cont ai n s as many ele m e n t a r y entitie s
as the num b e r of atom s in 12 g of the isotop e carbo n- 12.
C.
the mas s of one atom of the isotop e car bo n- 12.
D.
the amou n t of a subst a n c e that cont ai n s as many nuclei as the num b e r
of nuclei in 12 g of the isotop e carbo n- 12.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
369
24 4 . A gas is cont ai n e d in a cylinde r by a piston.
The gas is comp r e s s e d rapidly by moving the piston in the direc tio n show n.
The best explan a ti o n for the resul tin g incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of the gas is
that the molec ul e s of the gas gain kinetic ene r gy
A.
from the moving piston.
B.
by colliding more frequ e n tly with each othe r.
C.
by being pus h e d close r toge t h e r .
D.
by colliding more frequ e n tly with the walls of the cylinde r .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
370
24 5 . The gra p h shows how the velocity v of an objec t und e r g oi n g simple
har m o ni c motion varies with time t for one compl e t e period of oscillation.
Which of the following sketc h gra p h s bes t shows how the total ene r gy E of
the object varies with t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
371
24 6 . A force that varies sinus oid ally is applied to a syste m that is lightly
dam p e d . Which of the following mus t be true of the force for reson a n c e to
occu r?
A.
It mus t always be in anti- pha s e with the oscillations of the syst e m .
B.
Its directio n must always be in the direc tio n of motion of the
oscillations of the syste m .
C.
Its frequ e n c y mus t be equ al to the freq u e n c y of oscillation of the
syste m .
D.
Its amplit u d e mus t be equ al to the amplit u d e of oscillation of the
syste m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 7 . Which of the following is a value of wavele n g t h tha t is found in the visible
region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m ?
A.
4 × 10 –5 m
B.
4 × 10 –7 m
C.
4 × 10 –9 m
D.
4 × 10 –11 m
(Tot al 1 mar k )
24 8 . Two waves meet at a point in spac e. Which of the following prope r ti e s
always add toget h e r ?
A.
Displac e m e n t
B.
Amplitud e
C.
Spee d
D.
Freq u e n c y
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
372
24 9 . A point char g e of magni t u d e 2.0 μC is move d betw e e n two points X and Y.
Point X is at a poten ti al of +6. 0 V and point Y is at a pote n ti al of +9. 0 V.
The gain in poten ti al ene r gy of the point cha r g e is
A.
0.20 μJ.
B.
1.5 μJ.
C.
6.0 μJ.
D.
30 μJ.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 0 . A resisto r of resis t a n c e 12 Ω is conne c t e d in serie s with a cell of negligibl e
inter n al resist a n c e . The powe r dissipa t e d in the resisto r is P. The resist o r is
repl ac e d with a resis to r of resist a n c e 3.0 Ω. What is the powe r dissip a t e d in
this resisto r ?
A.
0.25 P
B.
P
C.
2.0 P
D.
4.0 P
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
373
25 1 . The elect r o m o t ive force (emf) of a cell is define d as
A.
the powe r supplie d by the cell per unit curr e n t from the cell.
B.
the force that the cell provide s to drive elect r o n s roun d a circuit.
C.
the ene r gy supplied by the cell per unit cur r e n t from the cell.
D.
the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the ter mi n a l s of the cell.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 2 . The weight of an object of mas s 1 kg at the surfa c e of Mars is about 4 N.
The radius of Mars is about half the radius of Eart h. Which of the following
is the best estim a t e of the ratio below?
m a s so f M a r s
m a s sof E a r t h
A.
0.1
B.
0.2
C.
5
D.
10
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
374
25 3 . Three positive point char g e s of equ al mag ni t u d e are held at the corn e r s X,
Y and Z of a right- angled trian gl e . The point P is at the midpoin t of XY.
Which of the arrow s shows the dire c tion of the elec t ri c field at point P?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
375
25 4 . An elect r o n travelling in the direc tion show n by the arro w X, ent e r s a
region of unifor m mag n e ti c field. It leave s the region of field in the
direction show n by the arrow Y.
The direction of the mag n e t i c field is
A.
in the directio n of X.
B.
into the plane of the pap e r .
C.
in the opposit e direc tio n to X.
D.
out of the plane of the pap e r .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 5 . Emission and abso r p ti o n spect r a provide evide nc e for
A.
the nuclea r model of the atom.
B.
nat u r al radioac tivity.
C.
the existe n c e of isotop e s.
D.
the existe n c e of atomic ene r gy levels.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
376
25 6 . Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n
and the stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s in an atom?
Coul o m b int er a c t i o n
exi s t s bet w e e n
Str o n g int e r a c t i o n
exi s t s bet w e e n
A.
proto n s only
neut r o n s only
B.
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
neut r o n s only
C.
proto n s only
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
D.
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 7 . Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the thr e e particle s emitt e d in the
45
45
decay of the nucle u s 2 0 Ca into a nucle u s of 2 1S c ?
A.
α, β–, γ
B.
β –, γ, v
C.
α, γ, v
D.
α, β–, v
(Tot al 1 mar k )
25 8 . The nuclea r reactio n
2
1H
 31 H 
4
1
2 H e 0 n
is an exam pl e of
A.
nuclea r fission.
B.
radioac tive decay.
C.
nuclea r fusion.
D.
artificial tran s m u t a t i o n .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
377
25 9 . Degr a d e d ene r gy is ener gy that is
A.
stor e d in the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e .
B.
availabl e from non- rene w a bl e ene r gy sour c e s .
C.
conve r t e d into work in a cyclical proc e s s.
D.
no longer available for the perfor m a n c e of useful work.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
26 0 . Which of the following cor r e c tly desc ri b e s both the role of the mode r a t o r
and of the cont r ol rods in a nucle a r reac t o r ?
Mod er a t o r
Con tr o l rod s
A.
slows down the
neut r o n s
maint ai n a const a n t rat e of
fission
B.
cools down the react o r
extr a c t the r m a l ene r gy
C.
cools down the react o r
maint ai n a const a n t rat e of
fission
D.
slows down the
neut r o n s
extr a c t the r m a l ene r gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )
26 1 . Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the ene r gy chan g e in a photovolt aic
cell and in a solar heati n g pan el?
Phot o v o l t a i c cell
Sol ar he a t i n g
pan e l
A.
solar → elect ric al
solar → the r m a l
B.
elect ric al →
ther m al
solar → elect ric al
C.
solar → elect ric al
elect ric al →
the r m a l
D.
elect ric al →
ther m al
solar → the r m a l
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
378
26 2 . The albedo for the ocea n s is lowe r tha n that for glacie r s. This is bec a u s e ,
comp a r e d to ice, sea wat e r
A.
has a grea t e r density.
B.
has a grea t e r specific heat capa ci ty.
C.
has a grea t e r coefficien t of volum e expa n sio n.
D.
absor b s a grea t e r amou n t of radia tive powe r.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
26 3 . Which of the following is most likely to red uc e the enh a n c e d gre e n h o u s e
effect?
A.
Replace the use of gas- fired powe r station s with oil-fired powe r
stations
B.
Replace coal- fired powe r station s with nucle a r powe r stations
C.
Incr e a s e the use of all non- rene w a b l e ene r gy sourc e s
D.
Decr e a s e the efficiency of powe r produ c tio n
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
379
26 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .
The gra p h shows the variation with tem p e r a t u r e T of the resist a n c e R of an
elect ric al com po n e n t .
(a)
A stud e n t hypot h e siz e s that the resist a n c e is inver s ely propo r tio n a l to
the tem p e r a t u r e .
Use dat a from the gra p h to show whet h e r the hypot h e s i s is suppo r t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
380
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
A secon d stud e n t sugg e s t s that the relations hi p is of the form
b
lg R = a + T
whe r e a and b are const a n t s .
The stud e n t plots the grap h below. Erro r bar s have bee n includ e d for
the sake of clarity.
IB Questionbank Physics
381
(i)
Explain how the grap h dra w n could be use d as evide nc e to
suppo r t the stud e n t’s sugg e s tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the const a n t s a and b .
b : .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
a: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (b)(ii), dete r m i n e a value for the
resis t a n c e of the compo n e n t at a tem p e r a t u r e of 260 K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
382
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
26 5 . This ques tion is abou t forces.
An athlet e trains by dra g gi n g a heavy load acros s a roug h horizont al
surfac e.
The athl et e exer t s a force of ma gni t u d e F on the load at an angle of 25° to
the horizont al.
(a)
Once the load is moving at a stea dy spee d, the aver a g e horizon t a l
friction al force acting on the load is 470 N.
Calcula t e the aver a g e value of F that will ena bl e the load to move at
const a n t spee d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
383
(b)
The load is moved a horizon t a l dista n c e of 2.5 km in 1.2 hour s.
Calcula t e
(i)
the work done on the load by the force F.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
384
(ii)
the minim u m aver a g e powe r requi r e d to move the load.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
The athlet e pulls the load uphill at the sam e spe e d as in par t (a).
Explain, in ter m s of ene r gy cha n g e s , why the minim u m aver a g e powe r
req ui r e d is grea t e r than in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
26 6 . This ques tion is abou t solar hea ti n g pan el s.
(a)
Stat e the ener gy chan g e tha t take s plac e in a solar pan el.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
385
(b)
A village consist s of 120 hous e s . It is propos e d tha t solar pan els be
used to provide hot wate r to the hous e s .
The following data are availa ble.
aver a g e powe r need e d per hous e to hea t wate r
aver a g e surfac e solar inten sity
efficiency of ene r gy conve r sio n of a solar pan el
= 3.0 kW
= 650 W m –2
= 18 %
Calcula t e the minim u m surfa c e are a of the solar pan els requi r e d to
provide the total powe r for wat e r hea tin g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Sugg e s t two disadv a n t a g e s of using sola r powe r to provide ene r gy for
heatin g wat e r.
1: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
386
26 7 . This ques tion is abou t solar radi a tion.
(a)
Stat e the Stefan–Boltzm a n n law for a black body.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The following data relat e s to the Eart h and the Sun.
Eart h- Sun dist a n c e
radius of Eart h
radius of Sun
surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Sun
(i)
=
=
=
=
1.5 ×
6.4 ×
7.0 ×
5800
10 11 m
10 6 m
10 8 m
K
Use data from the table to show tha t the powe r radi a t e d by the
Sun is abou t
4 × 10 26 W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a dista n c e
from the Sun equ al to the Eart h’s dista n c e from the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
387
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
388
(iii) The aver a g e powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the Eart h’s surfa c e
is 240 W m –2 .
Stat e two reas o n s why the value calcula t e d in (b)(ii) differs from
this value.
1: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2: .....................................................................................................................
..
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
Show that the value for powe r absor b e d per unit are a of 240 W
m –2 is consist e n t with an aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e for
the Eart h of abou t 255 K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Explain, by refer e n c e to the gre e n h o u s e effect, why the aver a g e
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h is gre a t e r tha n 255 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
389
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
390
(d)
Sugg e s t why the burnin g of fossil fuels may lead to an incr e a s e in the
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
26 8 . This ques tion is abou t kicking a football.
A ball is susp e n d e d from a ceiling by a string of lengt h 7.5 m. The ball is
kicked horizon t ally and rises to a maxim u m height of 6.0 m.
(a)
Assumin g that the air resist a n c e is negligible, show that the initial
spee d of the ball is 11 m s –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
391
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
392
(b)
The mas s of the ball is 0.55 kg and the impa c t time of the kicke r’s foot
with the ball is 150 ms. Estim a t e the aver a g e force exer t e d on the ball
by the kick.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
(i)
Explain why the tension in the string incr e a s e s
imm e di a t ely after the ball is kicke d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Calculat e the tension in the string imm e di a t e ly afte r the ball is
kicked. Assum e that the string is vertic al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
393
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
394
26 9 . This ques tion is abou t wat e r wave motion.
A small sphe r e , mount e d at the end of a vertic al rod, dips below the surfa c e
of shallow wat e r in a tray. The sphe r e is drive n vertic ally up and down by a
motor att ac h e d to the rod.
The oscillation s of the sphe r e produ c e travelling waves on the surfa c e of
the wate r .
(a)
The diagr a m shows how the displa c e m e n t of the wat e r surfa c e at a
particul a r insta n t in time varies with dista n c e from the sphe r e . The
period of oscillation of the sphe r e is 0.027 s.
Use the diagr a m to calcul a t e , for the wave,
(i)
the amplitu d e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
395
(ii)
the wavele n g t h .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv)
the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The wave moves from region A into a region B of shallowe r wate r . The
waves move mor e slowly in region B. The diag r a m (not to scale) shows
som e of the wavefr o n t s in region A.
IB Questionbank Physics
396
IB Questionbank Physics
397
(i)
With refer e n c e to a wave, disting uis h betw e e n a ray and a
wavefro n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The angle betw e e n the wavefr on t s and the inte rf a c e in region A
is 60°. The refrac tive index An B is 1.4.
Dete r mi n e the angle betw e e n the wavefro n t s and the inte rfa c e in
region B.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) On the diagr a m above, cons t r u c t thr e e lines to show the position
of thre e wavefro n t s in region B.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
398
(c)
Anothe r sphe r e is dippe d into the wate r . The sphe r e s oscillat e in
phas e. The diagr a m shows some lines in region A along which the
distu r b a n c e of the wat e r surfa c e is a minim u m .
(i)
Outline how the regions of minim u m distu r b a n c e occur on the
surfac e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
399
(ii)
The frequ e n cy of oscillation of the sphe r e s is incr e a s e d .
Stat e and explain how this will affect the position s of minim u m
distu r b a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
27 0 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r proc e s s e s .
(a)
A nucleu s of radiu m- 91 (
a nucle u s of radon (Rn).
(i)
226
9 1 Ra )
unde r g o e s alpha particle dec ay to form
Identify the proto n num b e r and nucle on num b e r of the nucle u s of
Rn.
Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............
Nucleo n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
............
(2)
(ii)
The half- life of radiu m- 91 is 1600 yea rs. Dete r mi n e the lengt h of
time taken for 87.5 % of the radiu m to disint e g r a t e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
400
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
401
(b)
Imm e di a t ely after the dec ay of a station a r y radiu m nucle u s , the alpha
particl e and the rado n nucle u s move off in opposit e dire c tion s and at
differ e n t spee d s .
Outline the reas o n s for thes e obse rv a tio n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Outline why a bet a particl e has a longe r rang e in air tha n an alpha
particl e of the sam e ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
402
IB Questionbank Physics
403
27 1 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric al hea t e r .
An elect ric al heat e r consist s of two hea ti n g elem e n t s E 1 and E 2 . The
elem e n t s are conn e c t e d in par allel. Each elem e n t has a switc h and is
conne c t e d to a supply of emf 240 V. The supply has negligibl e inter n al
resis t a n c e .
Elem e n t E 1 is mad e from wire that has a cros s- section a l are a of 6.8 × 10 –8
m 2 . The resistivity of the wire at the oper a ti n g tem p e r a t u r e of the elem e n t
is 1.1 × 10 –6 Ωm.
(a)
(i)
The total lengt h of wire is 4.5 m. Show tha t the
resis t a n c e of E 1 is 73 Ω.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the powe r outp u t of E 1 with only this elem e n t
conne c t e d to the supply.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
404
(iii) Elem e n t E 2 is mad e of wire of the sam e cross- section and
mat e ri al as E 1 . The lengt h of wire use d to make E 2 is 1.5 m.
Dete r mi n e the total powe r outpu t whe n both E 1 and E 2 are
conne c t e d to the supply.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv)
With refer e n c e to the powe r outp u t, explain why it would be
inapp r o p r i a t e to conn e c t the hea ti n g ele m e n t s in serie s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b)
Each elem e n t in the elect ri c a l heat e r is woun d as a coil as show n.
IB Questionbank Physics
405
Each tur n of the coil may be conside r e d to act as a cur r e n t- car ryin g
long str ai g h t wire.
IB Questionbank Physics
406
(i)
On the diagr a m , draw the mag n e t i c field arou n d a curr e n tcarryi n g long str ai g h t wire. The arro w shows the dire c tion of the
curr e n t .
(3)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the turn s of wire will attr a c t or rep el
one anot h e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
27 2 . This ques tion is abou t heati n g a liquid.
(a)
Sugg e s t why, in ter m s of the molec ul a r model, the ene r gy associa t e d
with melting is less than that associ a t e d with boiling.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
407
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
408
(b)
Milk in a cup is heat e d to boiling point by passin g stea m throu g h it.
Whilst cooling subs e q u e n t l y, some milk evapo r a t e s .
(i)
Disting ui s h betw e e n evapo r a t io n and boiling.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The cup cont ai n s 0.30 kg of milk at an initial tem p e r a t u r e of 18
°C. Estim a t e the minim u m mas s of ste a m at 100 °C tha t is
requi r e d to heat the milk to 80 °C.
Specific latent heat of vaporiz a tio n of wate r
kg –1
Specific heat capacity of wate r
K–1
Specific heat capacity of milk
K–1
= 2.3 × 10 6 J
= 4200 J kg –1
= 3800 J kg –1
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
409
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
410
(iii) Stat e two reas o n s , othe r than evapo r a ti o n, why the ans w e r to (b)
(ii) is likely to be differ e n t from the act u al mas s of cond e n s e d
stea m .
1: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
27 3 . This ques tion is abou t the eye and sight.
(a)
Stat e, by refer e n c e to hum a n vision, wha t is me a n t by
accom m o d a t i o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Explain how accom m o d a t i o n is achieve d in the hum a n eye.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
411
(c)
The light outpu t from two par tic ul a r lamps is desc ri b e d as “war mwhite” and as “cold- white”. Both lamps emit the full spec t r u m of
colour s. Stat e how the visual impr e s s io n of tem p e r a t u r e differ e n c e
may be achieve d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
27 4 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.
At one point in an arte ry, blood cells flow along the axis of the arte ry with
spee d v , as show n.
A par allel bea m of ultra s o u n d of freq u e n c y 4.5 MHz is incide n t on the
art e r y at an angle of 40°.
The spee d of ultra s o u n d in the body tissu e s is c = 1.5 × 10 3 m s –1 .
The ultra s o u n d dete c t e d after reflection from the blood cells is found to be
Doppler- shifted in frequ e n cy by 740 Hz.
The expr es sio n for the Dopple r shift ∆f of the ultra s o u n d of freq u e n c y f may
be ass u m e d to be
IB Questionbank Physics
412
(2 fv c osθ )
c
∆f =
.
IB Questionbank Physics
413
(a)
For this stat e d expr e s s io n, explain the inclusion of
(i)
the factor of 2.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
the factor cos θ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Deter m i n e a value for the spe e d of the blood cells in the art e r y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
27 5 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
414
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
415
(b)
Descri b e and explain how polariz a tio n may be use d in stre s s analysis.
You may draw a diagr a m if you wish.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(6)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
416
27 6 . This ques tion is abou t the wave nat u r e of matt e r .
(a)
Descri b e the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Outline an experi m e n t to verify the de Broglie hypot h e s i s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
417
(c)
Show that the de Broglie wavel e n g t h of elect r o n s accel e r a t e d from
rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differe n c e of 150 V is 1.0 ×1 0 –10 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
27 7 . This ques tion is abou t alpha ( α) par ticle scat t e r i n g .
An experi m e n t is car ri e d out in which alph a (α) par ticle s of initial kinetic
ene r gy 5.0 MeV are fired at a piece of gold foil. The proton num b e r of gold
is 79.
Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of close s t appr o a c h of an alpha (α) particle to a
gold nucleu s .
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
418
IB Questionbank Physics
419
27 8 . This ques tion is abou t β+ (posit ro n) dec ay.
(a)
In a β + decay, a positro n is em itted along with a neut ri n o, and a γ-ray
photon.
Althoug h the ener gy spect r u m for γ-ray s involved is discr e t e , the
ener gy spect r u m for the positr o n s is continu o u s .
(i)
Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n a disc r e t e ene r gy spec t r u m and a
contin uo u s ener gy spec t r u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Explain how the exist e n c e of the neut ri n o accou n t s for the
contin uo u s nat u r e of the positro n ene r gy spec t r u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Sodiu m- 22 is a radioisot o p e use d in nucle a r medicin e that unde r g o e s
β + decay.
The half- life of sodiu m- 22 is 2.6 yea rs.
A sam pl e of sodiu m- 22 has an initial activity of 6.2 × 10 9 Bq.
(i)
Define decay cons ta n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the decay const a n t of sodiu m- 22.
IB Questionbank Physics
420
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Calculat e the activity of the sam pl e of sodiu m- 22 afte r 8.0 year s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
27 9 . This ques tion is abou t storin g infor m a t io n.
Infor m a ti o n may be stor e d eithe r in analog u e form or in digital form.
(a)
Disting ui s h betw e e n analog u e inform a t io n and digital infor m a t io n.
Analogu e: ................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Digital: ....................................................................................................
....................
IB Questionbank Physics
421
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Stat e on e met ho d by which inform a t io n may be stor e d in
(i)
analog u e form.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
digital form.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
422
(c)
Stat e and explain two rea s o n s why, for many pur po s e s , digital stor a g e
of infor m a ti o n is replacin g analog u e stor a g e .
1: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(d)
Sugg e s t two possible implica tion s for society of the ever- incr e a si n g
capa bility of data stor a g e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
423
28 0 . This ques tion is abou t an amplifier circuit.
The diagr a m below show s an amplifie r circuit incor p o r a t i n g an ideal
oper a tio n al amplifier (op- amp).
The oper a ti o n al amplifier uses a +9 V / 0 / –9 V supply.
(a)
Calcula t e the gain of the amplifier circuit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
424
(b)
Deter m i n e the outp u t pote n ti al V out for value s of input pote n ti al V in
equal to
(i)
–0.9 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
+2. 0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
28 1 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
Describ e the role of bas e stations and a cellula r excha n g e when a mobile
phon e is switch e d on and befor e a call is ma d e.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
IB Questionbank Physics
425
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
426
28 2 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .
(a)
Define inertial fram e of refer e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Ann and Sue are twins. Sue rem ai n s on Eart h. Ann travels to the sta r
Sirius in a spac es hi p moving at a spe e d of 0.80 c, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
The dist an c e betw e e n Eart h and Sirius is 8.8 ly, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
(i)
Calculat e the time elaps e d , as mea s u r e d by Sue, betw e e n Ann
leaving Ear t h and rea c hi n g Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r Ann or Sue mea s u r e s the prope r time
betw e e n Ann leaving Eart h and arriving at Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the time take n for the spa c e s hi p to reac h Sirius, as
meas u r e d by Ann.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
427
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
428
(iv)
As Ann appr o a c h e s Sirius, she sends a radio mess a g e back to
Sue. The dista n c e betw e e n Sirius and Eart h, as mea s u r e d by
Ann, is 5.28 ly. Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Ann, that it
takes for the signal to reac h Sue.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
28 3 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .
(a)
Stat e an excha n g e par ticle for
(i)
the weak inter a c ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Comm e n t , with refer e n c e to the mass of the excha n g e particle s , on
the rang e of the weak and elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n s .
IB Questionbank Physics
429
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Descri b e the proce s s repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diagr a m below.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
Stat e what is mea n t by a virtual par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e)
Explain how the Heise n b e r g unce r t a i n t y princi ple for ene r gy and time
applies to the inter a c t io n in (c).
IB Questionbank Physics
430
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
431
(f)
The unce r t ai n t y in the time for the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n
betw e e n two elect r o n s is 1.6 × 10 –16 s. Dete r mi n e the unc e r t a i n t y in
the ene r gy of the virtu al photon.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
28 4 . Which of the following quan ti tie s can be dete r m i n e d from a spe e d- time
grap h of a particle travelling in a straig h t line?
A.
Only the mag nit u d e of the accel e r a ti o n at a given insta n t
B.
Both the velocity and the acc el e r a t io n at a given insta n t
C.
Only the dista n c e travelled in a given time
D.
Both the dista n c e travelle d in a given time and the ma gni t u d e of the
accel e r a t i o n at a given inst a n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28 5 . Which of the following is a corr e c t definition of work?
A.
Produ c t of force and dista n c e
B.
Produ c t of force and dista n c e move d in the dire c tion of the force
C.
Produ c t of powe r and time
D.
Produ c t of force and displa c e m e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
432
28 6 . The diagr a m shows two par allel met al plat e s X and Y.
Plate X is at Eart h pot en ti al (0 V) and the pote n ti al of plat e Y is V 0 .
Which of the following is corr ec t in resp e c t of the mag nit u d e and the
direction of the elect ric field betw e e n the plat e s ?
Ma g n i t u d e
Dire c t i o n
A.
const a n t
X→Y
B.
incr e a si n g
Y→ X
C.
const a n t
Y→ X
D.
incr e a si n g
X→Y
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28 7 . Gravit atio n al poten ti al at a point is define d as the work done
A.
per unit mas s in moving a small mass from infinity to the point.
B.
in moving a unit mas s from infinity to the point.
C.
in moving a small mas s from infinity to the point.
D.
per unit mas s in moving a unit mas s from infinity to the point.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
433
28 8 . The esca p e spee d from the surfa c e of a plan e t dep e n d s on
A.
both the radius and the mass of the plane t.
B.
only the radi us of the plane t .
C.
only the mas s of the plane t.
D.
only the gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of the plan e t.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
28 9 . Wate r at a tem p e r a t u r e of 0 °C is kept in a the r m a lly insula t e d cont ai n e r . A
lump of ice, also at 0 °C, is plac e d in the wate r and comple t ely subm e r g e d .
Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the net amou n t of ice that
will melt and the chan g e in tem p e r a t u r e of the wat e r ?
Net am o u n t of
ice
tha t m el t s
Cha n g e in
te m p e r a t u r e of
wat e r
A.
all will melt
no cha n g e
B.
som e will melt
decr e a s e
C.
none will melt
no cha n g e
D.
all will melt
decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
434
29 0 . The beh aviou r of a mona t o mi c gas such as heliu m will appr oxi m a t e to that
of an ideal gas when it is kept at
A.
a tem p e r a t u r e close to absolut e zero.
B.
low pres s u r e .
C.
very high pres s u r e .
D.
very high tem p e r a t u r e .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 1 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e p and volum e V relation s hi p for one cycle
of oper a tio n of an engin e.
Which of the labelled par t s of the cycle identify isoba ric cha n g e s and
adiab a ti c chan g e s of stat e?
Isob a ri c
Adiab a t i c
A.
IV only
I and II only
B.
I and III only
II and IV only
C.
II and III only
IV only
D.
I and III only
II only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
435
29 2 . The funda m e n t a l (first har m o nic) frequ e n c y of the note emitt e d by an
organ pipe closed at one end is f. What is the funda m e n t a l frequ e n c y of the
note emitt e d by an orga n pipe of the sa m e lengt h tha t is open at both ends?
A.
f
4
B.
f
2
C.
2f
D.
4f
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 3 . Which of the following wave phe no m e n a is associ a t e d with blood flow
meas u r e m e n t s ?
A.
Polarization
B.
Diffractio n
C.
Refrac tion
D.
Doppl er effect
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
436
29 4 . A bea m of coher e n t light is incide n t on a single slit of width b . After
passin g throu g h the slit, the light is incide n t on a scre e n at a dista n c e D
from the slit.
Which of the following chan g e s , carri e d out sepa r a t e ly, in res p e c t of b and
D will result in an incr e a s e in width of the first diffra ctio n maxim u m form e d
on the scre e n ?
b
D
A.
decr e a s e
incr e a s e
B.
incr e a s e
incr e a s e
C.
decr e a s e
decr e a s e
D.
incr e a s e
decr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 5 . The imag e s of two sourc e s are just resolve d. Which of the following is a
corr e c t stat e m e n t of the Rayleigh crite rion for this situa tion ?
A.
The cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tion patt e r n of one sour c e must
coincide with the cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tio n patt e r n of the
other sourc e.
B.
Light from the sour c e s must pass throu g h a circul a r ape r t u r e .
C.
Light from the sour c e s must be cohe r e n t .
D.
The first minim u m of the diffra c tion patt e r n of one sourc e must
coincide with the cent r al maxim u m of the diffrac tio n patt e r n of the
other sourc e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
437
29 6 . An optically active subs t a n c e is a subs t a n c e tha t
A.
has a refr ac tive index that depe n d s on the plane of pola riz a tio n of
inciden t light.
B.
compl et ely absor b s incide n t unpola riz e d light.
C.
rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion of incide n t polariz e d light.
D.
polarize s unpola riz e d light.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
29 7 . A copp e r shee t is sus p e n d e d in a region of unifor m magn e t i c field by an
insulati n g wire conne c t e d to a horizon t al suppo r t . The she e t is pulle d to
one side so that it is outsid e the region of the field, and the n rele a s e d .
The unifor m mag n e ti c field is dire c t e d into the plan e of the pape r.
Which of the following is true for both the dire c tion of the induc e d cur r e n t
in the sheet and the chan g e in amplit u d e of the oscillation s of the she e t
with time?
Dire c t i o n of indu c e d
curr e n t
Chan g e in am p l i t u d e
A.
stays the sam e
no cha n g e
B.
chan g e s
decr e a s e s
C.
stays the sam e
decr e a s e s
D.
chan g e s
no cha n g e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
438
29 8 . An alter n a ti n g curr e n t supply of negligible inter n al resist a n c e is conne c t e d
to two resis to r s that are in par all el.
The resist a n c e of each resisto r is R and the peak volta g e of the ac supply is
V 0 . Which of the following is the aver a g e powe r dissip a t e d in the circ uit?
A.
2V0
R
B.
V0
R
2
2
V0
C.
2
2R
2
D.
V0
2R
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
439
29 9 . Which of the following is true in resp e c t of both the Coulom b inte r a c ti o n
and the stron g inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s in an atom?
Coul o m b int er a c t i o n
exi s t s bet w e e n
Str o n g int e r a c t i o n
exi s t s bet w e e n
A.
proto n s only
neut r o n s only
B.
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
neut r o n s only
C.
proto n s only
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
D.
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
both proto n s and
neut r o n s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 0 . Light of freq u e n c y f is inciden t on a met al surf ac e . The work function of the
met al is φ. Which o f the following is the maxim u m kinetic ene r gy of the
elect r o n s emitt e d from the surfa c e ?
A.
hf – 
B.
h
( f  )
e
C.
 – hf
D.
h
(  f )
e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
440
30 1 . An elect r o n is accel er a t e d from rest thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e V .
Which of the following is the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n afte r
accele r a ti o n?
h
A.
2m e V e
2m e h
B.
V2
h
C.
2m e V 2 e 2
D.
V2
2m e h
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 2 . Which of the following is an assu m p t i o n of the Schr ö di n g e r model of the
hydro g e n atom?
A.
The orbit al pat h of the elect r o n fits a sta n di n g wave.
B.
The position of the elect r o n is undefin e d but its mom e n t u m is well
define d.
C.
The mom e n t u m of the elect r o n is und efine d but its position is well
define d.
D.
The elect r o n is desc ri b e d by wavefun c tio n s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 3 . A Bainbri d g e mass spect r o m e t e r may be use d to mea s u r e the mas s of
A.
an atom.
B.
an ion.
C.
an isotop e.
D.
a molecul e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
441
30 4 . A nucle u s of the isotop e potas si u m- 40 dec ays to a nucle u s of the isotop e
argo n- 40. The reaction equ a tio n for this dec ay may be writt e n as
40
19K

40
Z Ar
X ν
Which of the following cor r e c tly identifies the proto n num b e r of argo n- 40
and the particle X?
Z
X
A.
18
β–
B.
18
β+
C.
19
β+
D.
19
β–
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 5 . For the five- bit binary num b e r 1101 0, which of the following corr e c tly
identifies both the most- significa n t bit (MSB) and the equivale n t decim al
num b e r ?
MS B
Dec i m a l
A.
1
52
B.
0
26
C.
1
26
D.
0
52
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
442
30 6 . The capa cit a n c e of a pixel of a CCD is 3.2 pF. A pulse of light is incide n t on
the pixel and as a res ult, 10 4 elect r o n s are eject e d from the pixel. The
mag ni t u d e of the chan g e in pote n ti al of the pixel is
A.
5.0 × 10 –16 V
B.
5.0 × 10 –4 V
C.
2.0 × 10 3 V
D.
2.0 × 10 15 V
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 7 . Which of the following ratios is the definition of qua n t u m efficiency of a
pixel?
A.
n u m b eor f p h ot onin
s c id e n t
n u m b eof
r e le c t r o nesm it t e d
B.
n u m b eof
r e le c t r o nesm it t e d
n u m b eor f p h ot onin
s c id e n t
C.
in t e n s itoyf in c id e nlig
t ht
in t e n s itoyf e m it t e lig
d ht
D.
in t e n s itoyf e m it t e lig
d ht
in t e n s itoyf in c id e nlig
t ht
(Tot al 1 mar k )
30 8 . Degr a d e d ene r gy is ener gy that is
A.
stor e d in the Ear t h’s atmo s p h e r e .
B.
availabl e from non- rene w a bl e ene r gy sour c e s .
C.
conve r t e d into work in a cyclical proc e s s.
D.
no longer available for the perfor m a n c e of useful work.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
443
30 9 . A coal- fired powe r station has a powe r outp u t of P and its efficiency is ε. It
bur n s a mas s of coal M every secon d. The best estim a t e of the ene r gy
density of the coal used is
A.
Pε M
B.
Mε
P
C.
Pε
M
D.
P
εM
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
444
31 0 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e .
The gra p h shows the variation with tem p e r a t u r e T of the resist a n c e R of an
elect ric al com po n e n t .
(a)
A stud e n t hypot h e siz e s that the resist a n c e is inver s ely propo r tio n a l to
the tem p e r a t u r e .
Use dat a from the gra p h to show whet h e r the hypot h e s i s is suppo r t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
445
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
A secon d stud e n t sugg e s t s that the relations hi p is of the form
b
lg R = a + T
whe r e a and b are const a n t s .
The stud e n t plots the grap h below. Erro r bar s have bee n includ e d for
the sake of clarity.
IB Questionbank Physics
446
(i)
Explain how the grap h dra w n could be use d as evide nc e to
suppo r t the stud e n t’s sugg e s tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the const a n t s a and b .
b : .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
a: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Using your ans w e r s to (b)(ii), dete r m i n e a value for the
resis t a n c e of the compo n e n t at a tem p e r a t u r e of 260 K.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
447
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
31 1 . This ques tion is abou t forces.
An athlet e trains by dra g gi n g a heavy load acros s a roug h horizont al
surfac e.
The athl et e exer t s a force of ma gni t u d e F on the load at an angle of 25° to
the horizont al.
(a)
Once the load is moving at a stea dy spee d, the aver a g e horizon t a l
friction al force acting on the load is 470 N.
Calcula t e the aver a g e value of F that will ena bl e the load to move at
const a n t spee d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
448
(b)
The load is moved a horizon t a l dista n c e of 2.5 km in 1.2 hour s.
Calcula t e
(i)
the work done on the load by the force F.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
449
(ii)
the minim u m aver a g e powe r requi r e d to move the load.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
The athlet e pulls the load uphill at the sam e spe e d as in par t (a).
Explain, in ter m s of ene r gy cha n g e s , why the minim u m aver a g e powe r
req ui r e d is grea t e r than in (b)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
31 2 . This ques tion is abou t solar hea ti n g pan el s.
(a)
A village consist s of 120 hous e s . It is propos e d tha t solar pan els be
used to provide hot wate r to the hous e s .
The following data are availa ble.
aver a g e powe r need e d per hous e to hea t wate r
aver a g e surfac e solar inten sity
efficiency of ene r gy conve r sio n of a solar pan el
= 3.0 kW
= 650 W m –2
= 18 %
Calcula t e the minim u m surfa c e are a of the solar pan els requi r e d to
provide the total powe r for wat e r hea tin g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
450
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Sugg e s t two disadv a n t a g e s of using sola r powe r to provide ene r gy for
heatin g wat e r.
1: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
31 3 . This ques tion is abou t a gen e r a t o r .
(a)
Define electro m o t i v e force .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with time of elect r o m o tive force (emf)
for a gene r a t o r .
IB Questionbank Physics
451
IB Questionbank Physics
452
(i)
Calculat e the rms value of the emf of the gen e r a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The spee d of rotation of the gene r a t o r is halved with no othe r
chan g e s being mad e.
On the grap h, sketc h the variatio n of emf with time.
(2)
(iii) Explain why the grap h you drew in (ii) is differ e n t from the
origin al grap h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
453
31 4 . This ques tion is abou t an ideal gas.
(a)
The grap h shows a pres s u r e- volum e (P–V ) rela tion s hi p for a fixed
mas s of an ideal gas.
The gas und e r g o e s a thr e e- stag e cycle AB, BC and CA.
(i)
Identify the isocho ric (isovolu m e t r i c) cha n g e of stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Use data from the gra p h to show that the chan g e AB is
isothe r m a l .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
454
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
455
(iii) Stat e the two chan g e s for which the r m a l ene r gy is tra n sf e r r e d
from the gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iv)
Calculat e the work done by the gas in the cha n g e BC.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
The amou n t of gas in part (a) is 0.74 mol.
Calcula t e the maxim u m tem p e r a t u r e of the gas durin g the cycle in
part (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
456
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
457
(c)
The fixed mass of gas is heat e d from tem p e r a t u r e T 1 to T 2 at const a n t
volum e. Explain why, if this fixed mas s of gas is hea t e d from T 1 to T 2
at const a n t pres s u r e , the amou n t of ene r gy requi r e d is differ e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
31 5 . This ques tion is abou t solar radi a tion.
(a)
Stat e the Stefan–Boltzm a n n law for a black body.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The following data relat e to the Eart h and the Sun.
Eart h- Sun dist a n c e
radius of Eart h
IB Questionbank Physics
= 1.5 × 10 11 m
= 6.4 × 10 6 m
458
radius of Sun
surfac e tem p e r a t u r e of Sun
IB Questionbank Physics
= 7.0 × 10 8 m
= 5800 K
459
(i)
Use data from the table to show tha t the powe r radi a t e d by the
Sun is abou t
4 × 10 26 W.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Calculat e the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a dista n c e
from the Sun equ al to the Eart h’s dista n c e from the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The aver a g e powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the Eart h’s surfa c e
is 240 W m –2 .
Stat e two reas o n s why the value calcula t e d in (b)(ii) differs from
this value.
1: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2: .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
Show that the value for powe r absor b e d per unit are a of 240 W
m –2 is consist e n t with an aver a g e equilibri u m tem p e r a t u r e for
Eart h of abou t 255 K.
IB Questionbank Physics
460
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
461
(c)
Explain, by refer e n c e to the gre e n h o u s e effect, why the aver a g e
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h is gre a t e r tha n 255 K.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
Sugg e s t why the burnin g of fossil fuels may lead to an incr e a s e in the
tem p e r a t u r e of the surfac e of the Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
462
31 6 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).
(a)
List two adva n t a g e s of using CCDs as comp a r e d to using film for
imag e capt u r e .
1: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2: .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A CCD used to capt u r e X-ray imag e s consis t s of a squa r e 2600 0 ×
2600 0 arr a n g e m e n t of pixels. Eac h pixel produ c e s 16 levels of
infor m a t io n. Imag e s capt u r e d by the CCD are stor e d on a disk which
can stor e a maxim u m of 4.0 × 10 11 bits of dat a.
Deter m i n e the num b e r of imag e s that may be stor e d on one disk.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Outline
(i)
how X-rays inciden t on a pixel in a CCD prod u c e a volta g e signal.
IB Questionbank Physics
463
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
464
(ii)
how voltag e signal s such as that in (c)(i) are use d to stor e the Xray infor m a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
31 7 . This ques tion is abou t wat e r wave s.
A small sphe r e , mount e d at the end of a vertic al rod, dips below the surfa c e
of shallow wat e r in a tray. The sphe r e is drive n vertic ally up and down by a
motor att ac h e d to the rod. The oscillation s of the sphe r e prod u c e travelling
waves on the surfac e of the wat e r.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by a travelling (prog r e s sive ) wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
465
(b)
The diagr a m shows how the displa c e m e n t of the wat e r surfa c e at a
particul a r insta n t in time varies with dista n c e from the sphe r e . The
period of oscillation of the sphe r e is 0.027 s.
Use the diagr a m to calcul a t e , for the wave,
(i)
the amplitu d e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
the wavele n g t h .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) the frequ e n cy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
466
(iv)
the spee d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
The wave moves from region A into a region B of shallowe r wate r . The
waves move mor e slowly in region B. The diag r a m (not to scale) shows
som e of the wavefr o n t s in region A.
(i)
On the diagr a m , draw thr e e lines to comple t e the wavefro n t s in
region B.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
467
(ii)
Theory sugg e s t s that the wave spe e d c is relat e d to the wat e r
dept h d by
c =
gd
wher e g is a const a n t .
The refr ac tive index for waves travelling from region A to region
B is 1.4.
Dete r mi n e the following ratio.
w a t e dr e p t hin A
w a t e dr e p t hin B
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d)
Anothe r sphe r e is dippe d into the wate r . The sphe r e s oscillat e in
phas e. The diagr a m shows some lines in region A along which the
distu r b a n c e of the wat e r surfa c e is a minim u m .
IB Questionbank Physics
468
(i)
Outline how the regions of minim u m distu r b a n c e occur on the
surfac e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The frequ e n cy of oscillation of the sphe r e s is incr e a s e d .
Stat e and explain how this will affect the position s of minim u m
distu r b a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
469
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
470
31 8 . This ques tion is abou t projectile motion.
A sphe r e is project e d horizont a lly. The sphe r e is photog r a p h e d at inte rv als
of 0.10 s. The imag e s of the sphe r e are show n again s t a grid on the
diagr a m . Air resis t a n c e is negligible.
IB Questionbank Physics
471
(a)
Use dat a from the diagr a m to det e r m i n e the accel e r a ti o n of free fall.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Deter m i n e the spee d of the sphe r e 1.2 s afte r rele a s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
IB Questionbank Physics
472
(c)
On the grid, draw the path of the sphe r e assu mi n g air resis t a n c e is
not negligible.
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
473
31 9 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r dec ay and ioniza tion.
(a)
A nucleu s of radiu m- 91 (
a nucle u s of radon (Rn).
226
9 1 Ra )
unde r g o e s alpha particle dec ay to form
Identify the proton num b e r and nucleo n num b e r of the nucle u s of Rn.
Proton
num b e r : ...........................................................................................
.................
Nucleo n
num b e r : ...........................................................................................
..............
(2)
(b)
Imm e di a t ely after the dec ay of a station a r y radiu m nucle u s , the alpha
particl e and the rado n nucle u s move off in opposit e dire c tion s and at
differ e n t spee d s .
(i)
Outline the reas o n s for thes e obse rv a ti o n s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
474
(ii)
Show that the ratio
in it ia kl in e t ice n e r g oy f a lp h ap a r t ic le
in it ia kl in e t ice n e r g of
y r a d o na t o m
is abou t 56.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
The initial kinetic ener gy of the alpha par ticle is 4.9 MeV. As the alpha
particl e pas s e s thro u g h air, it loses all its kine tic ene r gy by causin g
the ionization of 1.7 × 10 5 air molec ul e s .
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by ionization.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Estim a t e , in joules, the aver a g e ene r gy nee d e d to ionize an air
molecul e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
475
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
476
(d)
Outline why a bet a particl e has a longe r rang e in air tha n an alpha
particl e of the sam e ene r gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
32 0 . This ques tion is abou t radio waves.
A satellite is travelling directly away from a spac e shuttl e with a spe e d of
7.9 km s –1 .
The satellite is tran s m i t ti n g radio wave s of frequ e n c y 150.00 0 000 MHz.
(a)
(i)
Calculat e the frequ e n c y to which an astr o n a u t on the
shuttl e will need to set a rec eive r in orde r to rec eive the signal
from the satellite.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
477
(ii)
The satellite now pass e s close to a secon d spac e shuttl e.
Describ e the chan g e s tha t will nee d to be mad e to the setti ng of
the receive r as the sat ellit e appr o a c h e s and moves away from the
secon d shut tl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) Sugg e s t why the form ul a use d in the calcul a tion in (a)(i) would
not be suita bl e for radia tio n from a dista n t galaxy moving away
from the Eart h at 90 % of the spe e d of light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
A space shuttl e orbits at a heigh t of 300 km above the surfa c e of the
Eart h. It carri es two pan els sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e of 24 m. The
panels reflect light of wavel e n g t h 500 nm towa r d s an obse rv e r on the
Eart h’s surfac e.
The obse rv e r views the pan els with a tele sc o p e of ape r t u r e dia m e t e r
85 mm. The panels act as point sourc e s of light for the obse r v e r .
(i)
Describ e what is mea n t by the Rayleigh crite rion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
478
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
479
(ii)
Dete r mi n e whet h e r the imag e s of the pan els form e d by the
teles co p e will be resolve d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
32 1 . This ques tion is abou t an elect ric al hea t e r .
An elect ric al heat e r consist s of two hea ti n g elem e n t s E 1 and E 2 . The
elem e n t s are conn e c t e d in par allel. Each elem e n t has a switc h and is
conne c t e d to a supply of emf 240 V. The supply has negligibl e inter n al
resis t a n c e .
Elem e n t E 1 is mad e from wire that has a cros s- section a l are a of 6.8 × 10 –8
m 2 . The resistivity of the wire at the oper a ti n g tem p e r a t u r e of the elem e n t
is 1.1 × 10 –6 Ωm.
IB Questionbank Physics
480
(a)
(i)
The total lengt h of wire is 4.5 m. Show tha t the
resis t a n c e of E 1 is 73 Ω.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
481
(ii)
Calculat e the powe r outp u t of E 1 with only this elem e n t
conne c t e d to the supply.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Elem e n t E 2 is mad e of wire of the sam e cross- section and
mat e ri al as E 1 . The lengt h of wire use d to make E 2 is 1.5 m.
Dete r mi n e the total powe r outpu t whe n both E 1 and E 2 are
conne c t e d to the supply.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv)
With refer e n c e to the powe r outp u t, explain why it would be
inapp r o p r i a t e to conn e c t the hea ti n g ele m e n t s in serie s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
482
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
483
(b)
Each elem e n t in the elect ri c a l heat e r is woun d as a coil as show n.
Each tur n of the coil may be conside r e d to act as a cur r e n t- car ryin g
long str ai g h t wire.
(i)
On the diagr a m , draw the mag n e t i c field arou n d a curr e n tcarryi n g long str ai g h t wire. The arro w shows the dire c tion of the
curr e n t .
(3)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r the turn s of wire will attr a c t or rep el
one anot h e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
484
IB Questionbank Physics
485
32 2 . This ques tion is abou t the hydro g e n atom.
(a)
A par allel beam of visible light is shone throu g h mona t o m i c hydro g e n
gas.
The radiation em er gi n g from the gas is analys e d by comp a r i n g the
inciden t and eme r gi n g inte nsi ti e s at various wavele n g t h s . It is found
that at a wavelen g t h of 490 nm the inte nsity of the eme r g e n t bea m is
grea tly reduc e d .
The diagr a m shows some of the elect r o n ene r gy stat e s of the
hydrog e n atom wher e n is the qua n t u m num b e r of the ene r gy level.
(i)
Calculat e the ene r gy, in eV, of a photon of light of wavele n g t h
490 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
486
(ii)
Use your answ e r in (a)(i) and the ene r gy level diag r a m to explain
the redu c tio n in inten sity of the eme r g e n t bea m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(b)
Outline how the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydrog e n atom leads to the
idea of discr e t e elect r o n ene r gy stat e s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
487
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
488
32 3 . This ques tion is abou t det er m i ni n g some prop e r t i e s of the sta r Wolf 359.
(a)
The star Wolf 359 has a par allax angle of 0.419 arcs e c o n d s .
(i)
Describ e how this par allax angl e is mea s u r e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii)
Calculat e the dista n c e in light- year s from Eart h to Wolf 359.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Stat e why the met h o d of par allax can only be use d for star s at a
dist a n c e of less than a few hund r e d par s e c s from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
489
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
490
(b)
The ratio
a p p a r e nbtr ig h t n e of
s s Wo lf3 5 9
a p p a r e nbtr ig h t n e os sf t h eS u n is 3.7 × 10 –15 .
Show that the ratio
lu m in o s itoyf Wolf3 5 9
lu m in o s itof
y t h eS u n is 8.9 × 10 –4 . (1ly = 6.3 × 10 4 AU)
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(c)
The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of Wolf 359 is 2800 K and its luminosity is
3.5 × 10 23 W.
Calcula t e the radius of Wolf 359.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
491
(d)
By refer e n c e to the data in (c), sugg e s t why Wolf 359 is neith e r a
white dwarf nor a red giant.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
32 4 . This ques tion is abou t the density of the unive r s e .
(a)
Define critical densit y .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Explain how the futur e of the unive r s e may be pre dic t e d by comp a r i n g
the estim a t e d density of the unive r s e to the critic al density.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
492
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
493
(c)
Explain why the existe n c e of dark matt e r make s it difficult to me a s u r e
the density of the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
32 5 . This ques tion is abou t stellar evolution.
(a)
Descri b e how a larg e cloud of hydro g e n gas can lead to conditions
that initiat e a fusion reac tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Stat e the prop e r t y of a main sequ e n c e sta r that det e r m i n e s for how
long hydro g e n in its cor e fuse s into helium.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
Stat e the end prod u c t of nucle a r fusion proc e s s e s in the core of
IB Questionbank Physics
494
(i)
a red giant.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
495
(ii)
the large s t red supe r giant s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
32 6 . This ques tion is abou t galactic motion.
(a)
The wavele n g t h of the Lyma n- alph a line in the hydrog e n spec t r u m is
mea s u r e d in the labor a t o r y to be 122 nm. In the hydro g e n spec t r u m of
a galaxy, the Lyman- alph a line is me a s u r e d to be 147 nm. Dete r m i n e
the dista n c e of this galaxy from the Eart h.
Assum e that the Hubbl e const a n t H 0 is 75km s –1 M pc –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Sugg e s t on e reas o n why the r e is unc e r t a i n t y in the value of the
Hubbl e const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
496
32 7 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
(a)
A car rie r wave may be amplit u d e modula t e d or frequ e n c y modul a t e d .
Stat e
(i)
what is mean t by modula tio n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
why car rie r waves are modula t e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
A sinusoid al car ri e r wave has a frequ e n c y of 500 kHz and an
amplit u d e of 8.0 V.
The carri e r wave is frequ e n c y modula t e d by a sinusoi d al infor m a t io n
signal of frequ e n cy 2.5 kHz and amplit u d e 1.2 V. The frequ e n c y
deviation of the carri e r wave is 15 kHz V –1 . Describ e qua n tit a tiv ely the
variation with time of the car ri e r wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
497
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
498
32 8 . This ques tion is abou t optic fibre tra n s m i s sio n.
The variation with time t of the input powe r to an optic fibre is show n in
Diagr a m 1.
The variation with time t of the outp u t powe r from the optic fibre is show n
in Diagr a m 2.
The scales are the sam e on both diag r a m s .
(a)
Stat e and explain the feat u r e of the gra p h s tha t shows tha t the r e is
(i)
att e n u a t i o n of the signal.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
signal noise.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
499
(b)
The dur a tio n (time width) of the signal incre a s e s as it travels along
the optic fibre.
(i)
Stat e two reas o n s for this incr e a s e d time dur a tio n.
1:......................................................................................................
..................
2:......................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Sugg e s t why this incre a s e in the width of the pulse sets a limit on
the frequ e n cy of pulse s that can be tran s m i t t e d along an
unint e r r u p t e d lengt h of optic fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
32 9 . This ques tion is abou t the use of sat ellite s for com m u ni c a ti o n.
(a)
(i)
Stat e what is me a n t by a geost a t io n a r y sat ellite.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Explain the advan t a g e s of the use of geos t a tio n a r y satellite s for
com m u ni c a ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
500
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
501
(b)
Explain the adva n t a g e s of the use of pola r- orbitin g satellite s for
com m u ni c a t io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
33 0 . This ques tion is abou t a mobile phon e netwo r k.
A pas s e n g e r in a car is using a mobile phon e.
Stat e and explain the role of the base stations and the cellula r excha n g e as
the car moves from one cell to anot h e r .
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
502
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
503
33 1 . This ques tion is abou t an amplifier circuit.
The diagr a m below show s an amplifie r circuit incor p o r a t i n g an ideal
oper a tio n al amplifier (op- amp).
The oper a ti o n al amplifier uses a +9 V / 0 / –9 V supply.
(a)
Calcula t e the gain of the amplifier circuit.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
504
(b)
Deter m i n e the outp u t pote n ti al V out for value s of input pote n ti al V in
equal to
(i)
–0.9 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
+2. 0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
33 2 . This ques tion is abou t a compo u n d microsc o p e , sphe ri c al abe r r a t i o n and
chro m a t i c aber r a t i o n.
(a)
An object O is place d in front of the objective lens of a compo u n d
micros c o p e as shown below.
The focal point s of the objective lens are at F. The micros c o p e is in
nor m al adjus t m e n t . Withou t dra wi n g a ray diag r a m , label the
appr oxi m a t e positions , on the princip al axis, of
(i)
the image prod u c e d by the objec tive lens (label this position X).
(1)
(ii)
the focal points of the eye lens (label thes e points E).
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
505
(iii) the final imag e (label this image Y).
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
506
(b)
An object is viewed throu g h a convex lens that has bee n corr e c t e d for
sphe ric al aber r a t i o n.
For a partic ul a r object dista n c e , the image of the objec t is as show n
below.
Anothe r convex lens of the sam e focal lengt h, but not corr e c t e d for
sphe ric al aber r a t i o n, is now used to view the object. The object
dista n c e is unch a n g e d .
In the spac e below, draw the imag e as it would be see n throu g h this
secon d lens.
The imag e as seen thro u g h the cor r e c t e d lens is show n as a broke n
line.
(2)
(c)
Explain how chro m a t i c abe r r a t i o n arise s whe n an objec t is viewe d
throu g h a single lens.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
507
33 3 . This ques tion is abou t the scatt e r i n g of light.
(a)
Stat e an appr oxi m a t e wavele n g t h for
(i)
red light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
blue light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
With refer e n c e to your answ e r s in (a), explain why the settin g Sun
appe a r s reddis h in colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
33 4 . This ques tion is abou t two- sour c e inte rfe r e n c e .
A doubl e slit is arr a n g e d so that its plan e is nor m al to a bea m of lase r light,
as show n below.
IB Questionbank Physics
508
The wavelen g t h of the light is 640 nm. The slit sepa r a t i o n in the doubl e slit
arr a n g e m e n t is 0.85 mm. Cohe r e n t light eme r g e s from the slits and an
interf e r e n c e patt e r n is observ e d on a scre e n. The scre e n is par allel to the
plane of the double slits. The dist a n c e betw e e n the slits and the scre e n is
2.4 m.
IB Questionbank Physics
509
(a)
(i)
Stat e what is me a n t by cohe r e n t light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Explain how an interfe r e n c e patt e r n is form e d on the scre e n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b)
Calcula t e the sepa r a t io n of the fringe s in the inte rfe r e n c e patt e r n on
the scre e n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
The interf e r e n c e patt e r n in (b) consis t s of a serie s of alter n a t e light
and dark fringe s. The inte n sity of the light from one slit is now
red uc e d . Sugg e s t the effect on the app e a r a n c e of the fringe s.
IB Questionbank Physics
510
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
33 5 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.
(a)
In an X-ray tube having a tungs t e n tar g e t , elect r o n s are accele r a t e d
from rest throu g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 45 kV.
Calcula t e the ran g e of wavele n g t h s tha t will be obse rv e d in the X-ray
spect r u m produ c e d by this bom b a r d m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Explain the origins of the feat u r e s of a cha r a c t e r i s ti c X-ray spec t r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
511
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
512
33 6 . This ques tion is abou t thin film inte rf e r e n c e .
(a)
The diagr a m below shows a ray of monoc h r o m a t i c light incide n t on a
thin film in air.
On the diag r a m , draw the pat hs of rays tha t would give rise to
interfe r e n c e as seen by an eye in the region nea r E.
(2)
(b)
White light is incide n t on a soap bubbl e. Explain why the soap film
appe a r s colour e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
33 7 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .
(a)
Define inertial fram e of refer e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
513
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
514
(b)
Ann and Sue are twins. Sue rem ai n s on Eart h. Ann travels to the sta r
Sirius in a spac es hi p moving at a spe e d of 0.80c, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
The dist an c e betw e e n Eart h and Sirius is 8.8 ly, as mea s u r e d by Sue.
(i)
Calculat e the time elaps e d , as mea s u r e d by Sue, betw e e n Ann
leaving Ear t h and rea c hi n g Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e and explain whet h e r Ann or Sue mea s u r e s the prope r time
betw e e n Ann leaving Eart h and arriving at Sirius.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Calculat e the time take n for the spa c e s hi p to reac h Sirius, as
meas u r e d by Ann.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
As Ann appr o a c h e s Sirius, she sends a radio mess a g e back to
Sue. The dista n c e betw e e n Sirius and Eart h, as mea s u r e d by
Ann, is 5.28 ly. Deter m i n e the time, as mea s u r e d by Ann, that it
takes for the signal to reac h Sue.
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
515
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
As soon as Ann arrives at Sirius, she imme di a t e ly turn s arou n d and
ret u r n s to Eart h at a spee d of 0.80c, as mea s u r e d by Sue. The ret u r n
journ ey gives rise to the twin par a d ox.
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by the twin par a d ox.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Outline how the twin par a d ox is resolve d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
33 8 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mass and ene r gy.
(a)
Define rest mas s.
IB Questionbank Physics
516
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Explain why par ticle s canno t be accel e r a t e d to the spe e d c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
517
(c)
Two proto n s are travelling towa r d s one anot h e r along the sam e
str aig h t line. The spee d of eac h proton is 0.70c as me a s u r e d by a
labor a t o r y observ e r . Calcul a t e the rela tive velocity of app ro a c h , as
mea s u r e d in the fram e of refe r e n c e of one of the proto n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
Deter m i n e the pote n ti al differ e n c e throu g h which a proton mus t be
accel e r a t e d in orde r to rea c h a spe e d of 0.70c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
33 9 . This ques tion is abou t black holes.
(a)
Define the Sch w a r z s c hil d radius .
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
518
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
519
(b)
Calcula t e the Schw a r z s c hil d radius for an objec t of mas s 2.0 × 10 31
kg.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A star s hi p is station a r y just outsid e the event horizon of a black hole.
A space station is also station a r y and is locat e d far away from the
black hole and any othe r mas sive objec t.
(i)
The star s hi p tran s m i t s a radio signal to the spac e station. Explain
why the signal receive d at the spac e station is shifte d to a lower
frequ e n c y than the tra n s m i t t e d frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
520
(ii)
The star s hi p rem ai n s sta tion a r y just outsid e the event horizon for
one hour as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r in the star s hi p. The time
elaps e d , as meas u r e d by an obse rv e r in the spac e station, is ten
hour s. Deter m i n e , in ter m s of the Schw a r z s c hil d radius R s of the
black hole, the dist an c e of the sta r s hi p from the event horizon of
the black hole.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
34 0 . This ques tion is abou t heari n g.
A stud e n t listen s to music using a pers o n a l ear p h o n e . The powe r of the
soun d produ c e d by the ear p h o n e is 0.19 μW. The powe r i s evenly
distrib u t e d over the tymp a ni c me m b r a n e of are a 54 mm 2 .
(a)
Calcula t e, for the surfac e of the tymp a ni c me m b r a n e ,
(i)
the sound inten sity.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
521
(ii)
the sound inten sity level (IL ).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Comm e n t , with resp e c t to the effect on the hea ri n g of the stud e n t , on
the intensi ty level calcul at e d in (a)(ii).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
34 1 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .
(a)
Define acous tic impe d a n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
522
(b)
The table gives values of the acous tic impe d a n c e for air and soft
tissue.
acous tic
impe d a n c e
/ kg m –2 s –1
air
430
soft tissue
1.63 × 10 6
The inten sity reflectio n coefficie n t for two medi a of impe d a n c e s Z 1
and Z 2 is
 Z1  Z 2

Z Z 2
IR =  1
(i)



2
Dete r mi n e the intensi ty reflectio n coefficie nt betw e e n air and
soft tissue.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Explain why air betw e e n an ultra s o u n d prob e and the skin (soft
tissu e) of a pers o n preve n t s ultr a s o u n d diag no sis taking plac e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
523
(iii) Stat e and explain how the proble m you have explain e d in (b)(ii) is
overco m e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
34 2 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r ma gn e t i c reson a n c e (NMR).
Outline the basic principles of nucle a r mag n e t i c reso n a n c e (NMR) imagin g.
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
IB Questionbank Physics
524
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
525
34 3 . This ques tion is abou t radiation.
(a)
Stat e, in the cont ext of radia tio n mea s u r e m e n t , wha t is me a n t by
(i)
expos u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
abso r b e d dose.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) equivale n t dose.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The ene r gy requir e d to prod u c e one ion pair in air is 34 eV.
The expos u r e in a workpla c e is found to be 2.5 × 10 –3 C kg –1 .
Deter m i n e the ener gy given to 1.0 g of air as a res ult of this expos u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
526
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
527
(c)
The expos u r e to X-ray radia tio n during a comp u t e d tomog r a p h y (CT)
scan impos e s a finite risk for the patie n t.
(i)
Sugg e s t the nat u r e of this risk.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Explain why such a risk is thou g h t to be acce p t a bl e by both the
patien t and the medic al profes sion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
34 4 . This ques tion is abou t funda m e n t a l inte r a c ti o n s .
(a)
Stat e an excha n g e par ticle for
(i)
the weak inter a c ti o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
the elect r o m a g n e t i c inter a c tio n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
528
(b)
Comm e n t , with refer e n c e to the mass of the excha n g e particle s , on
the rang e of the weak and elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Descri b e the proce s s repr e s e n t e d by the Feyn m a n diagr a m below.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
Stat e what is mea n t by a virtual par ticle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
529
(e)
Explain how the Heise n b e r g unce r t a i n t y princi ple for ene r gy and time
applies to the inter a c t io n in (c).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f)
The unce r t ai n t y in the time for the elect r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c tio n
betw e e n two elect r o n s is 1.6 × 10 –16 s. Dete r mi n e the unc e r t a i n t y in
the ene r gy of the virtu al photon.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
34 5 . This ques tion is abou t particle dete c tio n.
(a)
Outline how particle s prod u c e visible trac ks in a bubble cha m b e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
530
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
531
(b)
Stat e two reas o n s why wire cha m b e r s are now use d rat h e r tha n
bubbl e cha m b e r s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
Below is a sketc h of the track s in a bubble cha m b e r of an elect r o n and
a positr o n, prod u c e d by the anni hila tion of a photon.
Ther e is a mag n e t i c field dire c t e d nor m al to the plane of the pape r.
Explain why the tracks of the particle s are spirals.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
532
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
533
34 6 . This ques tion is abou t meso n s and baryon s.
(a)
Stat e the qua r k cont e n t of meson s and baryon s .
Meson s: ...................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Baryons: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Explain why both meso n s and baryon s can be desc ri b e d as colourle s s .
Meson s: ...................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Baryons: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A neg a tive pion, π –, collide s with a station a r y proton, produ ci n g a
neut r o n and an unknow n par ticle, X.
π– + p → n + X
(i)
Stat e the char g e on par ticle X.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
534
(ii)
Deduc e whet h e r particle X is a meson or a baryo n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
34 7 . This ques tion is abou t pair prod u c tio n.
(a)
Estim a t e the tem p e r a t u r e below which spont a n e o u s pair prod u c tio n of
elect r o n s and positr o n s cannot occur.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
It is sugg e s t e d that, in the early unive r s e , ther e was slightly mor e
mat t e r than anti- matt e r .
Using your ans w e r to (a), stat e why the r e is cur r e n tly only sta bl e
mat t e r in the univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
535
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
536
34 8 . The cur r e n t in a resisto r is mea s u r e d as 2.00 A ± 0.02 A. Which of the
following corr e c tly identifies the absolut e unc e r t a i n t y and the perc e n t a g e
unce r t ai n t y in the curr e n t ?
Abso l u t e
unc e r t a i n t y
Per c e n t a g e
un c e r t a i n t y
A.
± 0.02 A
±1 %
B.
± 0.01 A
± 0.5 %
C.
± 0.02 A
± 0.01 %
D.
± 0.01 A
± 0.005 %
(Tot al 1 mar k )
34 9 . Which of the following lists only two vector qua n ti ti e s ?
A.
mas s, ener gy, work
B.
mom e n t u m , work, spee d
C.
weight, force, accele r a ti o n
D.
mom e n t u m , ener gy, displa c e m e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 0 . Sam a n t h a walks along a horizont a l path in the direc tio n shown. The curve d
par t of the pat h is a semi- circle.
The mag ni t u d e of her displ ac e m e n t from point P to point Q is
app r oxi m a t ely
A.
2 m.
B.
4 m.
C.
6 m.
D.
8 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
537
35 1 . Which of the following may be dete r m i n e d from a spe e d- time gra p h ?
A.
Displac e m e n t
B.
Dista nc e
C.
Power
D.
Forc e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 2 . Step h e n pus h e s two boxes P and Q, tha t stay in cont a c t, along a roug h
table, with a force F of 30 N.
Box P has a mas s of 2.0 kg and box Q has a mas s of 4.0 kg. Both boxes
move with cons t a n t spee d.
The res ult a n t force on box Q is
A.
0 N.
B.
5.0 N.
C.
15 N.
D.
30 N.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
538
35 3 . A ball moves along the inside of a horizont a l semi- circ ula r ring as show n.
The diagr a m is a view from above.
Which arrow repr e s e n t s the dire c tion of the aver a g e force on the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
539
35 4 . A ball is throw n vertically upwa r d s and come s down again. Air resist a n c e is
negligible. Which of the following gra p h s shows how the gravit a tion a l
poten ti al ene r gy E P varies with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 5 . A pum p extr ac t s wate r from a well of dept h h at a const a n t rat e of R kg s –1 .
What is the powe r requir e d to raise the wat e r ?
A.
R
gh
B.
Rgh
C.
Rg
h
D.
hg
R
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
540
35 6 . A box that is at rest with resp e c t to horizon t a l grou n d cont ain s a fixed
quan ti ty of an ideal gas. The inte r n a l ene r gy of the gas is U and its
tem p e r a t u r e is T . The box is now ma d e to move at cons t a n t spe e d with
res p e c t to the grou n d . Which of the following gives the cha n g e , if any, in
the inter n al ene r gy and the tem p e r a t u r e of the gas afte r the box has bee n
moving for some time?
Int er n a l en e r g y
Te m p e r a t u r e
A.
no chan g e
no cha n g e
B.
no chan g e
incr e a s e
C.
incr e a s e
no cha n g e
D.
incr e a s e
incr e a s e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 7 . Object P has a mas s m P and specific hea t capa city c P . Object Q has a mas s
m Q and specific heat capacity c Q . The tem p e r a t u r e of eac h objec t incr e a s e s
by the sam e amou n t . Which of the following gives the ratio
t h e r m aeln e r g y tnr safe r r e tdoo b je c P
t
t h e r m aeln e r g y tnr safe r r e tdoo b je c Q
t ?
mP cQ
A.
mQ c P
B.
mP cP
mQ c Q
mQ c Q
C.
mP cP
mQ c P
D.
mP cQ
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
541
35 8 . For two object s to be in ther m a l equilibri u m they mus t
A.
be in cont a c t with each othe r.
B.
radiat e equ al amou n t s of powe r.
C.
have the sam e ther m a l capa city.
D.
be at the sam e tem p e r a t u r e .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
35 9 . The shock abso r b e r s of a car, in good working condition, ens u r e that the
vertical oscillations of the car are
A.
und a m p e d .
B.
lightly dam p e d .
C.
moder a t e ly dam p e d .
D.
critically dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
542
36 0 . The gra p h s show how the accele r a ti o n a of four differe n t par ticle s varies
with their displace m e n t x.
Which of the par ticles is executi n g simple har m o ni c motion?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
543
36 1 . The diagr a m below is a snap s h o t of wave fronts of circul a r wave s emitt e d
by a point sour c e S at the surfac e of wate r . The sour c e vibra t e s at a
frequ e n c y f = 10.0 Hz.
The spee d of the wave front is
A.
0.15 cm s –1 .
B.
1.5 cm s –1 .
C.
15 cm s –1 .
D.
30 cm s –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
544
36 2 . Two coher e n t point sour c e s S 1 and S 2 emit sphe ri c a l waves.
Which of the following bes t desc ri b e s the inte n si ty of the wave s at P and Q?
P
Q
A.
maxim u m
minim u m
B.
minim u m
maxim u m
C.
maxim u m
maxim u m
D.
minim u m
minim u m
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 3 . An alph a particle is accel e r a t e d thro u g h a pote n ti al differ e n c e of 10 kV. Its
gain in kinetic ene r gy is
A.
10 eV.
B.
20 eV.
C.
10 keV.
D.
20 keV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
545
36 4 . A copp e r wire, of elect ric resis t a n c e R , has a lengt h L and a cross- section
S
are a S . Anothe r copp e r wire has a lengt h 2 L and a cross- section are a of 2 .
Which of the following is the resist a n c e of this wire?
A.
R
4
B.
R
2
C.
2R
D.
4R
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 5 . The circuit shows a light- depe n d e n t resisto r (LDR) in serie s with a resisto r
and a cell. The emf of the cell is ε. The inte r n a l resist a n c e of the cell is
negligible.
When light shines on the LDR, the pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s the resis to r
will
A.
stay the sam e.
B.
decr e a s e .
C.
incr e a s e but always be less tha n ε.
D.
incr e a s e and exce e d ε.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
546
36 6 . The radius of a char g e d sphe ri c a l condu c t o r is R. Which of the following
grap h s best show s how the mag nit u d e of the elect ric al field str e n g t h E
varies with dista n c e r from the cent r e of the sphe r e ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 7 . Which of the following gives the acc ele r a t io n of an elect r o n of elect ric
char g e e and mas s m in a unifor m elect ric field of stre n g t h E ?
A.
E
B.
Ee
C.
Ee
m
D.
m
Ee
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
547
36 8 . A particle, of mas s m and char g e q , moves with velocity v perp e n d i c ul a r ly
to a mag n e ti c field. The mag nit u d e of the mag n e ti c forc e acting on the
par ticl e at a par tic ul a r point is F. Which of the following gives the
mag ni t u d e of the mag n e ti c field str e n g t h at that point?
A.
F
q
B.
F
m
C.
F
ν
D.
F
qν
(Tot al 1 mar k )
36 9 . Which of the following decay sequ e n c e s would result in the daug h t e r
nucle u s having the sam e proto n num b e r as the par e n t nucle u s ?
A.
Alpha followed by gam m a
B.
Beta (β – ) followe d by gam m a
C.
Alpha followed by bet a (β –) followe d by beta (β –)
D.
Beta (β –) followed by gam m a followe d by gam m a
(Tot al 1 mar k )
12
37 0 . The differe n c e betw e e n the mas s of a 6 C nucle u s and the sum of the
mas s e s of the individu al nucleo n s is 0.1 u. Which of the following is
app r oxi m a t ely the bindin g ener gy of the nucle u s ?
A.
90 MeV
B.
90 MeV c –2
C.
8 MeV
D.
8 MeV c –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
548
37 1 . The proc es s by which a heavy nucle u s splits into two light e r nuclei is
known as
A.
fission.
B.
fusion.
C.
radioac tive decay.
D.
artificial (induc e d) tran s m u t a t i o n .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
37 2 . Which of the following cor r e c tly shows a rene w a bl e and a non- ren e w a bl e
sour c e of ener gy?
Ren e w a b l e
No n- ren e w a b l e
A.
oil
geot h e r m a l
B.
wind
biofuels
C.
ocea n waves
nucle a r
D.
nat u r al gas
coal
(Tot al 1 mar k )
37 3 . Critical mas s refer s to the amou n t of fissile mat e ri a l that
A.
will allow fission to be sust ai n e d .
B.
is equivale n t to 235 g of ura ni u m .
C.
will produ c e a growin g chain rea c tion.
D.
is the minim u m mass nece s s a r y for fission to take plac e.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
549
37 4 . The annu al variation s of solar powe r incide n t per unit are a at a partic ul a r
point on the Eart h’s surfac e is mainly due to the cha n g e in the
A.
dista n c e betw e e n the Ear t h and the Sun.
B.
angle at which the solar rays hit the surfa c e of the Eart h.
C.
aver a g e albedo of the Eart h.
D.
aver a g e cloud cover of the Eart h.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
550
37 5 . The wate r in a res er voir behind a da m drops from an initial height H 0
above a turbin e to prod u c e hydro el e c t r i city. At time t = T , h = 0.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the height h of the wat e r
above the tur bi n e.
Which of the following is a mea s u r e of the maxim u m theor e t i c a l elect ric
powe r availabl e?
A.
H 0 and the slope of the gra p h
B.
T and the slope of the grap h
C.
T and the are a unde r the gra p h
D.
H 0 and the are a und e r the gra p h
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
551
37 6 . Each squa r e met r e of the Sun’s surfac e emits S joules per secon d. The
radi us of the Sun is r, and the Sun is at a mea n dista n c e R from the Eart h.
Which of the following gives the solar powe r incide n t per unit are a of the
top layer of the Eart h’s atmo s p h e r e ?
A.
r
 S
 R
B.
r
  S
R
C.
 R
 S
r
D.
R
  S
r
2
2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
552
37 7 . The diagr a m shows a simple clima t e model for Ear t h. The tem p e r a t u r e of
the grou n d is T g and is ass u m e d to radia t e as a black body. The
tem p e r a t u r e of the atmos p h e r e is T a and has an emis sivity ε.
In the model, the intensi ty radia t e d from the groun d equ als the inte nsity
Tg
radi at e d from the atm os p h e r e towa r d s the grou n d. What is the ratio Ta ?
A.
ε4
B.
ε
C.
ε4
D.
1
1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
553
37 8 . Data analysis ques tion.
Gillian carrie d out an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the crat e r s form e d whe n
steel balls are dropp e d into sand. To try and find the relation s hi p betw e e n
the diam e t e r of the crat e r and the ene r gy of impac t of ste el balls of the
sam e diam e t e r , she dropp e d a ste el ball from differ e n t heigh t s h into sand
and mea s u r e d the res ultin g diam e t e r d of the crat e r . The data are show n
plott e d below.
(a)
The unce r t ai n t y in the mea s u r e m e n t of d is ±0. 4 0 cm; the unce r t a i n t y
in h is too small to be show n. Draw erro r bars for the data point (0.2,
0.047) and the dat a point (2.0, 0.10).
(2)
(b)
Draw a best- fit line for the data points.
(2)
(c)
The origin al hypot h e si s, ma d e by Gillian, was that the diam e t e r of the
crat e r is directly propo r tio n a l to the ene r gy of impa c t of the ste el
balls. Explain why the data does not suppo r t this hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
554
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
555
(d)
Since Gillian’s data did not suppo r t her hypot h e s i s, she res e a r c h e d to
find alter n a t iv e hypot h e s e s . She found that the r e are two theo ri e s
used to predict a relation s hi p betw e e n d and h . In orde r to find which
theor y is bes t suppo r t e d by the dat a, she proc e s s e d the data in two
sepa r a t e ways. The proce s s e d dat a are shown below.
(i)
Draw a line of best- fit on each gra p h.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
556
(ii)
Stat e and explain which theo ry is best suppo r t e d by the stud e n t’s
data.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
37 9 . This ques tion is abou t circula r motion and global war mi n g.
(a)
A car is travelling at const a n t spe e d of 18 m s –1 arou n d a horizon t a l
bend in the road.
The mas s of the car is 1.5 × 10 3 kg and the bend forms part of a circle
of radius
2.0 × 10 3 m.
(i)
Stat e why the car is accele r a ti n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the friction al forc e betw e e n the tyres of the car and
the surfac e of the roa d that prod u c e s the acc el e r a t io n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
557
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
558
(b)
It is sugg e s t e d that the use of fossil fuels to powe r car s has led to an
enha n c e m e n t of the gree n h o u s e effect.
(i)
Stat e the reas o n for this sugg e s t io n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Outline on e mech a ni s m by which the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e
effect may lead to an incr e a s e in global war mi n g .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
38 0 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e of pha s e of a liquid and late nt heat of
vaporiza tion.
(a)
Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n evapo r a t i o n and boiling with refe r e n c e
to
(i)
tem p e r a t u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
559
(ii)
surfac e area of a liquid.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
A liquid in a calori m e t e r is hea t e d at its boiling point for a mea s u r e d
period of time.
The following data are availa ble.
Power rating of heat e r
Time for which liquid is hea t e d at boiling point
10 2 s
Mass of liquid boiled away
10 –2 kg
= 15 W
= 4.5 ×
= 1.8 ×
Use the data to det e r m i n e the specific late nt hea t of vaporiz a tio n of
the liquid.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why the calcula tio n in (b) will give a
value of the specific laten t hea t of vaporiz a tion of the liquid tha t is
grea t e r than the true value.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
560
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
38 1 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels and the gre e n h o u s e effect.
(a)
Stat e two reas o n s why most of the world’s ene r gy cons u m p t i o n is
provide d by fossil fuels.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
561
(b)
A powe r station has an outpu t powe r of 500 MW and an over all
efficiency of 27 %.
It uses nat u r al gas as a fuel tha t has an ene r gy density of 56 MJ kg –1 .
(i)
Define ener g y densit y .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the rat e of cons u m p t i o n of nat u r a l gas in the powe r
station.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Outline why the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect may res ult in an incr e a s e
in the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
562
(d)
(i)
The solar inte nsity at the position of the Eart h is 1380
–2
W m . The aver a g e albe do of Eart h is 0.300. Sta t e why an
aver a g e value of albe d o is quot e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
563
(ii)
Show that the aver a g e reflec t e d inte n sity from the Eart h is about
100 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(e)
One of the expect e d res ult s of global war mi n g is an incre a s e d sea
level. The incre a s e in volum e ΔV for a tem p e r a t u r e incr e a s e ΔT is
given by ΔV = γV ΔT. Show, using the following dat a, that the res ultin g
rise in sea level is about 0.5 m.
Temp e r a t u r e incr e a s e = 2.0 °C
Surfa c e are a of ocea n s on Eart h
8
3.6 × 10 km
=
2
Avera g e ocea n dept h = 3.0 km
γ
= 8.8 × 10 –5 K–1
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
564
38 2 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay and bindin g ene r gy.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by radioa c tive decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A nucleu s of thallium- 206 (Tl-206) unde r g o e s radioa c tive dec ay to a
nucleu s of lead- 206 (Pb- 206). In the reac tio n equa tio n below, identify
the proton num b e r Z of lead and the par ticle x .
206
8 2T

β  x
206
Z P b
Z : .............................................................................................................
....................
x : .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
(c)
The mas s of a Tl-206 nucle u s is 191 870 MeV c –2 . Dete r mi n e the
binding ener gy per nucleo n of Tl-206.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
565
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
566
(d)
Stat e why the bindin g ene r gy of Pb- 206 is gre a t e r tha n tha t of Tl-206.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
38 3 . This ques tion is abou t oscillation s and waves.
(a)
A rect a n g u l a r piece of wood of lengt h l floats in wate r with its axis
vertical as show n in diagr a m 1.
The lengt h of wood below the surfa c e is d . The wood is pus h e d
vertically down w a r d s a dista n c e A such that a lengt h of wood is still
above the wate r surfac e as show n in diag r a m 2. The wood is the n
relea s e d and oscillat e s vertic ally. At the insta n t show n in diag r a m 3,
the wood is moving down w a r d s and the lengt h of wood bene a t h the
surfac e is d + x .
(i)
On diag r a m 3, draw an arrow to show the direc tion of the
accele r a ti o n of the wood.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
567
(ii)
The accel e r a t io n a of the wood (in m s –2 ) is relat e d to x (in m) by
the following equ atio n.

a =
14
x
l
Explain why this equ a tio n show s that the wood is exec u ti n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The period of oscillation of the wood is 1.4 s. Show tha t the
lengt h l of the wood is 0.70 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
568
(b)
The wood in (a), as show n in diagr a m 2, is rele a s e d at time t = 0. On
the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the velocity v of the wood
varies with time over one period of oscillation.
(1)
(c)
The dist an c e A that the wood is initially pus h e d down is 0.12 m.
(i)
Calculat e the magni t u d e of the maxim u m accele r a ti o n of the
wood.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
On your sketc h gra p h in (b) label with the lette r P one point
wher e the mag nit u d e of the accel e r a ti o n is a maxim u m .
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
569
(d)
The oscillations of the wood gen e r a t e waves in the wat e r of
wavelen g t h 0.45 m.
The grap h shows how the displa c e m e n t D, of the wate r surfa c e at a
particul a r dista n c e from the wood varies with time t .
Using the grap h, calcula t e the
(i)
spee d of the waves.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
ratio of the displac e m e n t at t = 1.75 s to the displa c e m e n t at t =
0.35 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
570
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
571
(iii) ratio of the ener gy of the wave at t = 1.75 s to the ene r gy at t =
0.35 s
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
38 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e and elect ric circ uit s.
(a)
Define resista n c e and stat e Ohm’s law.
Resist a n c e: ..............................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Ohm’s
law: .................................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A resis to r mad e from a met al oxide has a resist a n c e of 1.5 Ω. The
resisto r is in the form of a cylinde r of lengt h 2.2 × 10 –2 m and radius
1.2 × 10 –3 m. Calcula t e the resistivity of the met al oxide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (b) gua r a n t e e s its resis t a n c e to be
IB Questionbank Physics
572
within ±1 0 % of 1.5 Ω provide d the powe r dissip a tio n in the resis to r
does not excee d 1.0 W. Calcula t e th e maxim u m curr e n t in the resis to r
for the power dissipa tion to be equal to 1.0 W.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
573
(d)
The resi stan c e of each of the resis to r s in the circ uit below is mea s u r e d
to be 1.5 Ω with an accu r a c y of ±1 0 %.
The cell has an emf of 2.0 V and negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .
(i)
Define emf .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the minim u m and the maxim u m powe r that could be
dissipa t e d in this circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
574
IB Questionbank Physics
575
38 5 . This ques tion is abou t mom e n t u m , ene r gy and powe r.
(a)
In his Principia Math e m a t i c a Newt o n expr e s s e d his third law of
motion as “to every action the r e is always oppos e d an equ al rea c tion”.
Stat e what New to n mean t by this law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
A book is relea s e d from rest and falls towa r d s the surfa c e of Eart h.
Discus s how the cons e rv a t io n of mom e n t u m applies to the Eart h- book
syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
576
(c)
A larg e swingin g ball is use d to drive a horizon t al iron spike into a
vertical wall. The cent r e of the ball falls thro u g h a vertic al height of
1.6 m befor e striking the spike in the position show n.
The mas s of the ball is 3.5 kg and the mas s of the spike is 0.80 kg.
Imm e di a t ely after striking the spike, the ball and spike move toge t h e r .
Show that the
(i)
spee d of the ball on striking the spike is 5.6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
ene r gy dissip at e d as a res ult of the collision is abou t 10 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
577
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
578
(d)
As a result of the ball striking the spike, the spike is drive n a dista n c e
7.3 × 10 –2 m into the wall. Calcula t e , ass u m i n g it to be const a n t , the
friction force F betw e e n the spike and wall.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e)
The machin e that is used to rais e the ball has a useful powe r outp u t of
18 W. Calculat e how long it take s for the mac hi n e to raise the ball
throu g h a height of 1.6 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
38 6 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c and gravit a tio n a l fields
(a)
Stat e, in ter m s of elect r o n s , the differ e n c e betw e e n a cond u c t o r and
an insulat o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
579
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
580
(b)
Sugg e s t why ther e mus t be an elect ric field inside a cur r e n t- carryin g
cond u c t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h inside a condu c t o r is 55 N
C –1 . Calculat e the force on a free elect r o n in the cond uc t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
The elect ric force betw e e n two point cha r g e s is a funda m e n t a l forc e
as is the gravit ation al forc e betw e e n two point mas s e s . Sta t e on e
similarity betw e e n thes e two force s and on e differ e n c e (othe r than
the fact that one applies to cha r g e and the othe r to mas s).
Similari ty: ...............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Differ e n c e: ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(e)
The force on a mas s of 1.0 kg falling freely nea r the surfa c e of Jupite r
IB Questionbank Physics
581
is 25 N. The radius of Jupite r is 7.0 × 10 7 m.
(i)
Stat e the value of the ma gni t u d e of the gravit a tion a l field
str e n g t h at the surfac e of Jupite r.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
582
(ii)
Calculat e that the mas s of Jupite r is about 1.8 × 10 27 kg.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
38 7 . This ques tion is abou t vision and the eye.
(a)
Stat e on e function of
(i)
cone cells.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
rod cells.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Descri b e the distri b u tio n of cone and rod cells on the retin a.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
583
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
584
(c)
An object is to be viewed in very dim light. With refe r e n c e to your
ans w e r to (b) explain why the objec t is most clea rly see n whe n looke d
at sidew ay s rat h e r than direc tly.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
38 8 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s.
A string that is fixed at both ends is mad e to vibra t e in the funda m e n t a l
(first har m o nic) mode.
The fixed ends of the string are at x = 0 and x = L .
Each point on the string oscillat e s in simple har m o ni c motion. The
displac e m e n t y of the string at a point x at time t is given by the equ a tio n
y = A cos(50 0 π t )
 πx 
 
wher e A = 12sin  2  .
In thes e form ul a e x is in met r e s and t is in secon d s . Using this equ a tio n,
(a)
explain why the amplitu d e of the sta n di n g wave is not cons t a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
585
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
586
(b)
calculat e the frequ e n c y of the stan di n g wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
show that L = 2.0 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
38 9 . This ques tion is abou t diffrac tio n and resolution.
(a)
Light from a monoc h r o m a t i c point sour c e S 1 is incide n t on a nar r o w
rect a n g ul a r slit.
IB Questionbank Physics
587
After pas sin g thro u g h the slit, the light is incide n t on a scre e n som e
dista n c e away from the slit. The gra p h shows how the inte nsi ty
distrib u tio n on the scre e n varies with the angle θ show n in the
diagr a m .
(i)
The width of the slit is 4.0 × 10 –4 m. Use dat a from the gra p h to
calcula t e the wavel en g t h of the light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
588
(ii)
An identical sour c e S 2 is plac e d close to S 1 as show n.
The imag e s of the two sourc e s on the scre e n are just resolve d
accor di n g to the Rayleigh crit e rio n. On the gra p h above, dra w
the inten sity distri b u tio n of the secon d sour c e .
(1)
(b)
The Very Larg e Array (VLA) is use d to analys e radio signals from
dista n t galaxies.
The combi n e d diam e t e r of the VLA is 36 km. A region of linea r size L
inside the radio galaxy M87 emits radio wave s with a frequ e n c y of 43
GHz. The galaxy is a dista n c e
4.7 × 10 23 m from Ear t h. The VLA can just resolve the radio emittin g
region.
Estim a t e the value of L .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
589
39 0 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.
(a)
A bea m of unpola riz e d light of inte nsity I 0 is incide n t on a polariz e r .
The polarizatio n axis of the pola riz e r is initially vertic al as show n.
The polarizer is then rota t e d by 180° in the direc tio n show n. On the
axes below, sketc h a grap h to show the varia tio n with the rotatio n
angle θ, of the tran s mi t t e d light inte n sity I, as θ varies from 0° to
180°. Label your sketc h- gra p h with the lette r U.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
590
(b)
The bea m in (a) is now repla c e d with a polariz e d bea m of light of the
sam e inten si ty.
The plane of polarizatio n of the light is initially par allel to the
polariza tio n axis of the pola riz e r.
The polarizer is then rota t e d by 180° in the direc tio n show n. On the
sam e axes in (a), sketc h a gra p h to show the variatio n with the
rotation angle θ, of the tra n s mi t t e d light inte n sity I, as θ varies from
0° to 180°. Label your sketc h- gra p h with the lette r P.
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
39 1 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.
(a)
In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are emitt e d from a met al surfa c e
almost imm edi at ely after light is incide n t on the surfa c e, i.e. withou t
any time delay. Explain this obse r v a tio n with refe r e n c e to Einst ei n’s
theor y of the photoel e c t r i c effect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
591
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with incide n t light freq u e n c y f of the
maxim u m kinetic ene r gy E K of the emitt e d elect r o n s .
Use the grap h to
(i)
estim a t e the work function of the met al surfa c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
calcula t e the maxim u m spe e d of the emitt e d elect r o n s for
incide n t light of frequ e n c y 5.0 × 10 15 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
592
IB Questionbank Physics
593
39 2 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .
(a)
The ene r gy of elect r o n s in atom s is said to be qua n tiz e d. Stat e wha t is
mea n t by qua n tize d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
An elect r o n that is confine d to move in a region of lengt h L can only
have ener gi e s given by the equ a tio n
h2n2
2
E n = 8πm L
whe r e n is a positive integ e r .
For L = 1.0 × 10 –10 m, use the equa tio n above to
(i)
calcula t e that the smalle s t differ e n c e betw e e n the allowe d
ene r gi e s of the elect r o n is 5.8 × 10 –18 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
det e r m i n e the wavele n g t h of the photon whos e ene r gy is 5.8 ×
10 –18 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
594
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
595
(c)
Part of the emission spect r u m of hydro g e n is show n in the diag r a m .
Sugg e s t whet h e r this spec t r u m can be explain e d by the model in (b).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
39 3 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
(a)
The decay const a n t for a par tic ul a r isotop e is λ = 0.048 s –1 . A sam pl e
of the isotop e initially cont ai n s 2.0 × 10 12 nuclei of this isotop e.
(i)
Define decay cons ta n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Estim a t e the num b e r of nuclei that will dec ay in the first secon d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
596
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with time t of the activity A of a sam pl e
cont ai nin g radioac tive mat e ri al that consis t s of two differe n t isotop e s .
Each isotop e decays into a stabl e daug h t e r isotop e .
(i)
Use the grap h to explain how it may be dedu c e d that the sa m pl e
cont ai n s mor e than one isotop e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
597
(ii)
One of the isotop e s in the sam pl e has a half- life tha t is shor t e r
than 0.20 s. Use the gra p h to estim a t e the half- life of the othe r
isotop e. Explain your workin g.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
39 4 . This ques tion is abou t char g e- couple d device s (CCDs).
(a)
Light from an object that is incide n t on the pixels of a CCD gives rise
to pote n ti al differ e n c e s acros s the pixels. Outline how the s e pote n ti al
differ e n c e s are used to prod u c e an imag e of the object.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The CCD of a partic ul a r digital cam e r a has 5.0 × 10 6 pixels and a
collectin g are a of 22 mm 2 . Light of inte n si ty 1.4 W m –2 is incide n t on
the collectin g are a of the CCD for a time of 85 ms. The aver a g e ene r gy
of the photon s of the incide n t light is 3.6 × 10 –19 J.
The quan t u m efficiency of the CCD is 75 %.
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by qua n t u m efficiency.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
598
(ii)
Show that the num b e r of photon s incide n t on on e pixel of the
CCD in the time interv al of 85 ms is appr oxi m a t e ly 1.5 × 10 6 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) The capa cit a n c e of a pixel of the CCD is 12 pF. Show tha t the
poten ti al differ e n c e est a blis h e d acros s the pixel is appr oxi m a t e ly
15 mV.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
The voltag e in (b)(iii) is digitize d into a four bit bina ry num b e r .
Dete r mi n e the bina ry equivale n t of this volta g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
CCDs dete c ti n g X-rays are now use d in medic al diagno si s. Stat e the
adva n t a g e to the patien t of an X-ray CCD det e c t o r with high qua n t u m
efficiency.
IB Questionbank Physics
599
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
600
39 5 . This ques tion is abou t the mobile phone syste m .
In the mobile phon e syste m , a partic ul a r geog r a p h i c are a is divide d into a
num b e r of cells with a base station in eac h cell, eac h conn e c t e d to a
cellula r exch a n g e .
Describ e the function of the bas e sta tion s and the cellula r excha n g e .
Base
stations : ...................................................................................................
......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
Cellula r
exch a n g e : ................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
39 6 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.
(a)
On the axes below draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
input voltag e V in of the outpu t volta g e V out of a non- inverti n g
oper a ti o n al amplifier.
IB Questionbank Physics
601
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
602
(b)
A tem p e r a t u r e war nin g devic e make s use of a buzze r tha t sound s
whe n the poten ti al differe n c e acros s it is 24 V. The circ uit in the
war ni n g device is show n.
It is requi r e d that the buzze r should sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e of
the ther m i s t o r rises above 50 °C.
(i)
Stat e the voltag e at point Q.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
At a tem p e r a t u r e of 50 °C the resist a n c e of the the r m i s t o r is R .
Explain why the buzze r will sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e rise s
above 50 °C.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
603
39 7 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by prope r lengt h and prop e r time inte rv al.
Prope r
lengt h: .............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Prope r time
interv al: ...........................................................................................
........
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A space s hi p moves with spe e d v = 0.600 c relative to a spa c e sta tion.
Two laser s , A and B, on the spac e station are 5.00 m apa r t as
mea s u r e d by the space station obse rv e r s . The ga m m a factor for a
spee d of v = 0.600 c is γ =1. 2 5.
(i)
A radio signal is sent to the spac e s hi p from the spac e sta tion. The
tran s mi s s io n lasts for 6.00 s accor di n g to spa c e station clocks.
Calculat e the dur atio n of the tra n s m i s sio n accor di n g to the
spac e s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
604
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
605
(ii)
Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the laser s A and B accor di n g to
the space s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
The laser s in (b) are fired si m u l t a n e o u s l y accor di n g to the spa c e
stat i o n obse rv e r s .
Light from each laser make s a ma rk on the spac e s hi p. The spac e s hi p
obse rv e r s mea s u r e the dista n c e betw e e n the two ma rk s to be 6.25 m.
Accordi n g to the space s hi p obse rv e r s
(i)
stat e which laser was fired first.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
det e r m i n e the differ e n c e in time betw e e n the firings of the two
laser s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
39 8 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.
The table below gives the elect ric cha r g e of the thr e e light e s t qua r k s in
ter m s of e , the char g e of the proton.
IB Questionbank Physics
606
Quark flavo u r
Elec t r i c
ch ar g e / e
IB Questionbank Physics
up
u
2
3
down
d

1
3
str a n g e
s

1
3
607
(a)
Using the dat a in the table, dete r m i n e the
(i)
quar k conte n t of a meson with cha r g e +1 and str a n g e n e s s 0 and
that of a baryon with cha r g e –1 and str a n g e n e s s –3.
Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................
Baryon: ............................................................................................
.................
(2)
(ii)
possible spin values of the meson in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
3
Explain how the baryon with qua r k cont e n t uuu and spin 2 does not
violate the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
In the Feyn m a n diagr a m show n a blue down qua r k emits a gluon and
prod u c e s a red qua r k.
IB Questionbank Physics
608
IB Questionbank Physics
609
Deduc e the
(i)
quar k flavour (type) of the prod u c e d qua r k.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
colour quan t u m num b e r s of the emitt e d gluon.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(e)
The positive kaon K + (qua r k cont e n t u s ) dec ays into an anti- muon and
a neut ri no accor di n g to the rea c tion below.
K+ → µ + + ν
Explain how it may be dedu c e d that this dec ay is a weak inter a c ti o n
proce s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
610
(f)
The diagr a m shows thre e of the inter a c ti o n vertic e s for the wea k
inter a c ti o n.
Using the app r o p r i a t e vert ex, dra w a Feyn m a n diag r a m for the dec ay
K + → µ + + ν labelling all particl e s involve d.
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
611
39 9 . This ques tion is abou t the luminosity, size and dista n c e of star s.
The Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s ell (HR) diag r a m shows the varia tion with spec t r a l
class of the absolut e mag ni t u d e of sta r s .
The star Capella and the Sun are in the sa m e spec t r a l class (G). Using the
HR diag r a m ,
(a)
(i)
the Sun.
sugg e s t why Capella has a gre a t e r surfa c e are a than
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
612
(ii)
estim a t e the luminosity of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) calcula t e the radius of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
The spect r o s c o pi c par allax meth o d can be use d to me a s u r e the
dista n c e of star Vega.
(i)
Using the HR diagr a m , sta t e the absolut e mag nit u d e of Vega.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
The app a r e n t mag nit u d e of Vega is 0.0. Dete r mi n e (in pars e c ) the
dist a n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
613
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
614
(iii) Light from Vega is abso r b e d by a dust cloud betw e e n Vega and
Eart h. Sugg e s t the effect, if any, this will have on dete r m i ni n g
the dista n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Vega is a very massive sta r. Sta t e why Vega does not und e r g o
gravit atio n al collaps e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
40 0 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n (CMB) and
the density of the univer s e.
The gra p h shows the relative inte nsity of the CMB as a function of
wavele n g t h .
IB Questionbank Physics
615
(a)
Explain how this grap h is consist e n t with the Big Bang model of the
univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
The density of the univer s e will det e r m i n e its ultim a t e fate. Outline
the proble m s associa t e d with dete r m i ni n g the density of the unive r s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
616
40 1 . A cart of mas s M is on a horizont a l frictionle s s table.
The cart is conn ec t e d to an object of weigh t W via a pulley. Which of the
following is the accel er a ti o n of the cart?
A.
W
M
g
W
W
B.
W
M
g
C.
Mg
W
D.
0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 2 . An ideal gas has pres s u r e p 0 and volum e V 0 . The num b e r of molec ul e s of
the gas is doubl ed withou t chan gi n g the tem p e r a t u r e . What is the new
value of pres s u r e times volum e ?
A.
p 0V 0
4
B.
p 0V 0
2
C.
p 0V0
D.
2 p 0V0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
617
40 3 . The diagr a m shows the pres s u r e–vol u m e (PV ) rela tion s hi p for a gas.
Which of the following area(s) is/ar e equal to the work done by the gas as it
expa n d s ?
A.
are a I
B.
are a II
C.
are a I + are a II
D.
are a I – are a II
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 4 . The shock abso r b e r s of a car, in good working condition, ens u r e that the
vertical oscillations of the car are
A.
und a m p e d .
B.
lightly dam p e d .
C.
moder a t e ly dam p e d .
D.
critically dam p e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
618
40 5 . An orga n pipe of lengt h L is ope n at one end and close d at the othe r . Which
of the following gives the wavele n g t h of the secon d har m o nic sta n di n g
wave in the pipe?
A.
L
2
B.
L
C.
4L
D.
4L
3
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 6 . A man stan di n g by the shor e obs e rv e s sea wave s appr o a c h i n g at a
frequ e n c y of 0.20 Hz. A man on a boat obse r v e s tha t wave s are
app r o a c hi n g the boat at a frequ e n c y of 0.50 Hz. The spe e d of the wave s is
2.0 m s –1 . Which of the following gives a possible value for the spe e d of the
boat and its directio n?
Sp e e d / m s –1
Dire c t i o n
A.
3.0
away from the
shor e
B.
3.0
towa r d s the shor e
C.
1.2
away from the
shor e
D.
1.2
towa r d s the shor e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 7 . In a monoch r o m a t i c liquid cryst al display (LCD), suc h as thos e use d in
calcula t o r s , the pur po s e of the liquid cryst al is to
A.
chan g e colour from white to black whe n a seg m e n t is to be displaye d.
B.
lubrica t e the small gap betw e e n the plat e s to preve n t over h e a ti n g .
C.
rotat e the plan e of polariz a tio n of the light pas si ng throu g h it.
D.
act as a cond u c ti n g pat h w a y betw e e n the segm e n t elect r o d e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
619
40 8 . A par allel bea m of light with a wavele n g t h 600 nm pass e s throu g h a single
nar r o w slit and forms a diffraction patt e r n on a scre e n. The angle at which
the first diffractio n minim u m is form e d is 2.0 × 10 –3 rad.
What would be the angle of the first diffrac tion minim u m for light of
wavele n g t h 400 nm?
A.
3.0 × 10 –3 rad
B.
2.0 × 10 –3 rad
C.
1.3 × 10 –3 rad
D.
1.2 × 10 –3 rad
(Tot al 1 mar k )
40 9 . The gra p h shows how the cur r e n t I in a resis to r varies with the volta g e V
applied acros s it.
Which of the following gives the resist a n c e of the resis to r, whe n I = I 1 ?
A.
V1
I1
B.
The slope of the curve at the point (V 1 , I 1 )
C.
I1
V1
D.
The inver s e of the slope of the curve at the point ( V 1 , I 1 )
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
620
41 0 . Two 10 Ω resis to r s are conn e c t e d as show n.
What is the resist a n c e acros s PQ?
A.
0 Ω
B.
5 Ω
C.
10 Ω
D.
20 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 1 . A unifor m mag n e t i c field is per p e n di c ul a r to the plane of a loop of
condu c ti n g wire.
The field is direct e d out of the plan e of pape r. The ma g nit u d e of the
mag n e ti c field is decr e a s i n g at a cons t a n t rat e. Which of the following gives
the corr e c t stat e and corr e c t dire c tio n of the cur r e n t in the wire?
Curre n t
Dire c t i o n
A.
varying
clockwis e
B.
const a n t
clockwis e
C.
varying
count e rclockwis e
D.
const a n t
count e rclockwis e
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
621
41 2 . The gra p h shows th e variation of the induc e d emf ε of a gene r a t o r as a
function of time.
IB Questionbank Physics
622
The frequ e n cy of rotation of the gene r a t o r is halve d. Which of the following
grap h s corr e c tly shows the variation of the new induc e d emf ε as a function
of time?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
623
41 3 . Which of the following is true about gravit a tion a l field lines?
A.
They are always tang e n t i al to equipo t e n ti a l surfa c e s .
B.
They are always perp e n di c ul a r to equipo t e n t i al surfa c e s .
C.
They can be both tang e n ti al or per p e n d i c ul a r to equipot e n t i al
surfac e s .
D.
They can have any angle to the equipot e n t i al surfa c e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 4 . Which of the following is true about the gravit a tion a l pote n ti al V due to a
point mass at a dista n c e r from the point mas s?
A.
B.

1
r and always positive

1
r and always neg ative
V
V

C.
V

D.
V
1
r 2 and always positive
1
r 2 and always positive
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 5 . An astro n a u t in orbit arou n d Eart h is said to be “weightl e s s ”. This is due to
the fact that the
A.
gravit atio n al force on the astr o n a u t is zero.
B.
ast ro n a u t and the spac e c r a f t expe ri e n c e the sa m e accel e r a t io n.
C.
ast ro n a u t and the spac e c r a f t expe ri e n c e the sa m e gravit a tio n a l force.
D.
gravit atio n al field at the position of the spa c e c r a f t is zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
624
41 6 . Which of the following decay sequ e n c e s would result in the daug h t e r
nucle u s having the sam e proto n num b e r as the par e n t nucle u s ?
A.
Alpha followed by gam m a
B.
Beta (β –) followed by gam m a
C.
Alpha followed by bet a (β –) followe d by beta (β –)
D.
Beta (β –) followed by gam m a followe d by gam m a
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 7 . A radioac tive sour c e emits alpha par ticle s that the n travel throu g h air.
With refer e n c e to the rang e of the alpha par ticle s consid e r the following
thre e qua n ti ti es .
I.
The char g e of the alph a par ticl e
II.
The kinetic ener gy of the alpha par ticle
III.
The density of the air
Which of the above dete r m i n e s the rang e of the alpha par ticle s?
A.
I only
B.
II only
C.
I and II only
D.
I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
41 8 . Photoel e ct r o n emission only occur s if the light incide n t on a met al surfa c e
is
A.
coher e n t .
B.
above a cert ai n minim u m inte nsi ty.
C.
below a cert ai n minim u m frequ e n c y.
D.
below a cert ai n minim u m wavel e n g t h .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
625
41 9 . Elect r o n s are accel e r a ti n g from rest thro u g h a pot e n ti al differ e n c e of V .
The de Broglie wavelen g t h λ of the elect r o n s is propo r tio n a l to which of the
following?
A.
V
B.
1
V
C.
V
1
D.
V
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 0 . The diagr a m shows som e of the ene r gy levels of a hypot h e t ic al atom.
The atom is excite d to the ene r gy level n = 4. Which of the following
tran si tion s will prod u c e a photo n of the longe s t and the short e s t
wavele n g t h ?
Lon g e s t
wav el e n g t h
Sh or t e s t
wave l e n g t h
A.
4 →3
4 →1
B.
4 →1
4 →3
C.
2 →1
4 →3
D.
4 →3
2 →1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
626
42 1 . In the Schr ö di n g e r model of the hydro g e n atom, it is ass u m e d tha t
elect r o n s
A.
are mas sl es s par ticles.
B.
are waves.
C.
oscillat e.
D.
can be descri b e d by wave functions .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 2 . The ener gy of α-par ticles in α-dec ay and the ene r gy of γ-rays in γ-dec ay are
discr e t e . This provide s evide n c e for the existe n c e of
A.
nuclea r ener gy levels.
B.
neut ri n o s.
C.
atomic ene r gy levels.
D.
isotop e s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
627
42 3 . The gra p h below shows the num b e r of nuclei N of a radioa c tive isotop e as a
function of time t .
The slope of the curve at any given time is
A.
indep e n d e n t of the decay const a n t .
B.
propo r tio n al to the half- life of the isotop e.
C.
propo r tio n al to the num b e r of radioa c tive nuclei re m ai ni n g at that
time.
D.
propo r tio n al to the num b e r of radioa c tive nuclei dec ay e d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
628
42 4 . Worldwi d e, the use of gas powe r e d tur bi n e s is beco mi n g more com m o n
than the use of oil powe r e d turbi n e s . A stud e n t mak e s the following thr e e
stat e m e n t s about gas powe r e d turbin e s as comp a r e d to oil powe r e d
turbin e s .
I.
They are mor e efficient.
II.
They prod u c e mor e the r m a l ene r gy per unit of mass.
III.
They prod u c e less CO 2 per unit of outp u t ene r gy.
Which stat e m e n t ( s ) could be a possible reas o n for favourin g gas powe r e d
turbin e s ?
A.
I only
B.
II only
C.
I and II only
D.
I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 5 . To ret riev e infor m a ti o n stor e d on a CD, light of wavele n g t h 800 nm is use d.
To ret riev e infor m a ti o n stor e d on a DVD, light of wavele n g t h 400 nm is
used.
p it h e ig hof
t t h eCD
Which of the following gives the ratio p it h e ig hot f t h eDVD ?
A.
8
B.
2
C.
1
D.
0.5
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
629
426.
N photo n s are incide n t on a pixel of a CCD. Each photon caus e s one
elect r o n of char g e e to be emitt e d . The capa ci t a n c e of the pixel is C. What
is the res ultin g poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel?
A.
NeC
B.
C
Ne
C.
Ne
C
D.
Ce
N
(Tot al 1 mar k )
42 7 . The linear mag nificatio n of a digital cam e r a is M . The lengt h of one side of
a pixel is l. A pictur e of two points of an object sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e D is
take n.
MD
l is
The imag e s of the points will be resolve d on the CCD if the ratio
A.
smaller than 1.
B.
equal to 1.
C.
equal to 2 or mor e.
D.
at least 10 or more.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
630
42 8 . Data analysis ques tion.
Gillian carrie d out an experi m e n t to inves tig a t e the crat e r s form e d whe n
steel balls are dropp e d into sand. To try and find the relation s hi p betw e e n
the diam e t e r of the crat e r and the ene r gy of impac t of ste el balls of the
sam e diam e t e r , she dropp e d a ste el ball from differ e n t heigh t s h into sand
and mea s u r e d the res ultin g diam e t e r d of the crat e r . The data are show n
plott e d below.
(a)
The unce r t ai n t y in the mea s u r e m e n t of d is ±0. 4 0 cm; the unce r t a i n t y
in h is too small to be show n. Draw erro r bars for the data point (0.2,
0.047) and the dat a point (2.0, 0.10).
(2)
(b)
Draw a best- fit line for the data points.
(2)
(c)
The origin al hypot h e si s, ma d e by Gillian, was that the diam e t e r of the
crat e r is directly propo r tio n a l to the ene r gy of impa c t of the ste el
balls. Explain why the data does not suppo r t this hypot h e si s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
631
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
632
(d)
Since Gillian’s data did not suppo r t her hypot h e s i s, she res e a r c h e d to
find alter n a t iv e hypot h e s e s . She found that the r e are two theo ri e s
used to predict a relation s hi p betw e e n d and h .
1
3
Theory 1 predict s that d = cons t (h) and theory 2 pre dic t s that d =
1
4
const (h) .
In orde r to test which theo ry her dat a suppo r t s , she plott e d a gra p h of
lg( d ) again s t lg( h ).
The plot produ c e d a straig h t line tha t could be dra w n throu g h all the
erro r bar s.
IB Questionbank Physics
633
The grap h includ es the lines of maxim u m and minim u m gra di e n t s
bas e d on the first erro r bar for the first non- zero dat a point and the
last error bar. The last error bar is too small to be show n. Sta t e and
explain if the original data suppo r t theory 1 or theor y 2.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
42 9 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay and bindin g ene r gy.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by radioa c tive decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A nucleu s of potas si u m- 40 (K-40) unde r g o e s radioa c tive dec ay to a
IB Questionbank Physics
634
nucleu s of argon- 40 (Ar- 40). In the reac tio n equa tio n below, identify
the proton num b e r Z of argon and the particle x .
40
19K
 4Z0 Ar β  x
Z : .............................................................................................................
....................
x : .............................................................................................................
....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
635
(c)
The mas s of a K-40 nucleu s is 37 216 MeV c –2 . Dete r m i n e the bindin g
ener gy per nucleon of K-40.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(d)
Stat e why the bindin g ene r gy of Ar-40 is gre a t e r tha n that of K-40.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
43 0 . This ques tion is abou t chan g e of pha s e of a liquid and late nt heat of
vaporiza tion.
(a)
Stat e the differ e n c e betw e e n evapo r a t i o n and boiling with refe r e n c e
to
(i)
tem p e r a t u r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
636
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
637
(ii)
surfac e area of a liquid.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
A liquid in a calori m e t e r is hea t e d at its boiling point for a mea s u r e d
period of time.
The following data are availa ble.
Power rating of heat e r
Time for which liquid is hea t e d at boiling point
10 2 s
Mass of liquid boiled away
10 –2 kg
= 15 W
= 4.5 ×
= 1.8 ×
Use the data to det e r m i n e the specific late nt hea t of vaporiz a tio n of
the liquid.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Stat e and explain on e rea s o n why the calcula tio n in (b) will give a
value of the specific laten t hea t of vaporiz a tion of the liquid tha t is
grea t e r than the true value.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
638
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
639
43 1 . This ques tion is abou t induc e d emf and tra nsfo r m e r s .
(a)
One of the coils of a par tic ul a r tra n sfor m e r is conn e c t e d in serie s with
a switch and a batt e r y. The coil has low resis t a n c e . On closing the
switch it is obs erv e d that the curr e n t take s a cert ai n amou n t of time to
reac h its final const a n t value. Explain this obs e rv a ti o n with refe r e n c e
to Far a d ay’s law and Lenz’s law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
In a particul a r powe r station the volta g e gen e r a t e d is step p e d up by a
tran sfo r m e r .
The root mea n squa r e volta g e is incr e a s e d by a factor of 2 × 10 3 . The
outpu t power of the tran sfor m e r is tra n s m i t t e d to a town by cable s.
(i)
Outline what is mea n t by the root me a n squa r e value of a timevarying voltag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Stat e the best estim a t e for the factor by which the powe r loss in
the cables is redu c e d as a res ult of step pi n g up the volta g e.
IB Questionbank Physics
640
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
641
43 2 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s.
(a)
Stat e two prop e r t i e s of a sta n di n g (station a r y) wave.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m shows an orga n pipe that is open at one end.
The lengt h of the pipe is l. The frequ e n c y of the funda m e n t a l (first
har m o ni c) note emitt e d by the pipe is 16 Hz.
(i)
On the diagr a m , label with the lette r P the position along the
pipe whe r e the amplitu d e of oscillation of the air molec ul e s is the
large s t .
(1)
(ii)
The spee d of sound in the air in the pipe is 330 m s –1 . Calcula t e
the lengt h l.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
642
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
643
(c)
Use your answ e r to (b)(ii) to sugg e s t why it is bett e r to use orga n
pipes that are closed at one end for produ ci n g low frequ e n c y note s
rat h e r than pipes that are open at both ends.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
43 3 . This ques tion is abou t polarized light.
(a)
Disting ui s h betw e e n polariz e d and unpol a riz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
644
(b)
A bea m of plan e polarized light of inte n sity I 0 is incide n t on an
analys e r . The directio n of the bea m is at right angle s to the plan e of
the analys e r .
The angle betw e e n the tra n s m i s sio n axis of the analys e r and the plan e
of polarizatio n of the light is θ. In the position show n the tra ns m i s sio n
axis of the analys e r is par allel to the plane of polariz a tion of the light
(θ = 0).
On the axes, sketc h a grap h to show how the inte nsity I of the
tran s m i t t e d light varies with θ as the analys e r is rotat e d throu g h 180°.
(2)
(Tota l 4 mark s )
43 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c a l resist a n c e .
(a)
Stat e, in ter m s of elect r o n s , the differ e n c e betw e e n a cond u c t o r and
an insulat o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
645
(b)
Sugg e s t why ther e mus t be an elect ric field inside a cur r e n t- carryin g
cond u c t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h inside a condu c t o r is 55 N
C –1 . Calculat e the force on a free elect r o n in the cond uc t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
Define resista n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e)
A resis to r mad e from a met al oxide has a resis t a n c e of 1.5 Ω. The
resisto r is in the form of a cylinde r of lengt h 2.2 × 10 –2 m and radius
1.2 × 10 –3 m. Calcula t e the resistivity of the met al oxide.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
646
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
647
(f)
The man uf a c t u r e r of the resisto r in (e) gua r a n t e e s its resist a n c e to be
within ±1 0 % of 1.5 Ω provide d the powe r dissip a tio n in the resis to r
does not excee d 1.0 W. Calcula t e th e maxim u m curr e n t in the resis to r
for the power dissipa tion to be equal to 1.0 W.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(g)
Thre e of the resisto r s in (f) are conn e c t e d in the circuit below.
The cell has an emf of 2.0 V and negligible inte r n a l resist a n c e .
(i)
Define emf .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
648
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the minim u m and the maxim u m powe r that could be
dissipa t e d in this circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
43 5 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
(a)
The alpha particle s prod u c e d in alpha dec ay have discr e t e ene r gi e s .
Sugg e s t how this obs erv a ti o n provide s evide n c e for the existe n c e of
nuclea r ener gy levels.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A nucleu s of the isotop e fluorin e- 18 decays into a nucle u s of oxyge n18 by the emission of a positro n and neut ri n o. Outline how the natu r e
of the β-decay ener gy spect r u m o f fluorine- 18 sugg e s t s the exist e n c e
of the neut ri n o involved in the decay.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
649
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
650
(c)
A freshly prep a r e d sam pl e of fluorine- 18 has an activity of 1.12 MBq.
Its activity four hour s late r is 0.246 MBq.
(i)
Show that the decay const a n t for fluorin e- 18 is 0.379 hr –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Calculat e the half- life of fluorine- 18.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d)
The ene r gy of a beta par ticle in the dec ay of the sa m pl e in (c) is 8.4 ×
10 –15 J. Show that the de Broglie wavele n g t h of this particle is 5.3 ×
10 –12 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
651
43 6 . This ques tion is abou t oscillation s and waves.
(a)
A rect a n g u l a r piece of wood of lengt h l floats in wate r with its axis
vertical as show n in diagr a m 1.
The lengt h of wood below the surfa c e is d . The wood is pus h e d
vertically down w a r d s a dista n c e A such that a lengt h of wood is still
above the wate r surfac e as show n in diag r a m 2. The wood is the n
relea s e d and oscillat e s vertic ally. At the insta n t show n in diag r a m 3,
the wood is moving down w a r d s and the lengt h of wood bene a t h the
surfac e is d + x .
(i)
On diag r a m 3, draw an arrow to show the direc tion of the
accele r a ti o n of the wood.
(1)
(ii)
The accel e r a t io n a of the wood (in m s –2 ) is relat e d to x (in m) by
the following equ atio n.

a =
14
x
l
Explain why this equ a tio n show s that the wood is exec u ti n g
simpl e har m o ni c motion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
652
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) The period of oscillation of the wood is 1.4 s. Show tha t the
lengt h l of the wood is 0.70 m.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b)
The wood in (a), as show n in diagr a m 2, is rele a s e d at time t = 0. On
the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the velocity v of the wood
varies with time over one period of oscillation.
(1)
(c)
The dist an c e A that the wood is initially pus h e d down is 0.12 m.
(i)
Calculat e the magni t u d e of the maxim u m accele r a ti o n of the
wood.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
653
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
On your sketc h grap h in (b) label with the lette r P one point whe r e the
magni t u d e of the accele r a t i o n is a maxim u m .
(1)
(d)
The oscillations of the wood gen e r a t e waves in the wat e r of
wavelen g t h 0.45 m.
The grap h shows how the displa c e m e n t D, of the wate r surfa c e at a
particul a r dista n c e from the wood varies with time t .
Using the grap h, calcula t e the
(i)
spee d of the waves.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
654
(ii)
ratio of the displac e m e n t at t = 1.75 s to the displa c e m e n t at t =
0.35 s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
655
(iii) ratio of the ener gy of the wave at t = 1.75 s to the ene r gy at t =
0.35 s
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
43 7 . This ques tion is abou t gase s and the r m o d y n a m i c proc e s s e s .
(a)
Stat e on e way in which a real gas differs from an ideal gas.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
656
(b)
The diagr a m shows how the pre s s u r e p varies with volum e V of an
ideal gas that und e r g o e s a cyclic cha n g e of stat e.
AB and CD are adiab a t ic cha n g e s of stat e. The pres s u r e at point B is
1.8 × 10 5 Pa and the chan g e in volum e of the gas betw e e n B and C is
4.8 ×1 0 –4 m 3 .
IB Questionbank Physics
657
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by an adia b a ti c cha n g e of stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
658
(ii)
The chan g e in volum e of the gas betw e e n B and C take s 0.020 s.
Dete r mi n e the powe r develop e d durin g this cha n g e of stat e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
659
(iii) Stat e durin g which par t of the cycle the r m a l ene r gy is
tran sf e r r e d from the gas to the sur ro u n di n g s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
660
(c)
The ene r gy tran sf e r r e d is degr a d e d . Explain wha t is me a n t by
deg r a d e d ener gy.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
661
(d)
Discus s how your answ e r to (c) relat e s to the secon d law of
ther m o d y n a m i c s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
662
43 8 . This ques tion is abou t fossil fuels and the gre e n h o u s e effect.
(a)
Stat e two reas o n s why most of the world’s ene r gy cons u m p t i o n is
provide d by fossil fuels.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
663
(b)
A powe r station has an outpu t powe r of 500 MW and an over all
efficiency of 27 %.
It uses nat u r al gas as a fuel tha t has an ene r gy density of 56 MJ kg –1 .
(i)
Define ener g y densit y .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
664
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the rat e of cons u m p t i o n of nat u r a l gas in the powe r
station.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
665
(c)
Outline why the enha n c e d gre e n h o u s e effect may res ult in an incr e a s e
in the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s surfa c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
666
(d)
(i)
The solar inte nsity at the position of the Eart h is 1380
–2
W m . The aver a g e albe do of Eart h is 0.300. Sta t e why an
aver a g e value of albe d o is quot e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
667
(ii)
Show that the aver a g e reflec t e d inte n sity from the Eart h is about
100 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
668
(e)
One of the expect e d res ult s of global war mi n g is an incre a s e d sea
level. The incre a s e in volum e ΔV for a tem p e r a t u r e incr e a s e ΔT is
given by ΔV = γV ΔT. Show, using the following dat a, that the res ultin g
rise in sea level is about 0.5 m.
Temp e r a t u r e incr e a s e = 2.0 °C
Surfa c e are a of ocea n s on Eart h
8
3.6 × 10 km
=
2
Avera g e ocea n dept h = 3.0 km
γ
= 8.8 × 10 –5 K–1
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
669
43 9 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c pote n ti al.
(a)
Define electric pote n tial at a point in an elect ric field.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
670
(b)
The elect ric field inside a cha r g e d condu c ti n g sphe r e is zero. Stat e
and explain why the value of the pote n ti al inside the sphe r e is
const a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
671
(c)
In 1914 Niels Bohr propos e d a simple model of the hydrog e n atom in
which the elect r o n is assu m e d to be in an orbit of radius r about the
proto n. Both the elect r o n and the proton are reg a r d e d to be point
char g e s .
(i)
It can be shown that the kinetic ene r gy E K of the elect r o n is
given by the equ a tio n
k e2
E K = 2r
wher e k is the Coulom b const a n t and e is the elect r o n cha r g e .
Deduc e an equa tio n for the total ene r gy E of the elect r o n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
672
(ii)
In the Bohr model, the mag nit u d e of the minim u m ene r gy of the
elect r o n is
2.2 × 10 –18 J. Estim a t e the radius of the orbit, in which the
elect r o n has minim u m ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
673
44 0 . This ques tion is abou t mom e n t u m , ene r gy and powe r.
(a)
In his Principia Math e m a t i c a Newt o n expr e s s e d his third law of
motion as “to every action the r e is always oppos e d an equ al rea c tion”.
Stat e what New to n mean t by this law.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
674
(b)
A book is relea s e d from rest and falls towa r d s the surfa c e of Eart h.
Discus s how the cons e rv a t io n of mom e n t u m applies to the Eart h- book
syste m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
675
(c)
A larg e swingin g ball is use d to drive a horizon t al iron spike into a
vertical wall.
The cent r e of the ball falls throu g h a vertic al height of 1.6 m befor e
striking the spike in the position show n.
IB Questionbank Physics
676
The mas s of the ball is 3.5 kg and the mas s of the spike is 0.80 kg.
Imm e di a t ely after striking the spike, the ball and spike move toge t h e r .
Show that the
(i)
spee d of the ball on striking the spike is 5.6 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
677
(ii)
ene r gy dissip at e d as a res ult of the collision is abou t 10 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
678
(d)
As a result of the ball striking the spike, the spike is drive n a dista n c e
7.3 × 10 –2 m into the wall. Calcula t e , ass u m i n g it to be const a n t , the
friction force F betw e e n the spike and wall.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
679
(e)
The machin e that is used to rais e the ball has a useful powe r outp u t of
18 W. Calculat e how long it take s for the mac hi n e to raise the ball
throu g h a height of 1.6 m.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
680
44 1 . This ques tion is abou t CCDs and digital dat a stor a g e .
(a)
An object is to be photo g r a p h e d using a digital cam e r a .
(i)
Stat e the nam e of the phe no m e n o n in which light caus e s
elect r o n s to be emitt e d from a pixel of a CCD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
681
(ii)
Outline how the image of the object on the CCD is form e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
682
(b)
Photo n s are inciden t on one of the pixels of the CCD at a rat e of 3.6 ×
10 6 s –1 . The pixel has capa cit a n c e 34 pF and qua n t u m efficiency of 80
%. Dete r m i n e the poten ti al differ e n c e acros s the pixel after an
expos u r e time of 15 ms.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
683
(c)
Outline, with refer e n c e to the ret riev al of stor e d data, why it is bett e r
to stor e dat a in digital form rath e r tha n analog u e form.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
684
44 2 . This ques tion is abou t the relative popul a tion density of sta r s and galaxie s.
The num b e r of star s arou n d the Sun, within a dista n c e of 17 ly, is 75. The
num b e r of galaxies in the local group, within a dist a n c e of 4.0 × 10 6 ly from
the Sun, is 26.
(a)
Calcula t e the aver a g e popula tion density, per ly 3 , of star s and
galaxies.
Star s: .......................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Galaxies: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
685
(b)
Use your answ e r to (a) to dete r m i n e the ratio
a ve r a gpeo p u la t ion
d e n s it oy f s t a r s
a ve r a gpeo p u la t ion
d e n s it oy f g a la xie s
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 3 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
686
44 3 . This ques tion is abou t the luminosity, size and dista n c e of star s.
The Her tzs p r u n g–R u s s ell (HR) diag r a m shows the varia tion with spec t r a l
class of the absolut e mag ni t u d e of sta r s .
IB Questionbank Physics
687
The star Capella and the Sun are in the sa m e spec t r a l class (G). Using the
HR diag r a m ,
(a)
(i)
the Sun.
sugg e s t why Capella has a gre a t e r surfa c e are a than
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
688
(ii)
estim a t e the luminosity of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
689
(iii) calcula t e the radius of Capella in ter m s of that of the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
690
(b)
The spect r o s c o pi c par allax meth o d can be use d to me a s u r e the
dista n c e of star Vega.
(i)
Using the HR diagr a m , sta t e the absolut e mag nit u d e of Vega.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
691
(ii)
The app a r e n t mag nit u d e of Vega is 0.0. Dete r mi n e (in pars e c ) the
dist a n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
692
(iii) Light from Vega is abso r b e d by a dust cloud betw e e n Vega and
Eart h. Sugg e s t the effect, if any, this will have on dete r m i ni n g
the dista n c e of Vega from Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
693
44 4 . This ques tion is abou t cosmic microw a v e backg r o u n d radia tio n (CMB) and
the density of the univer s e.
The gra p h shows the relative inte nsity of the CMB as a function of
wavele n g t h .
IB Questionbank Physics
694
(a)
Explain how this grap h is consist e n t with the Big Bang model of the
univer s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
695
(b)
The density of the univer s e will det e r m i n e its ultim a t e fate. Outline
the proble m s associa t e d with dete r m i ni n g the density of the unive r s e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
696
(c)
Outline how the expan sio n of the univer s e ultim a t e ly mad e it possible
for stabl e nuclei and atom s to exist.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
697
44 5 . This ques tion is abou t the mass–lumi no si ty rela tion and also the evolution
of star s .
The mas s–lu mi n o sity relation for main sequ e n c e sta r s is assu m e d to be L 
M 3.5 , wher e L is the luminosity and M is the mas s. Star X is 8 × 10 4 time s
mor e lumino u s than the Sun and 25 time s mor e mas sive tha n the Sun.
(a)
Deduc e that star X is a main sequ e n c e sta r.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
698
(b)
Outline with refer e n c e to the Oppe n h e i m e r–Volkoff limit, the
evolution a r y steps and the fate of sta r X afte r it leave s the main
sequ e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
699
44 6 . This ques tion is abou t Hubbl e’s law and the expa n sio n of the unive r s e .
(a)
The spect r u m of the clust e r of galaxies Pega s u s I shows a shift of 5.04
nm in the wavele n g t h of the K-line. The wavel e n g t h of this line from a
labor a t o r y sour ce is mea s u r e d as 396.8 nm. Calcul a t e the velocity of
rece s s io n of the clust e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
700
(b)
The grap h shows the reces sio n velocitie s of a num b e r of clust e r s of
galaxies as a function of their app roxi m a t e dista n c e s .
IB Questionbank Physics
701
(i)
Stat e on e met ho d by which the dista n c e s show n on the gra p h
could have bee n dete r m i n e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
702
(ii)
Use the grap h to show that the age of the unive r s e is about 10 17
s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
703
44 7 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
(a)
The diagr a m shows how the volta g e signal of a frequ e n c y modul a t e d
(FM) car ri e r wave varies with time.
The carri e r wave is modul a t e d by a single frequ e n c y signal.
On the above axes sketc h the infor m a ti o n signal.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
704
(b)
Stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e of using FM modul a tio n rath e r tha n
amplit u d e modul a tio n (AM).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 3 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
705
44 8 . This ques tion is abou t sam pling.
A telep h o n e call is sam pl e d with a sam pling frequ e n c y of 8.0 kHz. Eac h
sam pl e is stor e d as a four bit bina ry num b e r . The dur a tio n of eac h bit in
the sam pl e is 4.0 µ s.
(a)
Calcula t e the time interv al betw e e n the end of one sam pl e and the
beginni n g of the next.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
706
(b)
Outline, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r in (a), what is me a n t by timedivision multiplexing.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
707
44 9 . This ques tion is abou t the mobile phone syste m .
In the mobile phon e syste m , a partic ul a r geog r a p h i c are a is divide d into a
num b e r of cells with a base station in eac h cell, eac h conn e c t e d to a
cellula r exch a n g e .
Describ e the function of the bas e sta tion s and the cellula r excha n g e .
Base
stations : ...................................................................................................
......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
Cellula r
exch a n g e : ................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 4 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
708
45 0 . This ques tion is abou t the tran s m i s s io n of signals along an optic fibre.
(a)
A ray of light ente r s an optic fibre from air. The ray make s an angle θ
with the nor m al.
The ray und e r g o e s total inte r n a l reflectio n at point P.
The refra ctive index of the core is 1.56 and that of the claddin g is
1.38.
(i)
Calculat e the critical angle of the claddi n g- cor e bound a r y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Show that the large s t angle of incide n c e θ in air, at which total
inter n al reflection at the claddi n g- core boun d a r y take s plac e, is
46.7°.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
709
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
710
(b)
Disting ui s h betw e e n modal dispe r sio n and mat e ri a l dispe r si o n in an
optic fibre.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
The signal show n is fed into a mono m o d e optic fibre.
(i)
Stat e what the shad e d are a repr e s e n t s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Use the axes above to dra w the sha p e of the signal afte r it has
travelled a large dist a n c e in the fibre.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
711
(iii) The input signal powe r in a mono m o d e fibre is 15.0 mW. The
att e n u a t i o n per unit lengt h for this fibre is 1.24 dB km –1 .
Dete r mi n e the powe r of the outp u t signal afte r the signal has
travelled a dista n c e of 3.40 km in the fibre.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
45 1 . This ques tion is abou t the oper a tio n al amplifie r.
(a)
On the axes below draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
input voltag e V in of the outpu t volta g e V out of a non- inverti n g
oper a ti o n al amplifier.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
712
(b)
A tem p e r a t u r e war nin g devic e make s use of a buzze r tha t sound s
whe n the poten ti al differe n c e acros s it is 24 V. The circ uit in the
war ni n g device is show n.
It is requi r e d that the buzze r should sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e of
the ther m i s t o r rises above 50 °C.
(i)
Stat e the voltag e at point Q.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
At a tem p e r a t u r e of 50 °C the resist a n c e of the the r m i s t o r is R .
Explain why the buzze r will sound whe n the tem p e r a t u r e rise s
above 50 °C.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
713
45 2 . This ques tion is abou t laser light.
(a)
Outline how laser light is prod u c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Stat e two ways in which light emitt e d by a lase r differ s from light
emitt e d from an ordin a r y filam e n t lamp.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
714
45 3 . This ques tion is abou t a compo u n d microsc o p e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) is of a compo u n d micros c o p e .
The focal lengt h of the objective lens is 20 mm and that of the eyepiec e
lens is 60 mm. A small object is plac e d at a dist a n c e of 24 mm from the
objective lens. The micros c o p e prod u c e s a final virtu al imag e of the object
at a dista n c e of 240 mm from the eyepi ec e lens.
(a)
(i)
Dete r mi n e , by calcula tion, the dista n c e from the
objective lens of the imag e form e d by the objective lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Explain why the imag e in (a)(i)is real.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the dista n c e of the image form e d by the objective lens
from the eyepiec e lens.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
715
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Deter m i n e the over all mag nifica tion of the micros c o p e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
45 4 . This ques tion is abou t interf e r e n c e .
(a)
Light from a laser is incide n t on two very nar r o w slits A and B.
(diagr a m not to scale)
Point C on the scre e n is direc tly opposit e the midpoint of the slits.
IB Questionbank Physics
716
(i)
On the axes below, sketc h the varia tion with angle θ of the
inten si ty of the light on the scre e n.
(2)
(ii)
The sepa r a t i o n of the slits is 0.120 mm and the wavele n g t h of the
light is
6.80 × 10 –7 m. The dist a n c e bet w e e n the slits and the scre e n is
1.40 m. Calculat e the sepa r a t i o n of the bright fringe s on the
scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
Slit A is cover e d with a tra n s p a r e n t piec e of glass. The effect of the
glas s is to incr e a s e the path lengt h of the light from the slit to the
scre e n by half a wavelen g t h . It may be assu m e d tha t the amou n t of
light absor b e d by the glass is negligible. Stat e and explain the
effect(s), if any, of the glass on the
(i)
inten si ty patt e r n you have dra w n in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
717
(ii)
sepa r a t i o n of the brigh t fringe s calcul a t e d in (a)(ii).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
45 5 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.
In an X-ray tube elect r o n s are accele r a t e d from rest throu g h a pote n ti al
differ e n c e and strike a met al tar g e t .
(a)
On the axes below draw and annot a t e a typical X-ray spec t r u m .
(2)
(b)
Identify the mech a ni s m by which the differ e n t regions of the X-ray
spect r u m are produ c e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
718
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
719
(c)
In a particul a r X-ray tube the elect r o n s are accel e r a t e d from res t
throu g h a poten ti al differ e n c e of 24 kV. The minim u m wavele n g t h of
the X-rays produ c e d is 4.8 × 10 –11 m.
Deter m i n e a value for the Planck cons t a n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
X-rays of wavele n g t h 2.25 × 10 –10 m are direc t e d towa r d s the surfa c e
of a cryst al. A stron g first orde r reflect e d X-ray bea m is obse rv e d
whe n the X-rays make an angle of 28.1° with the cryst al surfa c e .
Deter m i n e the sepa r a t i o n of the atomic plan e s in the cryst al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
45 6 . This ques tion is abou t fram e s of refe r e n c e and the spe e d of light.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by an inerti al fram e of refe r e n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
720
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
721
(b)
The diagr a m shows two iner ti al fram e s of refe r e n c e . Fra m e S ′ moves
with velocity v = 2.0 × 10 8 m s –1 relative to fra m e S along the x -x ′directio n. When the origins of the two fram e s coincid e d, the clocks in
both fram e s wer e set to show zero.
An event takes place at x = 5.0 × 10 3 m whe n the clocks in fram e S
show t = 3.0 × 10 –5 s.
(i)
By using Galilean tra nsfor m a t i o n equa tio n s , dete r m i n e the
position and time of this event in the S ′ fram e of refe r e n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
A laser, at res t in the fram e S ′, emits a ray of light along the
neg a tive x ′-direction ( i.e. towa r d s the left). The spe e d of the ray
of light is meas u r e d to be c in the fram e S ′. Show, using the
relativistic velocity addition form ul a, tha t the spe e d of the ray of
light in the fram e S is also me a s u r e d to be c .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
722
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
723
(c)
Outline an experi m e n t (othe r tha n the Michelso n–Mo rl ey expe ri m e n t )
which provides eviden c e that the spe e d of light is inde p e n d e n t of the
spee d of its sourc e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
45 7 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic kine m a t i c s .
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by prope r lengt h and prop e r time inte rv al.
Prope r
lengt h: .............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Prope r time
interv al: ...........................................................................................
.........
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A space s hi p moves with spe e d v = 0.600 c relative to a spa c e sta tion.
Two laser s , A and B, on the spac e station are 5.00 m apa r t as
mea s u r e d by the space station obse rv e r s . The ga m m a factor for a
spee d of v = 0.600 c is γ =1. 2 5.
IB Questionbank Physics
724
IB Questionbank Physics
725
(i)
A radio signal is sent to the spac e s hi p from the spac e sta tion. The
tran s mi s s io n lasts for 6.00 s accor di n g to spa c e station clocks.
Calculat e the dur atio n of the tra n s m i s sio n accor di n g to the
spac e s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Calculat e the dista n c e betw e e n the laser s A and B accor di n g to
the space s hi p obse rv e r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
The laser s in (b) are fired si m u l t a n e o u s l y accor di n g to the spa c e
stat i o n obse rv e r s .
Light from each laser make s a ma rk on the spac e s hi p. The spac e s hi p
obse rv e r s mea s u r e the dista n c e betw e e n the two ma rk s to be 6.25 m.
Accordi n g to the space s hi p obse rv e r s
(i)
stat e which laser was fired first.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
det e r m i n e the differ e n c e in time betw e e n the firings of the two
laser s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
726
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
727
45 8 . This ques tion is abou t relativistic mec h a ni c s .
The upsilon (Y0 ) is an uns t a bl e particle that dec ays into a tau (τ –) and an
antit a u (τ + ) accor di n g to the reac tio n
Y0 → τ – + τ +
The Y0 is at rest relative to the labor a t o r y whe n it dec a ys. The mom e n t u m
of the τ – relative to the labor a t o r y is 4.40 GeV c –1 . The rest mas s of the τ –
and of the τ + is 1.78 GeV c –2 .
Dete r mi n e the rest mass of the Y0 .
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
.........................................................................................................................
.......................
(Tota l 3 mark s )
45 9 . This ques tion is abou t gene r a l relativity.
(a)
Stat e Einst ei n’s principle of equivale n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
728
(b)
A rocket is accel er a t i n g in the direc tio n show n far from any mass e s .
A monoch r o m a t i c bea m of light is emitt e d from the floor F of the
rocke t. The bea m is receive d at the ceiling C of the rocke t. Sugg e s t
why the freq u e n cy of the light bea m me a s u r e d at C is less tha n the
frequ e n c y mea s u r e d at F.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
729
(c)
The diagr a m shows thre e identic al rocke t s A, B and C.
Rocket A is accel e r a t i n g in oute r spa c e with accele r a t io n a.
Rocket B is at rest on the surf ac e of a plane t. The gravit a tio n al field
str en g t h at the surfac e of the plane t is a .
Rocket C is falling freely above a plane t. The gravit a tion a l field
str en g t h of the plane t in the region of the rocke t is a.
Light is emitt e d from a sour c e X on the left wall of eac h rocke t. The
receive r Y is directly opposit e X.
The initial directio n of the light is par allel to the floor of the rocke t.
Draw, for each rocket, the pat h of the light ray emitt e d from X
accor di n g to an obse rv e r in eac h rocke t.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
730
(d)
Einst ei n’s theo ry of gen e r a l rela tivity pre dic t s that a mas sive body
caus e s a curvat u r e (bendin g) of spa c e.
(i)
Describ e what is mea n t by the curva t u r e of spa c e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Describ e how Edding t o n’s expe ri m e n t provide s evide n c e for the
curvat u r e of space caus e d by the Sun.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
46 0 . This ques tion is abou t the ear and hea ri n g.
(a)
Stat e the physical prop e r t y of a sound wave tha t is relat e d to the
intensity of the sound.
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
731
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
732
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with freq u e n c y of the thr e s h ol d of
heari n g for a pers o n with nor m al hea ri n g.
Calcula t e the inten sity of sound of freq u e n c y 600 Hz that can just be
hear d by this pers o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
As a result of long- ter m expos u r e to noise a pers o n suffer s from a
heari n g loss of 20 dB.
(i)
On the axes in (b) dra w a sketc h gra p h to show the variation with
frequ e n c y of the thr e s h ol d of hea ri n g for this pers o n.
(1)
(ii)
Explain why this loss is likely to lead to difficulties with spee c h
recog ni tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
733
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
46 1 . This ques tion is abou t ultr as o u n d .
(a)
Define acous tic impe d a n c e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Ultra s o u n d of intensi ty I 0 is travelling in a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 1
and is incide n t on a mediu m of impe d a n c e Z 2 . The reflect e d
ultra s o u n d has intensity I R given by the following equ a tio n.
I R  Z1  Z 2

I 0  Z 1 Z 2



2
Explain why when using ultr a s o u n d a gel is plac e d betw e e n the
tran s d u c e r and the skin of the patie n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
734
46 2 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.
(a)
Define half- value thickn e s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
735
(b)
The half- value thickn e s s in met r e s of air at pres s u r e p and
tem p e r a t u r e T is given by the equ a tio n
T
x 1 1.8 1 05 
p
2
X-rays from the Sun reach the oute r layers of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h.
The following data are availa ble.
Avera g e pres s u r e of the atmos p h e r e
Avera g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmos p h e r e
Effective heigh t of the atmos p h e r e
= 2.0 × 10 4 Pa
= 240 K
= 25 km
Using the dat a, calcul at e the
(i)
half- value thickn e s s for the atmo s p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
fraction of the incide n t X-ray inte n si ty that is tra n s m i t t e d to the
surfac e of the Eart h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Comm e n t , using your ans w e r to (b)(ii), on whet h e r the atmo s p h e r e
IB Questionbank Physics
736
provides any significan t prot e c t io n from incomi n g X-rays.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
X-ray photon s of aver a g e ene r gy 20 keV are incide n t at a height of 10
km above the Eart h’s surfa c e at a rate of 2.8 × 10 8 m –2 s –1 . A
pas s e n g e r is in a plan e flying at a height of 10 km above the surfa c e of
the Ear t h. The pass e n g e r has a mas s of 60 kg and body surfa c e are a
1.6 m 2 .
The quality factor for X-rays is 1.
(i)
Calculat e the dose equivale n t rec eive d by this pass e n g e r durin g
a thr e e hour flight at a height of 10 km.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii)
Stat e on e reas o n why the dose equivale n t rec eive d will be muc h
less than your ans w e r in (d)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
737
46 3 . This ques tion is abou t radioisot o p e s .
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the effective half- life of a radioisot o p e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
738
(b)
The function of the lungs may be monitor e d using the radioisoto p e s
133
81
5 4 X and 3 6 Kr .
Infor m a t io n on thes e two radioisot o p e s is given in the table.
Radi oi s o t o p e s
Effe c t i v e halflife
De c a y prod u c t s
133
54X
5.2 days
β– and γ
81
3 6 Kr
12 secon d s
γ
Stat e and explain on e adva n t a g e and on e disa dva n t a g e of using
81
rat h e r than 3 6 Kr .
133
54X
Advant a g e : ..............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Disadv a n t a g e : ..........................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
46 4 . This ques tion is abou t qua r k s.
The table below gives the elect ric cha r g e of the thr e e light e s t qua r k s in
ter m s of e , the char g e of the proton.
Quark flavo u r
IB Questionbank Physics
up
u
down
d
str a n g e
s
739
Elec t r i c
ch ar g e / e
IB Questionbank Physics
2
3

1
3

1
3
740
(a)
Using the dat a in the table, dete r m i n e the
(i)
quar k conte n t of a meson with cha r g e +1 and str a n g e n e s s 0 and
that of a baryon with cha r g e –1 and str a n g e n e s s –3.
Meso n: ............................................................................................
..................
Baryon: ............................................................................................
.................
(2)
(ii)
possible spin values of the meson in (a)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
3
Explain how the baryon with qua r k cont e n t uuu and spin 2 does not
violate the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
In the Feyn m a n diagr a m show n a blue down qua r k emits a gluon and
prod u c e s a red qua r k.
IB Questionbank Physics
741
Deduc e the
(i)
quar k flavour (type) of the prod u c e d qua r k.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
colour quan t u m num b e r s of the emitt e d gluon.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(e)
The positive kaon K + (qua r k cont e n t u s ) dec ays into an anti- muon and
a neut ri no accor di n g to the rea c tion below.
K+ → µ + + ν
Explain how it may be dedu c e d that this dec ay is a weak inter a c ti o n
proce s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(f)
The diagr a m shows thre e of the inter a c ti o n vertic e s for the wea k
inter a c ti o n.
IB Questionbank Physics
742
Using the app r o p r i a t e vert ex, dra w a Feyn m a n diag r a m for the dec ay
K + → µ + + ν labelling all particl e s involve d.
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
743
46 5 . This ques tion is abou t the bubbl e cha m b e r .
The diagr a m is a copy of a bubbl e cha m b e r photog r a p h of the dec ay of a
neut r al pion (π 0 ) into two photon s , π 0 → 2 γ. Each of the photon s prod u c e d
mat e ri alizes into an elect r o n–po sit r o n pair. The path s show n belong to the
two elect r o n–posi t r o n pairs.
(a)
Stat e why the track s of the photo n s do not show up in the photog r a p h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
On the diag r a m above,
(i)
draw lines to indicat e the path of eac h of the photo n s .
(1)
(ii)
label with the lette r P the point whe r e the pion dec ay e d .
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
744
(c)
Outline whet h e r the pion was moving or whe t h e r it was at rest whe n
it decaye d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
The path of one of the elect r o n s produ c e d is a spir al. Sugg e s t a rea so n
for the shap e of this pat h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
46 6 . This ques tion is abou t Feyn m a n diag r a m s and neut r a l cur r e n t s .
(a)
The diagr a m shows the inter a c t io n vert ex of the elect r o m a g n e t i c
inter a c ti o n.
Had r o n s may be prod u c e d via the elec t r o m a g n e t i c inte r a c ti o n in
elect r o n–posi t r o n collisions thro u g h the rea c tion
e– + e+ → q + q
whe r e q stan d s for a quar k and q for an antiqu a r k .
IB Questionbank Physics
745
(i)
Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → u + u whe r e
u stan d s for the up qua r k.
(1)
(ii)
Outline why the reac tion in (a)(i) event u a lly leads to the
produ c t io n of had ro n s rat h e r tha n individu al qua r k s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m shows two vertic e s for the weak inter a c t io n.
The solid lines repr e s e n t qua r k s or lepto n s.
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by a neut r a l curr e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
746
(ii)
Draw a Feyn m a n diagr a m for the proc e s s e – + e + → u + u , whe r e
u stan d s for an up qua r k, that is media t e d by a neut r al curr e n t .
(1)
(c)
By refer e n c e to the weak inte r a c ti o n vertic e s in (b) sugg e s t how the
Z 0 may be det ec t e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
The W – decays accor di n g to W – → e – + ν . Stat e and explain, whet h e r
the antine u t r i n o in this dec ay is an elect r o n , muon or tau
antine u t r i n o.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
747
46 7 . Which of the following is equivale n t to the joule?
A.
N m2
B.
N m –2
C.
kg m s –2
D.
kg m 2 s –2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
46 8 . An object falls for a time of 0.25 s. The accele r a t io n of free fall is 9.81 m s –
2
. The displac e m e n t is calcul at e d . Which of the following gives the corr e c t
num b e r of significa n t digits for the calcula t e d value of the displ ac e m e n t of
the object?
A.
1
B.
2
C.
3
D.
4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
748
46 9 . A raind r o p falling from rest at time t = 0 rea c h e s ter mi n a l velocity. Which
grap h bes t repr e s e n t s how the spe e d v varies with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
749
47 0 . The gra p h shows how the displa c e m e n t d of an objec t varies with time t .
The tang e n t to the curve at time t 1 is also show n.
Which of the following gives the spe e d of the objec t at point P?
A.
the gradi e n t at P
B.
the shad e d area
C.
1
g r a d ie natt P
D.
d1
t1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
750
47 1 . A ball falls vertically and bounc e s off the groun d. Imme di a t e ly befor e
impact with the groun d the spe e d of the ball is u . Imme di a t ely after leaving
the grou n d the speed is v .
Which of the following expr e s si o n s is the ratio of
k in e t ice n e r g lo
y s to n c o llis io n
k in e t ice n e r g im
y m e d ia tyebl e fo r ec o llis ion?
A.
v
u
B.
v
u
C.
v
 
u
D.
v
1  
u
1
2
2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
751
47 2 . A railway engin e of mas s m moves along a horizont al trac k with unifor m
spee d v . The total resis tive force acting on the engin e is F.
Which of the following is the powe r of the engine ?
A.
F
mv
B.
Fv
C.
mv
F
D.
v
F
(Tot al 1 mar k )
47 3 . A ball is tied to a string and rota t e d at a unifor m spe e d in a vertic al plan e.
The diagr a m shows the ball at its lowest position. Which arrow shows the
direction of the net force acting on the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
752
47 4 . A gas atom strikes a wall with spe e d v at an angle θ to the nor m a l to the
wall. The atom rebo u n d s at the sam e spe e d v and angle θ.
Which of the following gives the mag ni t u d e of the mom e n t u m cha n g e of the
gas atom?
A.
zero
B.
2 mv sin θ
C.
2 mv
D.
2 mv cos θ
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
753
47 5 . A syste m consist s of an ice cube plac e d in a cup of wate r . The syste m is
ther m ally insulat e d from its sur r o u n di n g s . The wate r is origin ally at 20 °C.
Which gra p h best show s the variation of total inte r n a l ene r gy U of the
syste m with time t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
754
47 6 . Ther m al ener gy is adde d at a const a n t rate to a subst a n c e which is solid at
time t = 0. The gra p h shows the variation with t of the tem p e r a t u r e T .
Which of the stat e m e n t s are corr e c t ?
I.
The specific latent hea t of fusion is gre a t e r tha n the specific
laten t heat of vaporiz a tio n.
II.
The specific heat capa city of the solid is less tha n the specific
heat capacity of the liquid.
A.
I only
B.
I and II
C.
II only
D.
Neith e r I nor II
(Tot al 1 mar k )
47 7 . Which of the following is an assu m p t i o n mad e in the kinetic model of ideal
gas es ?
A.
Molecul e s have zero mas s.
B.
Forc es betw e e n molec ul e s are attr a c tive.
C.
Collisions betw e e n molec ul e s are elastic.
D.
Molecul e s move at high spe e d.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
755
47 8 . An object at the end of a spring oscillat e s vertic ally with simple har m o ni c
motion. The grap h shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x .
The amplitu d e is x 0 and the period of oscillation is T .
Which of the following is the corr e c t expr e s sio n for the displa c e m e n t x ?
A.
B.
C.
D.
 x0 c o s
x0 c o s
2π
t
T
 x 0 s in
x 0 s in
2π
t
T
2π
t
T
2π
t
T
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
756
47 9 . An object at the end of a spring oscillat e s vertic ally with simple har m o ni c
motion. The grap h shows the varia tion with time t of the displa c e m e n t x .
The amplitu d e is x 0 and the period of oscillation is T .
Which of the following is the corr e c t expr e s sio n for the maxim u m
accele r a ti o n of the object?
A.
2π
x0
T
2π
B.
T2
x0
4π 2
x0
C.
T2
D.
4π 2
x0
T
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
757
48 0 . One end of a horizont al string is fixed to a wall. A tran s v e r s e pulse moves
along the string as show n.
Which of the following stat e m e n t s are corr e c t for the reflect e d pulse
comp a r e d to the forwa r d puls e?
I.
It moves mor e slowly.
II.
It has less ene r gy.
III.
It is invert e d .
A.
I and II only
B.
I and III only
C.
II and III only
D.
I, II and III
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 1 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light travels from air into wat e r . Which of the following
descri b e s the chan g e s in wavele n g t h and spe e d ?
Wavel e n g t h
Spe e d
A.
incr e a s e s
decr e a s e s
B.
incr e a s e s
incr e a s e s
C.
decr e a s e s
incr e a s e s
D.
decr e a s e s
decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
758
48 2 . Two resis to r s , mad e of the sam e mat e ri al, are conne c t e d in serie s to a
batt e r y. The lengt h of resis to r X is twice that of resisto r Y, and X has twice
the cross- section al area of Y.
r e s is t a n cofe X
Which of the following gives r e s is t a n cofe Y ?
A.
1
4
B.
1
2
C.
1
D.
4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 3 . The circuit shows a resis to r R conn e c t e d in serie s with a batt e r y and a
resis to r of resis tanc e 10 Ω. The e mf of the batt e r y is 20 V and it has
negligible inter n al resist a n c e . The cur r e n t in the circ uit is 1.0 A.
Which of the following is the resist a n c e of R?
A.
1.0 Ω
B.
2.0 Ω
C.
10 Ω
D.
20 Ω
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
759
48 4 . Three identic al resist o r s are conn e c t e d to a batt e r y as show n.
Which of the following is a corr e c t stat e m e n t ?
A.
The cur r e n t throu g h X is gre a t e r tha n that throu g h Z.
B.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s Z is gre a t e r tha n tha t acros s Y.
C.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s resist o r X and Y toge t h e r is the sa m e
as that acros s Z.
D.
The cur r e n t throu g h Z is less tha n the total cur r e n t throu g h X and Y.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 5 . A cur r e n t is est a blis h e d in a coil of wire in the dire c tion show n.
The direction of the mag n e t i c field at point P is
A.
out of the plane of the pap e r .
B.
into the plane of the pap e r .
C.
to the left.
D.
to the right.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
760
48 6 . Which arr a n g e m e n t of thr e e point cha r g e s at the corn e r of an equila t e r a l
trian gl e will res ul t in a zero elect ric field stre n g t h at the cent r e of the
trian gl e, point P?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 7 . The mas s of a plan e t is twice that of Eart h. Its radius is half tha t of the
radi us of Eart h. The gravit a tio n a l field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Eart h is g.
The gravit a tion al field str e n g t h at the surfac e of the plane t is
A.
1
g
2 .
B.
g.
C.
2g.
D.
8g.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
761
48 8 . An elect r o n ente r s the vacuu m betw e e n two opposit ely cha r g e d plat e s with
velocity v . The elect r o n is followe d by an alpha particle moving with the
sam e initial velocity as the elect r o n . A unifor m ma gn e t i c field is direc t e d
out of the plan e of the pape r.
The elect r o n’s pat h is undeflec t e d . The path of the alph a particle will be
A.
deflect e d out of the plan e of the pape r .
B.
und eflect e d .
C.
deflect e d upw a r d .
D.
deflect e d down w a r d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
48 9 . The Geige r–M a r s d e n experi m e n t provide s evide n c e for
A.
the existe n c e of discr e t e atomic ene r gy levels.
B.
the existe n c e of the neut r o n .
C.
a dens e positively char g e d nucle u s .
D.
the stability of some nuclei.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
762
49 0 . A radioac tive isotop e has a half- life of two minut e s . A sam pl e cont ain s
sixtee n gra m s of the isotop e. How muc h time elaps e s until one gra m of the
isotop e rem ai n s ?
A.
6 minut e s
B.
8 minut e s
C.
10 minut e s
D.
12 minut e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
49 1 . Data conce r ni n g nuclide s are plotte d using the axes below.
What are the axis labels for this gra p h ?
Y
X
A.
bindin g ener gy per
nucleon
num b e r of nucleo n s
B.
bindin g ener gy
num b e r of proto n s
C.
num b e r of proto n s
bindin g ene r gy per
nucle on
D.
num b e r of nucleo n s
bindin g ene r gy
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
763
49 2 . Which of the following is true about beta minus ( β–) dec ay?
A.
An antin e u t r i n o is abso r b e d .
B.
The char g e of the daug h t e r nuclide is less tha n that of the par e n t
nuclide.
C.
An antin e u t r i n o is emitt e d .
D.
The mas s num b e r of the daug h t e r nuclide is less tha n that of the
par e n t nuclide.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
49 3 . A wave gene r a t o r produ c e s a powe r per unit lengt h of 4.0 kW m –1 for
waves of amplit u d e A and spee d v . The efficiency of the gen e r a t o r is
cons t a n t . The power per unit lengt h obtain e d from waves of amplit u d e 2 A
and spee d 2 v would be
A.
8.0 kW m –1 .
B.
16 kW m –1 .
C.
32 kW m –1 .
D.
64 kW m –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
764
49 4 . The diagr a m shows the variation with wavele n g t h of the powe r per unit
wavele n g t h I radi at e d from an are a of 1 m 2 of two differ e n t bodies.
Which of the following is a corr e c t comp a r i s o n of the tem p e r a t u r e and of
the emissivity of the two bodies?
Te m p e r a t u
re
Emi s s i v i t y
A.
sam e
sam e
B.
sam e
differ e n t
C.
differ e n t
sam e
D.
differ e n t
differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
49 5 . Which of the following is the most likely expla n a ti o n for a rise in global sea
level?
A.
Ther m al expan s io n of wate r
B.
Melting of sea ice
C.
Incr e a s e in rainfall
D.
Ther m al expan s io n of ice
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
765
49 6 . The diagr a m shows an ener gy balan c e clima t e model for a plane t.
The intensiti es of the reflect e d and radia t e d radia tio n are given in ter m s of
the incide n t intensity I. Which of the following is the albe d o of this plane t ?
A.
0.15
B.
0.25
C.
0.40
D.
0.60
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
766
49 7 . Data analysis ques tion.
A stud e n t perfor m s an expe ri m e n t with a pap e r toy tha t rota t e s as it falls
slowly throu g h the air. After rele a s e , the pape r toy quickly att ain s a
cons t a n t vertic al spee d as meas u r e d over a fixed vertic al dista n c e .
The aim of the expe ri m e n t was to find how the ter mi n al spe e d of the pape r
toy varies with its weigh t. The weigh t of the pape r toy was chan g e d by
using differ e n t num b e r s of pap e r she e t s in its const r u c t i o n.
IB Questionbank Physics
767
The gra p h shows a plot of the ter mi n a l spe e d v of the pap e r toy (calcula t e d
from the raw dat a) and the num b e r of pap e r she e t s n use d to const r u c t the
toy. The unce r t ai n t y in v for n = 1 is show n by the erro r bar.
(a)
The fixed dist a n c e is 0.75 m and has an absolut e unce r t a i n t y of 0.01
m. The perc e n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the time take n to fall throu g h the
fixed dist an c e is 5 %.
(i)
Calculat e the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the ter mi n al spe e d of the
pap e r toy for n = 6.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
768
(ii)
On the grap h, draw an error bar on the point corr e s p o n di n g to n
= 6.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
769
(b)
On the gra p h, draw a line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)
(c)
The stud e n t hypot h e s iz e s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to n . Use the data
points for n = 2 and n = 4 from the gra p h opposit e to show tha t this
hypot h e s i s is incor r e c t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
770
(d)
Anothe r stud e n t hypot h e s iz e d tha t v might be propo r tio n a l to n . To
verify this hypot h e si s he plott e d a gra p h of v 2 agains t n as show n
below.
Explain how the gra p h verifies the hypot h e s i s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to
n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
771
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
772
49 8 . In 1997 a high- spee d car of mas s 1.1 × 10 4 kg achieve d the world land
spee d recor d. The car accel e r a t e d unifor mly in two sta g e s as show n in the
table. The car star t e d from res t.
Tim e / s
Spe e d attai n e d at en d of
sta g e / m s –1
Sta g e 1
0.0 – 4.0
44
Sta g e 2
4.0 – 12
280
Use the dat a to calculat e the
(a)
aver a g e accel e r a t io n of the car in sta g e 1.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
aver a g e net force req ui r e d to accel e r a t e the car in sta g e 2.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
total dist an c e travelled by the car in 12 s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
773
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
49 9 .
(a) Draw the compl et e diagr a m of the circuit that uses a pote n ti al
divider, am m e t e r , voltm e t e r and cell to mea s u r e the curr e n t- volta g e
char a c t e r i s ti c s for compo n e n t X.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
774
(b)
The grap h shows the curr e n t- volta g e cha r a c t e r i s ti c s for the
compo n e n t X.
Compo n e n t X is now conne c t e d acros s the ter mi n al s of a cell of emf
2.0 V and negligible inter n a l resist a n c e . Use the gra p h to show that
the resist a n c e of X is 0.83 Ω.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A resis to r of cons t a n t resis tanc e 1.0 Ω i s conn e c t e d in series with the
cell in (b) and with X. Use the gra p h to ded uc e that the curr e n t in the
circuit is 1.3 A.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
775
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
50 0 . This ques tion is abou t a simple pend ul u m .
(a)
A pend ul u m consist s of a bob susp e n d e d by a light inexte n si bl e string
from a rigid suppo r t . The pend ul u m bob is move d to one side and the n
relea s e d . The sketc h grap h show s how the displa c e m e n t of the
pend ul u m bob und e r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion varie s with time
over one time period.
On the sketc h grap h above,
(i)
label with the lette r A a point at which the accele r a t io n of the
pend ul u m bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(ii)
label with the lette r V a point at which the spe e d of the pend ul u m
bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(b)
Explain why the mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string at the midpoint
of the oscillation is grea t e r tha n the weight of the pend ul u m bob.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
776
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
777
(c)
The pend ul u m bob is moved to one side until its cent r e is 25 mm
above its rest position and the n rele a s e d .
(i)
Show that the spee d of the pend ul u m bob at the midpoint of the
oscillation is 0.70 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The mas s of the pend ul u m bob is 0.057 kg. The cent r e of the
pend ul u m bob is 0.80 m below the suppo r t . Calcula t e the
mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string whe n the pend ul u m bob is
vertically below the point of sus p e n s i o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
778
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
779
(d)
The point of susp e n s i o n of the pend ul u m bob is move d from side to
side with a small amplitu d e and at a variabl e driving frequ e n c y f.
For each value of the driving frequ e n c y a ste a dy cons t a n t amplitu d e A
is reac h e d . The oscillations of the pend ul u m bob are lightly dam p e d .
(i)
On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of A with
f.
(2)
(ii)
Explain, with refer e n c e to the gra p h in (d)(i), wha t is me a n t by
reson a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
780
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e)
The pend ul u m bob is now imm e r s e d in wate r and the varia bl e
frequ e n c y driving force in (d) is again applie d. Sugg e s t the effect this
imme r s io n of the pend ul u m bob will have on the sha p e of your gra p h
in (d)(i).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
781
50 1 . This ques tion is abou t the Ruthe r fo r d model of the atom.
(a)
Most alpha par ticles used to bomb a r d a thin gold foil pass thro u g h the
foil witho u t a significa n t cha n g e in direc tion. A few alpha par ticle s are
deviat e d from their original direc tion thro u g h angl es gre a t e r than 90°.
Use thes e observ a tio n s to desc ri b e the Ruthe r fo r d atomic model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
782
.....................
(5)
IB Questionbank Physics
783
(b)
The isotop e gold- 197 (
is not.
(i)
197
7 9 Au )
is sta ble but the isotop e gold- 199 (
199
7 9 Au )
Outline, in ter m s of the force s acting betw e e n nucleo n s , why, for
large stabl e nuclei such as gold- 197, the num b e r of neut r o n s
excee d s the num b e r of proton s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
199
199
A nucle u s of 7 9 Au dec ays to a nucle u s of 8 0 H g with the emission
of an elect r o n and anot h e r particle. Stat e the na m e of this othe r
par ticl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
50 2 . This ques tion is abou t a light ni n g disch a r g e .
(a)
Define electric field stren g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
784
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
785
(b)
A thun d e r cl o u d can be modelle d as a neg a tively cha r g e d plat e that is
par allel to the grou n d .
The mag ni t u d e of the char g e on the plat e incre a s e s due to proc e s s e s
in the atmo s p h e r e . Event u a lly a cur r e n t disc h a r g e s from the
thun d e r cl o u d to the grou n d .
On the diag r a m , draw the elect ric field patt e r n betw e e n the
thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d .
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
786
(c)
The mag ni t u d e of the elec t ric field str e n g t h E betw e e n two infinite
char g e d par allel plat es is given by the expr e s si o n
σ
E = ε0
whe r e σ is the char g e per unit are a on one of the plate s .
A thun d e r cl o u d car rie s a cha r g e of ma g nit u d e 35 C spre a d over its
bas e. The are a of the bas e is 1.2 × 10 7 m 2 .
(i)
Dete r mi n e the mag nit u d e of the elect ric field betw e e n the bas e
of the thun d e r cl o u d and the grou n d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Stat e two ass u m p t io n s mad e in (c)(i).
1. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
2. .....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
787
(iii) When the thun d e r cl o u d disc h a r g e s , the aver a g e disch a r g e
curr e n t is 1.8 kA. Estim a t e the disch a r g e time.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iv)
The poten ti al differ e n c e betw e e n the thun d e r c lo u d and the
grou n d befor e disch a r g e is 2.5 × 10 8 V. Dete r m i n e the ene r gy
relea s e d in the disch a r g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 17 mark s )
50 3 . This ques tion is abou t fuel for hea tin g.
(a)
Define the ener gy densi ty of a fuel.
IB Questionbank Physics
788
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
789
(b)
A room heat e r bur n s liquid fuel and the following dat a are availabl e.
Density of liquid fuel
8.0 × 10 2 kg m –3
Ener gy produ c e d by 1 m 3 of liquid fuel
2.7 × 10 10 J
Rate at which fuel is cons u m e d
0.13 g s –1
Latent heat of vaporiz a tion of the fuel
290 kJ kg –1
(i)
=
=
=
=
Use the dat a to calcula t e the powe r outp u t of the room hea t e r ,
ignorin g the power requi r e d to conve r t the liquid fuel into a gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Show why, in your calcula tio n in (b)(i), the powe r req ui r e d to
conver t the liquid fuel into a gas at its boiling point can be
ignor e d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Stat e, in ter m s of molecul a r str uc t u r e and their motion, two
IB Questionbank Physics
790
differ e n c e s betw e e n a liquid and a gas.
1. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
2. .............................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
50 4 . This ques tion is abou t the produ c tio n of ene r gy in nucle a r fission.
(a)
A possible fission reac tio n is
235
92 U
(i)
01n 93 26 Kr 15461Ba x 10 n .
Stat e the value of x .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Show that the ener gy rele a s e d whe n one ura ni u m nucle u s
unde r g o e s fission in the rea c tion in (a) is about 2.8 × 10 –11 J.
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
of
of
of
of
neut r o n
= 1.008 6 7 u
U-235 nucle u s
= 234.99 3 3 3 u
Kr- 92 nucle u s = 91.90 6 4 5 u
Ba- 141 nucle u s
= 140.88 3 5 4 u
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
791
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Stat e how the ene r gy of the neut r o n s produ c e d in the reac tion in
(a) is likely to com p a r e with the ene r gy of the neut r o n that
initiat e d the reac tion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
792
(b)
Outline the role of the mode r a t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A nuclea r powe r plant that use s U-235 as fuel has a useful powe r
outpu t of 16 MW and an efficiency of 40 %. Assumi n g tha t eac h fission
of U-235 gives rise to 2.8 × 10 –11 J of ene r gy, det e r m i n e the mas s of
U-235 fuel used per day.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
50 5 . This ques tion is abou t collisions.
(a)
Stat e the principl e of cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m .
IB Questionbank Physics
793
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
794
(b)
In an expe ri m e n t , an air- rifle pellet is fired into a block of modelling
clay that res ts on a table.
(not to scale)
The air- rifle pellet rem ai n s inside the clay block afte r the impa c t.
As a result of the collision, the clay block slides along the table in a
str aig h t line and comes to res t. Furt h e r dat a relatin g to the
expe ri m e n t are given below.
Mass of air- rifle pellet
= 2.0 g
Mass of clay block
= 56 g
Velocity of impa c t of air- rifle pellet
= 140 m s –1
Stoppi n g dista n c e of clay block = 2.8 m
(i)
Show that the initial spee d of the clay block afte r the air- rifle
pellet strikes it is
4.8 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
795
(ii)
Calculat e the aver a g e friction al force tha t the surfa c e of the table
exert s on the clay block whilst the clay block is moving.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c)
Discus s the ener gy tran sfor m a t i o n s tha t occur in the clay block and
the air- rifle pellet from the mom e n t the air- rifle pellet strike s the
block until the clay block come s to rest.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(d)
The clay block is dropp e d from rest from the edg e of the table and
falls vertically to the grou n d . The tabl e is 0.85 m above the groun d.
Calcula t e the spee d with which the clay block strike s the grou n d.
IB Questionbank Physics
796
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
50 6 . This ques tion is abou t the eye.
(a)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to the definition s of nea r point and far point,
what is mea n t by accom m o d a t i o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
Explain how accom m o d a t i o n is achieve d by the eye.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
797
(Tota l 5 mark s )
50 7 . This ques tion is abou t diffrac tio n and resolution.
(a)
A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a nar r o w
rect a n g ul a r slit. After passin g throu g h the slit, the light is incide n t on
a dista n t scre e n.
Point X is the midpoint of the slit.
(i)
On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the inte n si ty of
the light on the scre e n varies with the angle θ show n in the
diagr a m .
(3)
(ii)
The wavelen g t h of the light is 520 nm, the width of the slit is
0.04 mm and the scre e n is 1.2 m from the slit. Show tha t the
width of the cent r al maxim u m of inte nsi ty on the scre e n is about
3 cm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
798
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
799
(b)
Points P and Q are on the circ u mf e r e n c e of a plan e t as show n.
By consid e ri n g the two points, outline why diffrac tio n limits the ability
of an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e to resolve the imag e of the plane t as a
disc.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
50 8 . This ques tion is abou t stan di n g wave s and orga n pipes.
(a)
Stat e on e way in which a sta n di n g wave differs from a travelling
wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
800
(b)
An organ pipe of lengt h L is close d at one end. On the diag r a m s , dra w
a repr e s e n t a t i o n of the displa c e m e n t of the air in the pipe whe n the
frequ e n c y of the note emitt e d by the pipe is the
(i)
fund a m e n t a l (first har m o ni c) freq u e n c y f 1 .
(1)
(ii)
secon d har m o ni c frequ e n c y f 2 .
(1)
(c)
Use your answ e r to (b) to dedu c e an expr e s sio n for the ratio
f1
f2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
801
(d)
Stat e, in ter m s of the boun d a r y conditions of the sta n di n g wave s that
can be form e d in the pipe, the reas o n why the ratio of the highe r
frequ e n ci e s of the har m o ni c s to tha t of the funda m e n t a l mus t always
be an integ e r num b e r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
50 9 . This ques tion is abou t wave–pa r ti cl e duality.
(a)
In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are not emitt e d from the surf ac e
of a met al if the frequ e n c y of the incide n t light is below a cert ai n
value called the thr es h ol d frequ e n c y.
(i)
Explain, with refer e n c e to the Einst ei n model of the photo el e c t ri c
effect, the exist en c e of the thre s h ol d frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
802
(ii)
Stat e, with refer e n c e to your answ e r in (a)(i), the rea s o n why the
thre s h ol d frequ e n c y is differ e n t for differ e n t met als.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
803
(b)
Light of frequ e n cy 1.0 × 10 15 Hz is incide n t on the surfa c e of a met al.
The work function of the met al is 3.2 × 10 –19 J.
(i)
Show that the maxim u m kine tic ene r gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s
is 3.4 × 10 –19 J.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the elect r o n s in (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
804
51 0 . This ques tion is abou t the spec t r u m of atomic hydrog e n .
(a)
The diagr a m repr e s e n t s the princi p al lines in the visible spec t r u m of
atomic hydro g e n .
Outline how the spect r u m can be produ c e d and obse r v e d in the
labor a t o r y.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
805
(b)
Calcula t e the differe n c e in ene r gy in eV betw e e n the ene r gy levels in
the hydro g e n atom that give rise to the red line in the spec t r u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
51 1 . This ques tion is abou t radioa ctive dec ay.
(a)
A nucleu s of a radioac tive isotop e of gold (Au- 189) emits a neut ri n o in
the decay to a nucle u s of an isotop e of platin u m (Pt).
In the nucle a r reaction equa tio n below, stat e the na m e of the par ticle
X and identify the nucleon num b e r A and proto n num b e r Z of the
nucleu s of the isotop e of platin u m .
189
A
7 9 Au  Z P t  X
v
X : .............................................................................................................
...................
A : .............................................................................................................
...................
Z : .............................................................................................................
...................
(2)
(b)
The half- life of Au-189 is 8.84 minut e s . A fres hly pre p a r e d sam pl e of
the isotop e has an activity of 124 Bq.
(i)
Calculat e the decay const a n t of Au-189.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
806
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the activity of the sam pl e afte r 12.0 min.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
51 2 . This ques tion is abou t CDs and CCDs.
(a)
Analogu e signals are stor e d on a CD as a digital, bina ry signal. For an
analog u e signal of str e n g t h 11 V,
(i)
stat e the magni t u d e of the signal stre n g t h as a bina ry num b e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
descri b e how a digit al signal, such as that in (a)(i), is stor e d on
the CD.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) outline how the stor e d digit one (1) in a digital signal is rea d
from the CD using laser light reflect e d from the surfa c e of the
CD.
IB Questionbank Physics
807
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
808
(b)
Unlike a CD, a CCD stor es light incide n t on its surfa c e in a digital
form by dividing the surf ac e into a larg e num b e r of pixels. Eac h pixel
has a fixed value of capaci t a n c e .
(i)
Define what is mea n t by the capacitan c e of a pixel.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Pixels of a particul a r CCD have an are a of 2.8 × 10 –10 m 2 and a
capacit a n c e of 20 pF. A bea m of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t
on the CCD. The num b e r of photo n s per squa r e met r e arriving at
the CCD is 4.0 × 10 13 . The qua n t u m efficiency of a pixel is 74 %.
Dete r mi n e the incre a s e in pote n ti al differ e n c e acros s a pixel as a
res ult of the incide n t light.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
809
51 3 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier use d in a Sch mit t trigg e r
circuit.
(a)
An oper a tio n al amplifier use s a ±6. 0 V supply. The oper a ti o n a l
amplifier oper a t e s in the non- inver ti n g mode.
(i)
On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outp u t
voltag e V OUT of the amplifier varie s with the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V betw e e n the two input s of the amplifie r.
(2)
(ii)
With refer e n c e to the gra p h sketc h e d in (a)(i), explain why the
oper a tio n al amplifier is said to act as a comp a r a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m shows an oper a ti o n a l amplifier conn e c t e d as a Schmit t
trigg e r . The outp u t of the amplifie r is ±6. 0 V.
IB Questionbank Physics
810
IB Questionbank Physics
811
(i)
Show that the upp e r switc hi n g volta g e of the trigg e r , i.e. the
input voltag e V IN for which the outp u t volta g e V OUT switc h e s
from –6.0 V to +6. 0 V, is 2.0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The input signal V IN to the trigg e r is show n in the gra p h.
The switchin g voltag e s of the trigg e r are ±2. 0 V.
On the axes above, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outpu t
voltag e V OUT varies with time t .
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
812
(c)
Explain the use of a Sch mit t trigg e r in the tra ns m i s sio n of digital
signals.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51 4 . This ques tion is abou t a Galilea n tra n sfor m a t i o n and time dilation.
Ben is in a spac e s hi p that is travelling in a str ai g h t- line with const a n t spe e d
v as meas u r e d by Jill who is in a spa c e station.
Ben switch e s on a light puls e that bounc e s vertic ally (as obse rv e d by Ben)
betw e e n two horizon t al mirror s M 1 and M 2 sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d . At
the insta n t that the mir ro r s are opposit e Jill, the pulse is just leaving the
mirro r M 2 . The spee d of light in air is c .
(a)
On the diag r a m , sketc h the pat h of the light pulse betw e e n M 1 and M 2
as obse rv e d by Jill.
IB Questionbank Physics
813
(1)
(b)
The time for the light pulse to travel from M 2 to M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill
is Δt .
(i)
Stat e, accor di n g to Jill, the dista n c e move d by the spac e s hi p in
time Δt .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Using a Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n, derive an expr e s s io n for the
lengt h of the pat h of the light betw e e n M 2 and M 1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Stat e, accor di n g to speci al rela tivity, the lengt h of the pat h of the light
betw e e n M 2 and M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill in ter m s of c and ∆t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Ben is
∆t ′. Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (c) to derive a rela tion s hi p betw e e n
∆t and ∆t ′.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
814
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
815
(e)
Accordi n g to a clock at res t with res p e c t to Jill, a clock in the
space s hi p runs slow by a factor of 2.3. Show that the spe e d v of the
space s hi p is 0.90c.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51 5 . This ques tion is abou t lepton s and meson s .
(a)
Lepto n s are a class of elem e n t a r y particle s and eac h lepton has its
own antip a r ti cl e. Stat e wha t is mea n t by an
(i)
elem e n t a r y particle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
antip a r t i cl e of a lepton.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
816
(b)
The elect r o n is a lepton and its antip a r t i cl e is the positro n. The
following reaction can take plac e betw e e n an elect r o n and positro n.
e– + e+ → γ + γ
Sket ch the Feyn m a n diagr a m for this reac tion and identify on your
diagr a m any virtual particl e s.
(3)
(c)
Unlike lepton s , the π + meso n is not an elem e n t a r y particle. Sta t e the
(i)
quar k s truct u r e of the π + meso n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
reas o n why the following rea c tio n does not occur.
p + + p+ → p + + π+
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d)
Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
817
(e)
Explain, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r to (d), why qua r k s are
assig n e d the prope r t y of colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
51 6 . This ques tion is abou t the char a c t e r i s ti c s of the sta r s Procyon A and
Procyon B.
(a)
The star s Procyon A and Procyon B are both locat e d in the sa m e
stellar clust e r in the const ell a tion Canis Minor. Disting uis h betw e e n a
const ell ation and a stellar clust e r .
Cons t ella tio n: ..........................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Stellar
clust e r : ............................................................................................
.................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The table shows som e dat a for Procyon A and Procyon B.
Appar e n t
ma g n i t u d e
Procy o n A
(P A )
Procy o n B
(P B )
IB Questionbank Physics
+0. 4 0 0
+1 0. 7
Abso l u t e
ma g n i t u d e
+2. 6 8
+1 3. 0
Appar e n t
bri g h t n e s s
/ W m –2
2.06 × 10 –8
1.46 × 10 –12
818
Explain, using dat a from the table, why
(i)
as viewed from Eart h, P A is muc h bright e r tha n P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
the luminosity of P A is muc h gre a t e r tha n that of P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Deduc e, using dat a from the table in (b), that P A and P B are
appr oxi m a t ely the sam e dista n c e from Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
819
.....................
(2)
(d)
Stat e, using your ans w e r s to (a) and (c), why P A and P B might be
binar y star s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e)
LA
Calcula t e, using dat a from the table in (b), the ratio LB whe r e L A is
the luminosi ty of P A and L B is the luminosity of P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f)
The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of both P A and P B is of the orde r of 10 4 K.
The luminosity of P A is of the orde r of 10 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity
of the Sun. The diag r a m shows the grid of a Her tz s p r u n g–R u s s e ll
diagr a m .
IB Questionbank Physics
820
Label, on the grid above, the app r oxi m a t e position of
(i)
star P A with the lette r A.
(1)
(ii)
star P B with the lette r B.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
821
(g)
Identify the natu r e of star P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
51 7 . This ques tion is abou t the Big Bang model and red- shift.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
In the 1960s, Penzias and Wilson discove r e d a unifor m cosmic
backg r o u n d radiation (CMB) in the microw a v e region of the
elect r o m a g n e t i c spect r u m .
(i)
Explain how the CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Stat e why the red- shift of light from galaxies suppo r t s the Big
IB Questionbank Physics
822
Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
823
51 8 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the modula tio n of a car ri e r wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The grap h shows how the volta g e signal stre n g t h V of an amplitu d e
modul a t e d (AM) carri e r wave varies with time t .
Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the
(i)
frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
frequ e n c y of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
824
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
825
(iii) amplitu d e of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
ban d wi d t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
A car rie r wave may also be frequ e n c y modul a t e d (FM). Stat e and
explain on e adva n t a g e of FM comp a r e d to AM.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
51 9 . This ques tion is abou t optical fibre s.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by mat e ri al dispe r s io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
826
(2)
(b)
Sugg e s t why mat e ri al dispe r si o n sets a limit on the bit- rat e of
tran s m i s sio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
(i)
fibre.
The signal show n below is fed into a mono m o d e optical
On the diagr a m above, show the effects of mat e ri a l dispe r s io n on
the input signal by drawi n g the sha p e of the sign al afte r it has
travelled a long dista n c e in the optical fibre.
(1)
(ii)
Stat e and explain how the effect s on the signal draw n in (c)(i)
may be red uc e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d)
Digital dat a are tran s m i t t e d in an optic al fibre with a glass core which
has a refr ac tive index of 1.5. The dur a tio n of one bit in the
tran s m i s sio n is 0.50 ns and eac h sam pl e in the signal consist s of 32
bits.
(i)
Calculat e the time requi r e d for the signal to travel a dista n c e of
IB Questionbank Physics
827
500 km.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
828
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the sam pling frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e)
The data in (d) are confide n ti al and mus t be prot e c t e d . Without taking
financi al costs into accou n t , outline whet h e r a direc t optical fibre
conn e c tio n or a tran s m i s sio n thro u g h a geosync h r o n o u s satellite
would be mor e suita bl e for the tra n sf e r of the s e dat a.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
52 0 . This ques tion is abou t laser s.
(a)
With refer e n c e to the light waves emitt e d by a lase r, stat e wha t is
mea n t by the ter m s
(i)
monoch r o m a t i c.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
829
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
cohe r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The diagr a m (not to scale) shows thr e e of the ene r gy levels of a
subs t a n c e used to produ c e lase r light.
The ene r gy of the grou n d stat e is E 0 .
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by popula tion inver sion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a popula tion inver sion. Label the arro w P.
(1)
(iii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
IB Questionbank Physics
830
res ults in a pulse of lase r light. Label the arro w L.
(1)
(iv)
Deduc e that the wavel e n g t h of the emitt e d lase r light is 690 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
52 1 . This ques tion is abou t an astr o n o m i c a l telesc o p e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) show s the arr a n g e m e n t of the two convex lense s
in an astro n o m i c al teles co p e in nor m a l adjus t m e n t .
The teles co p e is used to observ e a dista n t star. One of the focal points of
the eyepiec e lens is labelled F E .
(a)
On the diag r a m above,
(i)
label, with the symbol F E , the position of the othe r focal point of
the eyepiec e lens.
(1)
(ii)
label, with the symbol F O , the position of the focal point of the
objective lens that is in betw e e n the two lens e s .
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
831
(iii) cons t r u c t rays to locat e the final image of the star.
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
832
(b)
In a particul a r astr o n o m i c a l tele sc o p e , the eyepie c e lens has a powe r
of 40 diopt r e s and the objec tive lens a powe r of 0.80 diopt r e s .
Deter m i n e the angul a r mag nifica tion of the telesc o p e in nor m al
adjus t m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
In an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e the objective is ofte n mad e up from a
diver gi n g and a conver gi n g lens, whe r e a s the ape r t u r e of the eyepie c e
is usually rest rict e d such that only rays close to the princip al axis are
viewe d. Stat e the reas o n s for this.
Objective
lens: ................................................................................................
.............
Eyepiec e
lens: ................................................................................................
..............
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
833
52 2 . This ques tion is abou t a diffraction gra ti n g.
(a)
A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t nor m ally on a
diffraction grati n g. After passin g thro u g h the gra tin g it is broug h t to a
focus on a scre e n by a lens. The diagr a m shows a few of the slits of
the diffraction gratin g and the pat h of the light that is diffra c t e d at an
angle θ to each slit.
The dist an c e betw e e n the slits is d and the wavele n g t h of the light is
λ.
(i)
On the diagr a m , const r u c t a line tha t ena bl e s the path differ e n c e
betw e e n the rays from two adjac e n t slits to be show n. Label the
path dist a n c e L .
(1)
(ii)
Use your answ e r to (a)(i) to derive the condition, in ter m s of d
and θ, for ther e to be a maxim u m of inte n si ty at the point P on
the scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
834
(b)
For a partic ul a r gratin g, the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t slits is 2.0 ×
10 –6 m. Dete r mi n e, for light of wavele n g t h 520 nm, the maxim u m
theor e t i c al orde r of diffrac tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
52 3 . Two lengt h s, a and b , are mea s u r e d to be 51 ± 1 cm and 49 ± 1 cm
res p e c tiv ely. In which of the following qua n ti tie s is the perc e n t a g e
unce r t ai n t y the large s t ?
A.
a + b
B.
a –b
C.
a × b
D.
a
b
(Tot al 1 mar k )
52 4 . A net force of mag nit u d e 4.0 N acts on a body of mas s 3.0 kg for 6.0 s. The
body is initially at rest. Which of the following is the spe e d of the body afte r
the 6.0 s interv al?
A.
0.50 m s –1
B.
2.0 m s –1
C.
4.5 m s –1
D.
8.0 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
835
IB Questionbank Physics
836
52 5 . A car moves from X to Y along a semicir c ul a r path. The radius of the path is
250 m and the time taken to compl e t e the trip is 50 s.
Which of the following cor r e c tly shows the mag nit u d e of the aver a g e
velocity and the mag nit u d e of the ave r a g e spe e d ?
Avera g e
velo c i t y
Avera g e
sp e e d
A.
10 m s –1
10 m s –1
B.
10 m s –1
16 m s –1
C.
16 m s –1
10 m s –1
D.
16 m s –1
16 m s –1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
52 6 . A ball is tied to a string and rota t e d at a unifor m spe e d in a vertic al plan e.
The diagr a m shows the ball at its lowest position. Which arrow shows the
direction of the net force acting on the ball?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
837
52 7 . Two steel balls, of mas s M and 2 M , fall at const a n t spe e d s in a tube filled
with oil.
Which of the following cor r e c tly comp a r e s the magni t u d e s of the net force
and of the drag (resist a n c e ) force on the two balls?
Ne t forc e
Dra g forc e
A.
sam e
sam e
B.
sam e
differ e n t
C.
differ e n t
sam e
D.
differ e n t
differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
52 8 . An ice cube and an icebe r g are both at a tem p e r a t u r e of 0 °C. Which of the
following is a corr ec t comp a ri s o n of the aver a g e ran do m kine tic ene r gy and
the total kinetic ener gy of the molec ul e s of the ice cube and the icebe r g ?
Avera g e rand o m kin e t i c
en e r g y
Tot al kin e t i c
en e r g y
A.
sam e
sa m e
B.
sam e
differ e n t
C.
differ e n t
sa m e
D.
differ e n t
differ e n t
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
838
52 9 . An ideal gas expa n d s isoth e r m a lly from a stat e X to a new stat e of volum e
V . The work done by the gas is W . Which of the following is corr e c t for an
adiab a ti c expa n sio n of the gas from stat e X to a new sta t e of volum e V ?
Cha n g e in int e r n a l
en e r g y
Work don e
A.
∆U > 0
gre a t e r tha n W
B.
∆U < 0
gre a t e r tha n W
C.
∆U > 0
less tha n W
D.
∆U < 0
less tha n W
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 0 . The gra p h shows the variation with absolut e tem p e r a t u r e T of the pre s s u r e
p of a fixed mas s of an ideal gas.
Which of the following is corr ec t conc e r ni n g the volum e and the density of
the gas?
Volu m e
De n s i t y
A.
const a n t
cons t a n t
B.
const a n t
incr e a s i n g
C.
incr e a si n g
cons t a n t
D.
incr e a si n g
incr e a s i n g
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
839
53 1 . Which of the following grap h s shows the varia tion with displa c e m e n t x of
the spee d v of a particle perfor mi n g simple har m o nic motion.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 2 . A particle perfor m s simple har m o ni c oscillations. Which of the following
quan ti tie s will be unaffect e d by a redu c tio n in the amplitu d e of oscillations ?
A.
The total ene r gy
B.
The maxim u m spee d
C.
The maxim u m accele r a t i o n
D.
The period
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
840
53 3 . Monoc h r o m a t i c light travels from air into wat e r . Which of the following
descri b e s the chan g e s in wavele n g t h and spe e d ?
Wavel e n g t h
Sp e e d
A.
incr e a s e s
decr e a s e s
B.
incr e a s e s
incr e a s e s
C.
decr e a s e s
incr e a s e s
D.
decr e a s e s
decr e a s e s
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 4 . A stan di n g wave is esta blis h e d in air in a pipe with one close d and one
open end.
The air molecul e s near X are
A.
always at the cent r e of a comp r e s si o n.
B.
always at the cent r e of a rar ef a c tio n.
C.
som eti m e s at the cent r e of a comp r e s s io n and som e ti m e s at the cent r e
of a rar ef a c tio n.
D.
neve r at the cent r e of a comp r e s si o n or a rar ef a c tio n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
841
53 5 . In two sepa r a t e expe ri m e n t s monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t on a single
slit. The diagr a m s show the diffra c tion patt e r n s obtain e d on a scre e n far
from the slit. In the top diag r a m the wavele n g t h of light is λ 1 and the slit
width is b 1 . In the botto m diag r a m the wavele n g t h of light is λ 2 and the slit
width is b 2 .
In each expe ri m e n t the dista n c e betw e e n the slit and the scre e n is the
sam e. Which of the following may be ded uc e d ?
A.
λ1 λ 2

b1 b2
B.
λ1 λ 2

b1 b2
C.
b1 < b2
D.
λ1 > λ2
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
842
53 6 . Horizont ally polarize d light is tra n s m i t t e d throu g h a polarize r whos e
tran s mi s s io n axis is horizont al. The light ent e r s a cont ai n e r with a suga r
solution and is then incide n t on a secon d pola riz e r whos e tra n s m i s sio n axis
is vertical.
When the secon d polarizer is rotat e d by a small angle, no light is
tran s mi t t e d thro u g h the secon d polariz e r . The expla n a t io n for this
obse rv a tio n is that the suga r solution
A.
caus e s dest r u c t iv e interf e r e n c e .
B.
rotat e s the plane of polariz a tion of light.
C.
can only tran s m i t vertically pola riz e d light.
D.
refr ac t s light so no light is incide n t on the secon d pola riz e r.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 7 . A sour c e of soun d app ro a c h e s a station a r y obse rv e r . The spe e d of the
emitt e d sound and its wavele n g t h , me a s u r e d at the sourc e , are v and λ
res p e c tiv ely. Which of the following is the wave spe e d and the wavele n g t h ,
as meas u r e d by the station a r y obse rv e r ?
Wave sp e e d
Wavel e n g t h
A.
larg e r than
v
larg e r tha n
λ
B.
equal to v
larg e r tha n
λ
C.
equal to v
less tha n λ
D.
larg e r than
less tha n λ
IB Questionbank Physics
843
v
(Tot al 1 mar k )
53 8 . The diagr a m shows the pat h of a projec tile tha t is launc h e d with velocity v .
Air resis t a n c e is negligible.
A secon d projectile has doubl e the mas s of the first proje ctile and is
launc h e d with the sam e velocity. Air resist a n c e is still negligible. Which of
the following pat hs best repr e s e n t s the pat h of the projec tile? ( The original
path is sho w n as a dott ed line )
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
844
53 9 . The diagr a m shows equipot e n t i al lines due to two object s.
The two object s could be
A.
elect ric char g e s of the sam e sign only.
B.
mas s e s only.
C.
elect ric char g e s of opposit e sign only.
D.
mas s e s or elect ric char g e s of any sign.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
845
54 0 . Two positive and two neg a tive point char g e s of equal mag ni t u d e are plac e d
at the vertice s of a squa r e as show n. The origin of the axes is at the cent r e
of the squa r e .
The elect ric poten ti al is zero
A.
at the origin of the axes only.
B.
along both the x -axis and the y -axis.
C.
along the y -axis only.
D.
along the x -axis only.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
846
54 1 . A rect a n g ul a r loop of condu c ti n g wire rota t e s in a region of mag n e ti c field.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the induc e d emf in the loop
durin g one cycle.
Which of the following gives the corr e c t time s at which the ma gni t u d e of
the mag n e t i c flux linkag e and the mag nit u d e of the curr e n t in the loop are
maxim u m ?
Flux
link a g e
Curre n t
A.
Y
Y
B.
Y
X
C.
X
Y
D.
X
X
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
847
54 2 . A rect a n g ul a r loop of condu c ti n g wire rota t e s in a region of mag n e ti c field.
The gra p h shows the variation with time t of the induc e d emf in the loop
durin g one cycle.
The resist a n c e of the coil is 5.0 Ω. Which of the following i s the aver a g e
powe r dissipa t e d in the loop?
A.
45
2 W
45
B.
2W
C.
45 W
D.
45 2 W
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 3 . The radii of nuclei may be dete r m i n e d by
A.
scat t e r i n g char g e d particle s off the nuclei.
B.
injectin g the nuclei in a mass spec t r o m e t e r .
C.
mea s u ri n g the de Broglie wavele n g t h of the nuclei.
D.
obse rvin g the spect r u m of the nuclei.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
848
54 4 . In the photo el ec t ri c effect, the following obse rv a tio n s may be ma de .
I.
The kinetic ener gy of the emitt e d elect r o n s incr e a s e s with
incr e a s i n g light frequ e n c y.
II.
The elect r o n s are emitt e d withou t time delay.
Which of thes e obs erv a tio n s , if any, can be explain e d in ter m s of the wave
theo ry of light?
A.
Neith e r I nor II
B.
I and II
C.
I only
D.
II only
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 5 . A proton and an alpha par ticle have the sam e de Broglie wavele n g t h .
s p e e dof a lp h ap a r t ic le
s p e e do f p r o t o n ?
Which of the following is appr oxi m a t e ly the ratio
A.
1
4
B.
1
2
C.
2
D.
4
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
849
54 6 . The ener gi e s of alpha particl es and of gam m a- rays emitt e d in radioa c tive
decay are discr e t e . This observ a tio n is evide n c e for
A.
atomic ene r gy levels.
B.
nuclea r ener gy levels.
C.
nuclei having mor e neut r o n s tha n proton s .
D.
the existe n c e of isotop e s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 7 . The diagr a m s show the variation with dista n c e x of the wave function ψ of
four differ e n t elect r o n s . The scale on the horizont al axis in all four
diagr a m s is the sam e. For which elect r o n is the unc e r t a i n t y in the
mom e n t u m the large s t ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
850
54 8 . A wave gene r a t o r produ c e s a powe r per unit lengt h of 4.0 kW m –1 for
waves of amplit u d e A and spee d v . The efficiency of the gen e r a t o r is
cons t a n t . The power per unit lengt h obtain e d from waves of amplit u d e 2 A
and spee d 2 v would be
A.
8.0 kW m –1 .
B.
16 kW m –1 .
C.
32 kW m –1 .
D.
64 kW m –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
54 9 . Which of the following stat e m e n t s , relatin g to the prod u c tio n of nucle a r
powe r , is corr e c t ?
A.
The fuel has high ener gy density.
B.
Supplies of nuclea r fuels are unlimit e d.
C.
Gree n h o u s e gas emissions are significa n t.
D.
Wast e produ c t s are not signific a n t .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
55 0 . Data are stor e d on an audio comp a c t disc (CD) at a rat e of f sam pl e s per
secon d. Each sam pl e cont ai ns b bits. A total of N bits are stor e d on the CD.
Which of the following is the playing time of the CD in secon d s ?
A.
Nf
b
B.
N
bf
C.
bN
f
D.
bf
N
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
851
55 1 . Light incide n t on the pixel of a CCD caus e s elect ric char g e to collec t in the
pixel. The amou n t of char g e collect e d in a given time is propo r t io n al to
which char a c t e r i s tic of the incide n t light?
A.
The degr e e of polariza tion
B.
The inten sity
C.
The wavele n g t h
D.
The frequ e n c y
(Tot al 1 mar k )
55 2 . Data analysis ques tion.
A stud e n t perfor m s an expe ri m e n t with a pap e r toy tha t rota t e s as it falls
slowly throu g h the air. After rele a s e , the pape r toy quickly att ain s a
cons t a n t vertic al spee d as meas u r e d over a fixed vertic al dista n c e .
The aim of the expe ri m e n t was to find how the ter mi n al spe e d of the pape r
toy varies with its weigh t. The weigh t of the pape r toy was chan g e d by
using differ e n t num b e r s of pap e r she e t s in its const r u c t i o n.
IB Questionbank Physics
852
The gra p h shows a plot of the ter mi n a l spe e d v of the pap e r toy (calcula t e d
from the raw dat a) and the num b e r of pap e r she e t s n use d to const r u c t the
toy. The unce r t ai n t y in v for n = 1 is show n by the erro r bar.
(a)
The fixed dist a n c e is 0.75 m and has an absolut e unce r t a i n t y of 0.01
m. The perc e n t a g e unce r t a i n t y in the time take n to fall throu g h the
fixed dist an c e is 5 %.
(i)
Calculat e the absolut e unce r t a i n t y in the ter mi n al spe e d of the
pap e r toy for n = 6.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
853
(ii)
On the grap h, draw an error bar on the point corr e s p o n di n g to n
= 6.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
854
(b)
On the gra p h, draw a line of best- fit for the data points.
(1)
(c)
The stud e n t hypot h e s iz e s tha t v is propo r tio n a l to n . Use the data
points for n = 2 and
n = 4 from the gra p h above to show that this hypot h e s i s is incor r e c t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
855
(d)
Anothe r stud e n t hypot h e s iz e d tha t v might be propo r tio n a l to n . To
verify this hypot h e si s he plott e d a gra p h of lg v agains t lg n as show n
below.
Show that the grap h verifies the hypot h e si s that v is propo r tio n a l to
n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
55 3 . This ques tion is abou t fuel for hea tin g.
IB Questionbank Physics
856
(a)
Define the ener gy densi ty of a fuel.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
857
(b)
A room heat e r bur n s liquid fuel and the following dat a are availabl e.
Density of liquid fuel
8.0 × 10 2 kg m –3
Ener gy produ c e d by 1 m 3 of liquid fuel
2.7 × 10 10 J
Rate at which fuel is cons u m e d
0.13 g s –1
Temp e r a t u r e at which air ent e r s hea t e r
°C
Temp e r a t u r e at which air leave s hea t e r
°C
Specific heat capa ci ty of air
990 J kg –1 K–1
(i)
=
=
=
= 12
= 32
=
Use the dat a to calcula t e the powe r outp u t of the room hea t e r ,
ignorin g the power requi r e d to conve r t the liquid fuel into a gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
All the ene r gy outp u t of the room heat e r raise s the tem p e r a t u r e
of the air moving throu g h it. Use the dat a to calcul a t e the mas s
of air that moves throu g h the room hea t e r in on e secon d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
858
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 7 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
859
55 4 . This ques tion is abou t digital data stor a g e .
(a)
Descri b e, with refer e n c e to the stru c t u r e of a DVD, how stor e d digital
dat a are read.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b)
The Blu- ray stor a g e syste m uses a lase r diode tha t emits a wavele n g t h
of 405 nm, wher e a s the olde r DVD syste m uses radia tion of
wavelen g t h 650 nm. Explain the adva n t a g e s of using a smalle r
wavelen g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
860
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
55 5 . This ques tion is abou t elect r o m a g n e t i c induc tio n.
(a)
In orde r to mea s u r e the rms value of an alte r n a t i n g cur r e n t in a cable,
a small coil of wire is plac e d close to the cable.
The plane of the small coil is par allel to the direc tio n of the cable. The
ends of the small coil are conn e c t e d to a high resist a n c e ac voltm e t e r .
Use Far a d a y’s law to explain why an emf is induc e d in the small coil.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
861
(b)
The grap h below show s the variatio n with time t of the cur r e n t in the
cable.
On the axes below, draw a sketc h gra p h to show the variatio n with
time of the emf induc e d in the small coil.
(2)
(c)
Explain how readi n g s on the high resist a n c e ac voltm e t e r can be use d
to com p a r e the rms values of alte r n a t i n g curr e n t s in differ e n t cable s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
862
55 6 . This ques tion is abou t the Ruthe r fo r d model of the atom.
(a)
Most alpha par ticles used to bomb a r d a thin gold foil pass thro u g h the
foil witho u t a significa n t cha n g e in direc tion. A few alpha par ticle s are
deviat e d from their original direc tion thro u g h angl es gre a t e r than 90°.
Use thes e observ a tio n s to desc ri b e the Ruthe r fo r d atomic model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
IB Questionbank Physics
863
(b)
The isotop e gold- 197 (
is not.
(i)
197
7 9 Au )
is sta ble but the isotop e gold- 199 (
199
7 9 Au )
Outline, in ter m s of the force s acting betw e e n nucleo n s , why, for
large stabl e nuclei such as gold- 197, the num b e r of neut r o n s
excee d s the num b e r of proton s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
199
199
A nucle u s of 7 9 Au dec ays to a nucle u s of 8 0 H g . Sta t e the two
par ticl es , othe r than γ-photon, e mitte d in this dec ay.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
55 7 . This ques tion is abou t the simple pend ul u m .
(a)
A pend ul u m consist s of a bob susp e n d e d by a light inexte n si bl e string
from a rigid suppo r t . The pend ul u m bob is move d to one side and the n
relea s e d . The sketc h grap h show s how the displa c e m e n t of the
pend ul u m bob und e r g oi n g simple har m o ni c motion varie s with time
over one time period.
IB Questionbank Physics
864
IB Questionbank Physics
865
On the sketc h grap h above,
(i)
label with the lette r A a point at which the accele r a t io n of the
pend ul u m bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(ii)
label with the lette r V a point at which the spe e d of the pend ul u m
bob is a maxim u m .
(1)
(b)
Explain why the mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string at the midpoint
of the oscillation is grea t e r tha n the weight of the pend ul u m bob.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
The pend ul u m bob is moved to one side until its cent r e is 25 mm
above its rest position and the n rele a s e d .
IB Questionbank Physics
866
(i)
Show that the spee d of the pend ul u m bob at the midpoint of the
oscillation is
0.70 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The mas s of the pend ul u m bob is 0.057 kg. The cent r e of the
pend ul u m bob is 0.80 m below the suppo r t . Calcula t e the
mag ni t u d e of the tension in the string whe n the pend ul u m bob is
vertically below the point of sus p e n s i o n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(d)
The point of susp e n s i o n of the pend ul u m bob is move d from side to
side with a small amplitu d e and at a variabl e driving frequ e n c y f.
IB Questionbank Physics
867
For each value of the driving frequ e n c y a ste a dy cons t a n t amplitu d e A
is reac h e d . The oscillations of the pend ul u m bob are lightly dam p e d .
IB Questionbank Physics
868
(i)
On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show the variation of A with
f.
(2)
(ii)
Explain, with refer e n c e to the gra p h in (d)(i), wha t is me a n t by
reson a n c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e)
The pend ul u m bob is now imm e r s e d in wate r and the varia bl e
frequ e n c y driving force in (d) is again applie d. Sugg e s t the effect this
imme r s io n of the pend ul u m bob will have on the sha p e of your gra p h
in (d)(i).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
869
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
870
55 8 . This ques tion is abou t the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
(a)
Descri b e the de Broglie hypot h e si s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A bea m of elect r o n s is acc ele r a t e d from res t thro u g h a pote n ti al
differ e n c e of 85 V.
Show that the de Broglie wavel e n g t h associa t e d with the elect r o n s in
the bea m is 0.13 nm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
Elect r o n s with the sam e kinetic ene r gy as thos e in (b) are incide n t on
a circula r aper t u r e of diam e t e r 1.1 nm.
IB Questionbank Physics
871
The elect r o n s are dete c t e d beyond the ape r t u r e .
IB Questionbank Physics
872
The grap h shows the variatio n with angle θ of the num b e r n of
elect r o n s det ec t e d per secon d after diffrac tion by the ape r t u r e .
Use your answ e r to (b) above to explain how dat a from the gra p h
suppo r t the de Broglie hypot h e s i s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
55 9 . This ques tion is abou t a light ni n g disch a r g e .
(a)
Define electric field stren g t h .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
873
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
874
(b)
A thun d e r cl o u d can be modelle d as a neg a tively cha r g e d plat e that is
par allel to the grou n d .
The mag ni t u d e of the char g e on the plat e incre a s e s due to proc e s s e s
in the atmo s p h e r e . Event u a lly a cur r e n t disc h a r g e s from the
thun d e r cl o u d to the grou n d .
On the diag r a m , draw the elect ric field patt e r n betw e e n the
thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d .
(3)
(c)
The cur r e n t disch a r g e s whe n the mag ni t u d e of the elect ric field
betw e e n the groun d and the thun d e r c l o u d base is 0.33 MN C –1 . The
thun d e r cl o u d bas e is 750 m above the groun d.
(i)
Calculat e, just befor e disch a r g e , the pote n ti al differ e n c e betw e e n
the thun d e r cl o u d bas e and the grou n d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
875
(ii)
The poten ti al differ e n c e V , betw e e n the thun d e r c l o u d bas e and
the grou n d , is given by
Qd
V = Aε 0
wher e Q is the char g e on the thun d e r c l o u d bas e, A is the are a of
the bas e, and d is the dista n c e betw e e n the bas e and the groun d.
The area of the bas e is 1.2 × 10 7 m 2 .
Calculat e, just befor e disch a r g e , the cha r g e on the bas e of the
thun d e r cl o u d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Dete r mi n e the ener gy rele a s e d in the disch a r g e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
876
56 0 . This ques tion is abou t microw a v e radia tio n.
A microw a v e tran s m i t t e r emits radia tio n of a single wavele n g t h towa r d s a
met al plat e along a line nor m al to the plat e. The radia tio n is reflec t e d back
towa r d s the tran s m i t t e r .
A microw a v e det ec t o r is moved along a line nor m a l to the microw a v e
tran s mi t t e r and the met al plat e. The det e c t o r recor d s a sequ e n c e of equ ally
spac e d maxim a and minim a of inten sity.
(a)
Explain how thes e maxim a and minim a are form e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(b)
The microw av e det ec t o r is move d thro u g h 130 mm from one point of
minim u m intensi ty to anot h e r point of minim u m inte n si ty. On the way
it pass es thro u g h nine point s of maxim u m inte n sity. Calcula t e the
(i)
wavele n g t h of the microw a v e s .
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
877
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
878
(ii)
frequ e n c y of the microw a v e s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Descri b e and explain how it could be demo n s t r a t e d that the
microw av e s are polarize d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
879
IB Questionbank Physics
880
56 1 . This ques tion is abou t nuclea r fission.
(a)
A possible fission reac tio n is
235
92 U
(i)
01 n  93 26 Kr 15461Ba x 10 n .
Stat e the value of x .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Show that the ener gy rele a s e d whe n one ura ni u m nucle u s
unde r g o e s fission in the rea c tion in (a) is about 2.8 × 10 –11 J.
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
of
of
of
of
neut r o n
= 1.008 6 7 u
U-235 nucle u s
= 234.99 3 3 3 u
Kr- 92 nucle u s = 91.90 6 4 5 u
Ba- 141 nucle u s
= 140.88 3 5 4 u
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(iii) Stat e how the ene r gy of the neut r o n s produ c e d in the reac tion in
(a) is likely to com p a r e with the ene r gy of the neut r o n that
initiat e d the reac tion.
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
881
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
882
(b)
Outline the role of the mode r a t o r .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
(i)
A nucle a r powe r plant that uses U-235 as fuel has a
useful powe r outpu t of 16 MW and an efficiency of 40 %.
Assumi n g that each fission of U-235 gives rise to
2.8 × 10 –11 J of ener gy, dete r m i n e the mas s of U-235 fuel used
per day.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii)
Describ e how some reac t o r s are use d to prod u c e pluto ni u m- 239.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
883
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
884
(iii) Stat e the impor t a n c e of plutoniu m- 239.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d)
Some nuclea r react o r s have a hea t exch a n g e r tha t uses a gas that is
kept at const a n t volum e. The first law of the r m o d y n a m i c s can be
repr e s e n t e d as Q = ∆U + W .
(i)
Stat e the mea ni n g s of Q and W .
Q: ....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
W : ....................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Describ e how the first law of the r m o dy n a m i c s applie s in the
oper a tio n of the heat excha n g e r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
885
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
886
(iii) Discus s the ent r o py chan g e s that take plac e in the gas and in the
sur r o u n di n g s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(Tot al 25 mark s )
56 2 . This ques tion is abou t collisions.
(a)
Stat e the principl e of cons e r v a ti o n of mom e n t u m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
887
(b)
In an expe ri m e n t , an air- rifle pellet is fired into a block of modelling
clay that res ts on a table.
(not to scale)
The air- rifle pellet rem ai n s inside the clay block afte r the impa c t.
As a result of the collision, the clay block slides along the table in a
str aig h t line and comes to res t. Furt h e r dat a relatin g to the
expe ri m e n t are given below.
Mass of air- rifle pellet
= 2.0 g
Mass of clay block
= 56 g
Velocity of impa c t of air- rifle pellet
= 140 m s –1
Stoppi n g dista n c e of clay block = 2.8 m
(i)
Show that the initial spee d of the clay block afte r the air- rifle
pellet strikes it is 4.8 m s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
888
(ii)
Calculat e the aver a g e friction al force tha t the surfa c e of the table
exert s on the clay block whilst the clay block is moving.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(c)
The experi m e n t is repe a t e d with the clay block plac e d at the edg e of
the table so that it is fired away from the table. The initial spee d of the
clay block is 4.3 m s –1 horizon t ally. The table surfa c e is 0.85 m above
the groun d.
(not to scale)
IB Questionbank Physics
889
(i)
Ignorin g air resist a n c e , calcula t e the horizon t al dista n c e
travelled by the clay block befor e it strike s the groun d.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii)
The diagr a m in (c) shows the pat h of the clay block negle c ti n g air
resis t a n c e . On the diagr a m , dra w the app roxi m a t e shap e of the
path that the clay block will take assu mi n g that air resist a n c e
acts on the clay block.
(3)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
56 3 . This ques tion is abou t the gravit a tio n a l field of Mar s.
(a)
Define gravitational poten tial ener g y of a mas s at a point.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
890
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
891
(b)
The grap h shows the variatio n with dist a n c e r from the cent r e of Mars
of the gravit a tio n al poten ti al V . R is the radius of Mar s which is 3.3
Mm. (Values of V for r < R are not show n.)
A rocket of mas s 1.2 × 10 4 kg lifts off from the surfa c e of Mar s. Use
the grap h to
(i)
calcula t e the chan g e in gravit a tion a l pote n ti al ene r gy of the
rocket at a dist an c e 4 R from the cent r e of Mars.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
892
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
show that the magni t u d e of the gravit a tion a l field stre n g t h at a
dist a n c e 4 R from the cent r e of Mars is 0.23 N kg –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Use the answ e r to (b)(ii) to show that the mag nit u d e of the
gravit atio n al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Mars is 3.7 N kg –1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
The gravit a tio n al poten ti al at the surfa c e of Eart h is –63 MJ kg –1 .
Without any furth e r calcula tio n, comp a r e the esca p e spee d requir e d
to leave the surfac e of Eart h with that of the esca p e spe e d requi r e d to
leave the surf ac e of Mars.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
893
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
894
56 4 . This ques tion is abou t the char a c t e r i s ti c s of the sta r s Procyon A and
Procyon B.
(a)
The star s Procyon A and Procyon B are both locat e d in the sa m e
stellar clust e r in the const ell a tion Canis Minor. Disting uis h betw e e n a
const ell ation and a stellar clust e r .
Cons t ella tio n: ..........................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Stellar
clust e r : ............................................................................................
..................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
The table shows som e dat a for Procyon A and Procyon B.
Appar e n t
ma g n i t u d e
Pro cy o n A
(P A )
Pro cy o n B
(P B )
Abs ol u t e
ma g n i t u d e
+2. 6 8
+0. 4 0 0
+1 0. 7
+1 3. 0
Appar e n t
bri g h t n e s s
/ W m –2
2.06 × 10 –8
1.46 × 10 –12
Explain, using dat a from the table, why
(i)
as viewed from Eart h, P A is muc h bright e r tha n P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
895
(ii)
the luminosity of P A is muc h gre a t e r tha n that of P B .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Deduc e, using dat a from the table in (b), that P A and P B are
appr oxi m a t ely the sam e dista n c e from Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
Stat e, using your ans w e r s to (a) and (c), why P A and P B might be
binar y star s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
896
(e)
LA
Calcula t e, using dat a from the table in (b), the ratio LB whe r e L A is
the luminosi ty of P A and L B is the luminosity of P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f)
The surf ac e tem p e r a t u r e of both P A and P B is of the orde r of 10 4 K.
The luminosity of P A is of the orde r of 10 L S , whe r e L S is the luminosity
of the Sun. The diag r a m shows the grid of a Her tz s p r u n g–R u s s e ll
diagr a m .
Label, on the grid above, the app r oxi m a t e position of
(i)
star P A with the lette r A.
(1)
(ii)
star P B with the lette r B.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
897
(g)
Identify the natu r e of star P B .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(h)
On the grid provide d in (f), dra w the evolution a r y pat h of the sta r P A.
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
898
(i)
The luminosity of the main sequ e n c e sta r Regul us is 150 L S . Assumin g
that, in the mas s–lu mi n o sity relation s hi p, n = 3.5 show tha t the mass
of Regulus is 4.2 M S wher e M S is the mas s of the Sun.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(j)
The star Betelg e u s e is about five times the mass of Regulus. One
possible outco m e of the final sta g e of the evolution of Betelg e u s e is
for it to beco m e a black hole. Sta t e the
(i)
othe r possible outco m e of the final sta g e of the evolution of
Betelg e u s e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
reas o n why the final sta g e in (j)(i) is stabl e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tot al 21 mark s )
56 5 . This ques tion is abou t the Big Bang model and red- shift.
(a)
Descri b e what is mean t by the Big Bang model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
899
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
900
(b)
In the 1960s, Penzias and Wilson discove r e d a unifor m cosmic
backg r o u n d radiation (CMB) in the microw a v e region of the
elect r o m a g n e t i c spect r u m .
(i)
Explain how the CMB is consist e n t with the Big Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
Stat e why the red- shift of light from galaxies suppo r t s the Big
Bang model.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
Many galaxies are a grea t dista n c e from Eart h. Explain, with
refer e n c e to Hubbl e’s law, how the mea s u r e m e n t of the red- shift of
light from such galaxies ena bl e s their dist a n c e from Eart h to be
dete r m i n e d .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
901
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
902
(d)
Stat e on e proble m associ a t e d with using Hubbl e’s law to det e r m i n e
the dista n c e of a galaxy a gre a t dista n c e from Eart h.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
56 6 . This ques tion is abou t modula tio n.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the modula tio n of a car ri e r wave.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The grap h shows how the volta g e signal stre n g t h V of an amplitu d e
modul a t e d (AM) carri e r wave varies with time t .
IB Questionbank Physics
903
Use the grap h to det e r m i n e the
(i)
frequ e n c y of the carri e r wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
frequ e n c y of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) amplitu d e of the signal wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
ban d wi d t h.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(c)
A car rie r wave may also be frequ e n c y modul a t e d (FM). Stat e and
explain on e adva n t a g e of FM comp a r e d to AM.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
904
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
905
56 7 . This ques tion is abou t optical fibre s.
(a)
Outline what is mean t by mat e r i al dispe r s io n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Sugg e s t why mat e ri al dispe r si o n sets a limit on the bit- rat e of
tran s m i s sio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
(i)
fibre.
The signal show n below is fed into a mono m o d e optical
On the diagr a m above, show the effects of mat e ri a l dispe r s io n on
the input signal by drawi n g the sha p e of the sign al afte r it has
travelled a long dista n c e in the optical fibre.
(1)
(ii)
Stat e and explain how the effect s on the signal draw n in (c)(i)
may be red uc e d .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
906
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
907
(d)
Digital dat a are tran s m i t t e d in an optic al fibre with a glass core which
has a refr ac tive index of 1.5. The dur a tio n of one bit in the
tran s m i s sio n is 0.50 ns and eac h sam pl e in the signal consist s of 32
bits.
(i)
Calculat e the time requi r e d for the signal to travel a dista n c e of
500 km.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the sam pling frequ e n c y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e)
The data in (d) are confide n ti al and mus t be prot e c t e d . Without taking
financi al costs into accou n t , outline whet h e r a direc t optical fibre
conn e c tio n or a trans m i s si o n throu g h a geosync h r o n o u s satellite
would be mor e suita bl e for the tra n sf e r of the s e dat a.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
908
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
909
56 8 . This ques tion is abou t an oper a tio n a l amplifier use d in a Sch mit t trigg e r
circuit.
(a)
An oper a tio n al amplifier use s a ±6. 0 V supply. The oper a ti o n a l
amplifier oper a t e s in the non- inver ti n g mode.
(i)
On the axes below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outp u t
voltag e V OUT of the amplifier varie s with the pote n ti al differ e n c e
V betw e e n the two input s of the amplifier.
(2)
(ii)
With refer e n c e to the gra p h sketc h e d in (a)(i), explain why the
oper a tio n al amplifier is said to act as a comp a r a t o r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
The diagr a m shows an oper a ti o n a l amplifier conn e c t e d as a Schmit t
trigg e r . The outp u t of the amplifie r is ±6. 0 V.
IB Questionbank Physics
910
IB Questionbank Physics
911
(i)
Show that the upp e r switc hi n g volta g e of the trigg e r , i.e. the
input voltag e V IN for which the outp u t volta g e V OUT switc h e s
from –6.0 V to +6. 0 V, is 2.0 V.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The input signal V IN to the trigg e r is show n in the gra p h.
The switchin g voltag e s of the trigg e r are ±2. 0 V.
On the axes above, sketc h a gra p h to show how the outpu t
voltag e V OUT varies with time t .
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
912
(c)
Explain the use of a Sch mit t trigg e r in the tra ns m i s sio n of digital
signals.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
56 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser s.
(a)
With refer e n c e to the light waves emitt e d by a lase r, stat e wha t is
mea n t by the ter m s
(i)
monoch r o m a t i c.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
cohe r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
913
(b)
The diagr a m (not to scale) shows thr e e of the ene r gy levels of a
subs t a n c e used to produ c e lase r light.
The ene r gy of the grou n d stat e is E 0 .
(i)
Stat e what is mean t by popula tion inver sion.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a popula tion inver sion. Label the arro w P.
(1)
(iii) Draw an arro w on the diagr a m to indic at e the tran si tion that
res ults in a pulse of lase r light. Label the arro w L.
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
914
(iv)
Deduc e that the wavel e n g t h of the emitt e d lase r light is 690 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
57 0 . This ques tion is abou t an astr o n o m i c a l telesc o p e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) show s the arr a n g e m e n t of the two convex lense s
in an astro n o m i c al teles co p e in nor m a l adjus t m e n t .
The teles co p e is used to observ e a dista n t star. One of the focal points of
the eyepiec e lens is labelled F E .
(a)
On the diag r a m above,
(i)
label, with the symbol F E , the position of the othe r focal point of
the eyepiec e lens.
(1)
(ii)
label, with the symbol F O , the position of the focal point of the
objective lens that is in betw e e n the two lens e s .
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
915
(iii) cons t r u c t rays to locat e the final image of the star.
(3)
(b)
In a particul a r astr o n o m i c a l tele sc o p e , the eyepie c e lens has a powe r
of 40 diopt r e s and the objec tive lens a powe r of 0.80 diopt r e s .
Deter m i n e the angul a r mag nifica tion of the telesc o p e in nor m al
adjus t m e n t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
In an astr o n o m i c al telesco p e the objective is ofte n mad e up from a
diver gi n g and a conver gi n g lens, whe r e a s the ape r t u r e of the eyepie c e
lens is usually res t ric t e d suc h tha t only rays close to the princip al axis
are viewed. Stat e the reas o n s for this.
Objective
lens: ................................................................................................
............
Eyepiec e
lens: ................................................................................................
.............
(2)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
916
57 1 . This ques tion is abou t a diffraction gra ti n g.
(a)
A par allel beam of monoc h r o m a t i c light is incide n t nor m ally on a
diffraction grati n g. After passin g thro u g h the gra tin g it is broug h t to a
focus on a scre e n by a lens. The diagr a m shows a few of the slits of
the diffraction gratin g and the pat h of the light that is diffra c t e d at an
angle θ to each slit.
The dist an c e betw e e n the slits is d and the wavele n g t h of the light is
λ.
(i)
On the diagr a m , const r u c t a line tha t ena bl e s the path differ e n c e
betw e e n the rays from two adjac e n t slits to be show n. Label the
path dist a n c e L .
(1)
(ii)
Use your answ e r to (a)(i) to derive the condition, in ter m s of d
and θ, for ther e to be a maxim u m of inte n si ty at the point P on
the scre e n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
917
(b)
For a partic ul a r gratin g, the dista n c e betw e e n adjac e n t slits is 2.0 ×
10 –6 m. Dete r mi n e, for light of wavele n g t h 520 nm, the maxim u m
theor e t i c al orde r of diffrac tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
57 2 . This ques tion is abou t X-ray diffrac tion.
(a)
The diagr a m repr e s e n t s som e of the atom s in two layer s of a cubic
cryst al lattice.
Use the diagr a m to outline how diffra c tio n arise s from the scat t e ri n g
of X-rays by a cryst al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
918
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
X-rays of wavele n g t h 87 pm are scat t e r e d by a cryst al whos e atom s
are arr a n g e d in a cubic lattic e. The smalles t scat t e ri n g angle for
which a maxim u m of the scat t e r e d X-ray is obs e rv e d is 18°. Calcula t e
the spacin g betw e e n adjac e n t atom s in the cryst al.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
57 3 . This ques tion is abou t thin- film inte rf e r e n c e .
The diagr a m (not to scale) repr e s e n t s an expe ri m e n t a l set- up desig n e d to
meas u r e the diam e t e r of a hum a n hair.
A hair is used to sepa r a t e two micros c o p e slide s. A monoc h r o m a t i c bea m of
light is reflect e d onto the two slides by the glass plate. The light is the n
reflect e d from the two slides and tra n s m i t t e d throu g h the glass plat e and is
viewed by the travelling micros c o p e .
IB Questionbank Physics
919
(a)
Stat e why the light reflect e d from the two micros c o p e slide s prod u c e s
a syst e m of interfe r e n c e fringe s.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
920
(b)
The condition that a brigh t fringe is obs e rv e d in the field of view of
the travelling micros co p e is given by the relation s hi p
1

 m  λ
2
2t = 
whe r e t is the thickn e s s of the air film form e d by the wedg e at the
point wher e the brigh t fringe is obse rv e d , m is an inte g e r and λ is the
wavelen g t h of the incide n t light.
1
Stat e the reas o n for the factor 2 in the relation s hi p.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(c)
In the diagr a m , the lengt h of the slides is 5.00 cm. The wavele n g t h of
the monoc h r o m a t i c light is 5.92 × 10 –7 m. Using the travelling
micros c o p e it is observ e d tha t 50 fringe s occupy a lengt h of 0.940 cm.
Show that the diam e t e r of the hair use d to sepa r a t e the slide s is about
80 µm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
921
57 4 . This ques tion is abou t a Galilea n tra n sfor m a t i o n and time dilation.
Ben is in a spac e s hi p that is travelling in a str ai g h t- line with const a n t spe e d
v as meas u r e d by Jill who is in a spa c e station.
Ben switch e s on a light puls e that bounc e s vertic ally (as obse rv e d by Ben)
betw e e n two horizon t al mirror s M 1 and M 2 sepa r a t e d by a dista n c e d . At
the insta n t that the mir ro r s are opposit e Jill, the pulse is just leaving the
mirro r M 2 . The spee d of light in air is c .
(a)
On the diag r a m , sketc h the pat h of the light pulse betw e e n M 1 and M 2
as obse rv e d by Jill.
(1)
(b)
The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Jill is
∆t .
(i)
Stat e, accor di n g to Jill, the dista n c e move d by the spac e s hi p in
time ∆t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
922
(ii)
Using a Galilean tran sfo r m a t i o n, derive an expr e s s io n for the
lengt h of the pat h of the light betw e e n M 2 and M 1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Stat e, accor di n g to speci al rela tivity, the lengt h of the pat h of the light
betw e e n M 2 and M 1 as me a s u r e d by Jill in ter m s of c and ∆t .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
The time for the puls e to travel from M 2 to M 1 as mea s u r e d by Ben is
∆t ′. Use your answ e r s to (b)(i) and (c) to derive a rela tion s hi p betw e e n
∆t and ∆t ′.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(e)
Accordi n g to a clock at res t with res p e c t to Jill, a clock in the
space s hi p runs slow by a factor of 2.3. Show that the spe e d v of the
space s hi p is 0.90c.
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
923
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
924
(f)
The lengt h of a table in the spac e s hi p is mea s u r e d by Ben to be 1.8 m.
Calcula t e the lengt h of the table as mea s u r e d by Jill.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(g)
The ques tion s (e) and (f) introd u c e the conc e p t s of time dilation and
lengt h cont r a c t io n. Discus s how muon dec ay in the atmo s p h e r e
provides expe ri m e n t a l evide n c e for the s e conc e p t s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(5)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
925
57 5 . This ques tion is abou t pair prod u c tio n and rela tivistic mech a ni c s .
A γ-photon of ener gy 2.46 MeV i s travelling close to the nucle u s of a gold
atom. It conver t s into an elect r o n (e –)–positro n (e + ) pair. Each particle
travels at 45° to the original direc tion of the photo n.
Imme di a t ely after the conve r sio n, the kinetic ene r gi e s of the elect r o n and
positr o n are equ al. The mag nit u d e of the recoil mom e n t u m of the gold
nucle u s is 0.880 MeV c –1 and is in the direc tion of the photo n.
(a)
Calcula t e, imme di a t ely afte r the dec ay, the ma g nit u d e of the
mom e n t u m of the elect r o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
926
(b)
Calcula t e the value V of the pote n ti al differ e n c e thro u g h which an
elect r o n at rest must be accele r a t e d in orde r to have the sam e
magni t u d e of mom e n t u m as tha t in (a).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
57 6 . This ques tion is abou t gene r a l relativity.
Bob is stan di n g on the floor of a spac e s hi p and he throw s a ball in a
direction par allel to the floor.
Betw e e n leaving Bob’s hand and landin g on the floor, the ball follows the
path show n.
(a)
Stat e and explain whet h e r , from the path followe d by the ball, Bob can
ded uc e that the space s hi p is at res t on the surfa c e of a plane t.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
927
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
928
(b)
Outline how the concep t of spac e ti m e can be use d to explain the
(i)
traject o r y of the ball if the spa c e s hi p is at rest on the surfa c e of a
plane t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
natu r e of a black hole.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(c)
Calcula t e the radius that Eart h would have to have in orde r for it to
behave as a black hole. The mass of Eart h is 6.0 × 10 24 kg.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
929
57 7 . This ques tion is abou t soun d inte nsi ty.
(a)
Define
(i)
inten si t y of sound .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
soun d inten sit y level .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
Stat e two ways by which the soun d pre s s u r e at the ear dru m is
amplified befor e reac hi n g the cochle a r fluid.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(c)
A stud e n t with a hea ri n g proble m can hea r sound s clea rly whe n the
sound intensity level is 65 dB or high e r . In a large lectu r e hall, at a
dista n c e of 25 m from the lectu r e r , the sound inte n si ty level is 55 dB.
Deter m i n e the maxim u m dista n c e from the lectu r e r at which the
stud e n t can hea r clearly. The inte n si ty of sound a dista n c e d from a
P
2
sourc e of powe r P is given by I = 4πd .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
930
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
931
57 8 . This ques tion is abou t X-rays.
(a)
Define half- value thickn e s s .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
The half- value thickn e s s in tiss ue for X-rays of a specific ene r gy is
3.50 mm. Deter m i n e the fraction of the incide n t inten sity of X-rays
that has bee n tran s m i t t e d throu g h tiss ue of thickn e s s 6.00 mm.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
For X-rays of high e r ener gy tha n thos e in (b), the half- value thickn e s s
is grea t e r than 3.50 mm. Stat e and explain the effect, if any, of this
chan g e on your answ e r in (b).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(d)
X-ray imag e s are often blur r e d des pit e the patie n t re m a i ni n g
IB Questionbank Physics
932
station a r y during expos u r e .
(i)
Stat e on e possible physic al mec h a ni s m for the blur rin g of an Xray imag e.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
933
(ii)
For the physical mec h a ni s m stat e d in (d)(i) sugg e s t how X-ray
imag es can be mad e mor e distinc t.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(e)
The expos u r e time of photo g r a p h i c film to X-rays is longe r than that
for visible light. The expos u r e time for X-rays may be red uc e d with the
use of enh a n c e m e n t tech ni q u e s , such as that of an inte nsifying scre e n.
Outline how an intensifying scr e e n redu c e s the expos u r e time.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
934
57 9 . This ques tion is abou t laser s in medicin e.
In a proce d u r e called pulse oxime t ry, lase r s are use d to mea s u r e the
perc e n t a g e of oxygen in the blood. Outline how laser s are use d in this
proce d u r e .
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
.........................................................................................................................
........................
(Tota l 3 mark s )
58 0 . This ques tion is abou t dosim et r y.
(a)
Disting ui s h betw e e n the ter m s abso r b e d dos e and dos e equivale n t.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
A bet a sour c e is inject e d into a tum ou r in a patie n t . The following dat a
are availabl e.
Mass of tumo u r
= 65 g
Activity of sour c e
= 4.8 × 10 8 Bq
Averag e ene r gy of emitt e d elect r o n s
MeV
IB Questionbank Physics
= 1.2
935
Quality factor of bet a radia tion
IB Questionbank Physics
= 1.0
936
(i)
Dete r mi n e the dose equivale n t over a period of fiftee n minut e s
after the beta sour c e is inject e d into the tumo u r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
(ii)
Stat e on e reas o n why the dose equivale n t det e r m i n e d in (b)(i) is
only appr oxi m a t e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(iii) Stat e on e reas o n why patie n t s might be willing to subjec t
them s elve s to such a conside r a b l e amou n t of radia tio n as
det e r m i n e d in (b)(i).
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
937
58 1 . This ques tion is abou t lepton s and meson s .
(a)
Lepto n s are a class of elem e n t a r y particle s and eac h lepton has its
own antip a r ti cl e. Stat e wha t is mea n t by an
(i)
elem e n t a r y particle.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
antip a r t i cl e of a lepton.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(b)
The elect r o n is a lepton and its antip a r t i cl e is the positro n. The
following reaction can take plac e betw e e n an elect r o n and positro n.
e– + e+ → γ + γ
Sket ch the Feyn m a n diagr a m for this reac tion and identify on your
diagr a m any virtual particl e s.
(3)
(c)
Unlike lepton s , the π + meso n is not an elem e n t a r y particle. Sta t e the
(i)
quar k s truct u r e of the π + meso n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
938
(ii)
reas o n why the following rea c tio n does not occur.
ρ+ + ρ+ → ρ+ + π +
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
939
(d)
Stat e the Pauli exclusion principle.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(e)
Explain, with refer e n c e to your ans w e r to (d), why qua r k s are
assig n e d the prope r t y of colour.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(f)
The pion was sugg e s t e d to be the media ti n g particle of the stron g
inter a c ti o n betw e e n nucleon s . Given that the rang e of the stron g
nuclea r inter a c tio n betw e e n nucleo n s is about 10 –15 m, show tha t the
rest mas s of the pion is about 100 MeV c –2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 13 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
940
IB Questionbank Physics
941
58 2 . This ques tion is abou t particle acc el e r a t o r s .
(a)
The diagr a m (not to scale) rep r e s e n t s a view from above of the
esse n ti al featu r e s of a cyclotr o n.
The positive par ticles emitt e d by the sour c e , travel in an anticlock wis e
directio n arou n d the Ds.
(i)
Stat e the direction of the mag n e ti c field tha t is use d in this
cyclot ro n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
On the diagr a m , draw the pat h of a positive particle betw e e n the
sour c e and the det ec t o r .
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
942
(iii) Explain why an alter n a ti n g pote n ti al of a partic ul a r frequ e n c y is
applied to the Ds as show n.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(b)
Outline why much highe r ene r gi e s can be achieve d in a synch r o t r o n
than in a cyclotr o n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
In a particul a r expe ri m e n t , proton s in a synch r o t r o n are accel e r a t e d
to an ene r gy of 2.0 GeV. Calcula t e the kinetic ene r gy of the proton s in
GeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
943
(d)
In the Large Had r o n Collider , proto n s can be accel e r a t e d to ene r gi e s
of 7 TeV. Deduc e whet h e r this value of ene r gy is sufficie nt to mimic
the tem p e r a t u r e of the unive r s e , 10 32 K, shor tly afte r the Big Bang.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 12 mark s )
58 3 . This ques tion is abou t the stan d a r d model.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the sta n d a r d model.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Use the cons e r v a ti o n of lepton num b e r and cha r g e to dedu c e the
nat u r e of the par ticle x in the following rea c tion.
νe + μ– → e – + x
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
944
(c)
Stat e what is mea n t by dee p inelas tic scatt e r i n g.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
945
(d)
Outline how deep inelas tic scat t e ri n g expe ri m e n t s provide evide n c e
for asym p t o ti c freedo m .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tota l 5 mark s )
58 4 . A volum e is mea s u r e d to be 52 mm 3 . This volum e in m 3 is
A.
5.2 × 10 3 m 3 .
B.
5.2 × 10 1 m 3 .
C.
5.2 × 10 –1 m 3 .
D.
5.2 × 10 –8 m 3 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
946
58 5 . The mas s e s and weight s of differ e n t object s are inde p e n d e n t ly me a s u r e d .
The gra p h is a plot of weight vers u s mas s that includ e s erro r bars.
These experi m e n t al res ult s sugg e s t tha t the
A.
mea s u r e m e n t s show a significa n t syste m a t i c erro r but small ran do m
erro r.
B.
mea s u r e m e n t s show a significa n t rand o m erro r but small syste m a t i c
erro r.
C.
mea s u r e m e n t s are preci s e but not acc u r a t e .
D.
weight of an object is propo r ti o n al to its mas s.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
58 6 . A skydive r jumpe d out of an airpla n e . On reac hi n g a ter mi n a l spe e d of 60 m
s –1 , she open e d her par a c h u t e . Which of the following desc ri b e s her motion
after openin g her par a c h u t e ?
A.
She went upwa r d s for a shor t time, befor e falling to Eart h at a spe e d
of 60 m s –1 .
B.
She contin u e d downw a r d s at 60 m s –1 , but hit the grou n d with less
force.
C.
She contin u e d to fall but reac h e d a new ter mi n al spe e d of less than 60
m s –1 .
D.
She went upwa r d s for a shor t time, befor e falling to Eart h at a spe e d
of less than 60 m s –1 .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
947
58 7 . The gra p h is a spee d vers u s time gra p h for an objec t tha t is moving in a
str ai g h t line.
The dista n c e travelled by the objec t durin g the first 4.0 secon d s is
A.
80 m.
B.
40 m.
C.
20 m.
D.
5 m.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
948
58 8 . The diagr a m shows a girl att e m p ti n g (but failing) to lift a heavy suitc a s e of
weigh t W. The mag ni t u d e of the vertic al upw a r d s pull of the girl on the
suitca s e is P and the mag nit u d e of the vertic al reac tio n of the floor on the
suitca s e is R .
Which equa tio n corr e c tly relat e s W , P and R ?
A.
W = P+ R
B.
W > P+ R
C.
W < P+ R
D.
W = P= R
(Tot al 1 mar k )
58 9 . Objects A and B collide toget h e r . They end up joined toge t h e r and
station a r y. During the collision, a force + F is exert e d on object A by objec t
B. Accor din g to New to n’s third law, the r e will also be a force of
A.
–F acting on object B .
B.
–F acting on object A .
C.
+ F acting on object B .
D.
+ F acting on object A .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
949
59 0 . A lift (elevato r ) is oper a t e d by an elect ric motor. It moves betw e e n the 10th
floor and the 2nd floor at a const a n t spee d. One main ene r gy
tran sfor m a t i o n during this journ e y is
A.
gravit atio n al poten ti al ene r gy → kinetic ene r gy.
B.
elect ric al ener gy → kinetic ene r gy.
C.
kinetic ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.
D.
elect ric al ener gy → ther m a l ene r gy.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 1 . A com m u ni c a ti o n s satellit e is moving at a cons t a n t spee d in a circul a r orbit
arou n d Eart h. At any given insta n t in time, the res ult a n t force on the
satellite is
A.
zero.
B.
equal to the gravit a tion al force on the satellit e.
C.
equal to the vector sum of the gravit a tio n a l force on the satellite and
the cent ri p e t a l force.
D.
equal to the force exer t e d by the sat ellite’s rocke t s .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 2 . A tem p e r a t u r e of 23 K is equival e n t to a tem p e r a t u r e of
A.
–300 °C.
B.
–250 °C.
C.
+2 5 0 °C.
D.
+3 0 0 °C.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
950
59 3 . The ratio
t h e r m acla p a c itoyf a s a m p leo f c op p e r
s p e c ifich e a tc a p a c itof
y copp e r
A.
does not have any unit.
B.
has unit J kg –1 K–1 .
C.
has unit J kg –1 .
D.
has unit kg.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 4 . In the kinetic model of an ideal gas, it is assu m e d tha t
A.
the forces betw e e n the molec ul e s of the gas and the cont ai n e r are
always zero.
B.
the inter m ol e c ul a r pot en ti al ene r gy of the molec ul e s of the gas is
const a n t .
C.
the kinetic ener gy of a given molec ul e of the gas is const a n t .
D.
the mom e n t u m of a given molec ul e of the gas is const a n t .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
951
59 5 . Which gra p h corr e c tly shows how the accele r a ti o n, a of a particl e
unde r g oi n g SHM varies with its displac e m e n t , x from its equilibriu m
position?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
952
59 6 . A mas s on the end of a horizon t al sprin g is displa c e d from its equilibri u m
position by a dista n c e A and rele a s e d . Its subs e q u e n t oscillation s have total
ene r gy E and time period T.
An identical mas s is attac h e d to an identic al sprin g. The maxim u m
displac e m e n t is 2 A . Assumin g this sprin g obeys Hooke’s law, which of the
following gives the corr ec t time period and total ene r gy?
New ti m e
peri o d
New en e r g y
A.
T
4E
B.
T
2E
C.
2T
4E
D.
2T
2E
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 7 . In which of the following regions of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m is
radi ation of wavele n g t h 600 nm locat e d ?
A.
microw av e s
B.
radio waves
C.
visible light
D.
X-rays
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
953
59 8 . What is the best esti m a t e for the refra c tiv e index of a mediu m in which
light travels at a spee d of 2.7 × 10 8 m s –1 ?
A.
0.9
B.
1.0
C.
1.1
D.
2.7
(Tot al 1 mar k )
59 9 . Two rect a n g ul a r blocks, X and Y, of the sa m e mat e ri al have differ e n t
dime n sio n s but the sam e over all resist a n c e . Which of the following
equ a tio n s is corr ec t ?
A.
resistivity of X × lengt h of X = resistivity of Y × lengt h of Y
B.
le n g t hof X
le n g t ho f Y

c r os s e c t io n a lr e ao f X c r o s s e c t io n a lr e ao f Y
C.
D.
resistivity of X × cross section a l are a of X = resistivity of Y × cross
section al area of Y
le n g t hof X
le n g t hof Y

c r os s e c t io n a lr e ao f Y c r o s ss e c t io n a lr e ao f X
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
954
60 0 . Two 6 Ω resis to r s are conn e c t e d in serie s with a 6 V cell. A stud e n t
inc orr e c t l y conne c t s an am m e t e r and a voltm e t e r as show n below.
The readi n g s on the am m e t e r and on the voltm e t e r are
Am m e t e r
readi n g / A
Volt m e t e r
read i n g / V
A.
0.0
0.0
B.
0.0
6.0
C.
1.0
0.0
D.
1.0
6.0
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
955
60 1 . The diagr a m shows a pote n ti al divide r circuit.
In orde r to incre a s e the readi n g on the voltm e t e r the
A.
tem p e r a t u r e of R should be incr e a s e d .
B.
tem p e r a t u r e of R should be decr e a s e d .
C.
light intensity on R should be incr e a s e d .
D.
light intensity on R should be decr e a s e d .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
956
60 2 . The mas s of Eart h is M E , its radius is R E and the mag nit u d e of the
gravit a tion al field stre n g t h at the surfa c e of Eart h is g . The univer s a l
g
gravit a tion al cons t a n t is G. The ratio G is equal to
ME
A.
R E2
B.
R E2
ME
C.
M ER E
D.
1
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 3 . Which diagr a m best repr e s e n t s the elect ric field due to a nega tively
char g e d cond u c ti n g sphe r e ?
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
957
60 4 . A point mas s carrie s a positive cha r g e + Q and is at rest in a ma gn e t i c field.
The field is in the direction show n.
The mag n e t i c force acting on the cha r g e is
A.
from left to right in the plan e of the page .
B.
from top to botto m in the plan e of the page .
C.
into the plane of the pag e.
D.
zero.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 5 . The num b e r of neut r o n s and the num b e r of proto n s in a nucle u s of an atom
235
of the isotop e of urani u m 9 2 U are
Ne u t r o n s
Prot o n s
A.
92
143
B.
143
92
C.
235
92
D.
92
235
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
958
60 6 . A sam pl e cont ai n s an amou n t of radioa c tive mat e ri a l with a half- life of 3.5
days. After 2 weeks the fraction of the radioa c tiv e mat e ri al rem ai ni n g is
A.
94 %.
B.
25 %.
C.
6 %.
D.
0 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 7 . The rest mas s of a proto n is 938 MeV c –2 . The ene r gy of a proton at res t is
A.
9.38 J.
B.
9.38 × 10 8 × (3 ×1 0 8 ) 2 J.
C.
9.38 × 10 8 eV.
D.
9.38 × 10 8 × (3 × 10 8 ) 2 eV.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
60 8 . The efficiency of a mode r n natu r a l gas powe r station is appr oxi m a t e l y
A.
10 %.
B.
50 %.
C.
5 %.
D.
90 %.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
959
y @60 9 . The ene r gy sourc e that cur r e n tly provide s the gre a t e s t propo r tio n of
the world’s total ener gy dem a n d is
A.
coal.
B.
oil.
C.
nat u r al gas.
D.
urani u m .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
61 0 . In a nuclea r powe r station, ura ni u m is use d as the ene r gy sour c e and
plutoni u m- 239 is produ c e d .
Which of the following is true?
A.
Plutoni u m- 239 is produ c e d by nucle a r fusion.
B.
A mode r a t o r is used to abso r b plutoni u m- 239.
C.
Cont r ol rods are used to slow down pluto ni u m- 239.
D.
Plutoni u m- 239 can be use d as a fuel in anot h e r type of nucle a r
reac t o r .
(Tot al 1 mar k )
61 1 . One dis a d v a n t a g e of using photovolt aic cells to powe r a dom e s tic wat e r
heat e r is that
A.
solar ene r gy is a ren e w a b l e sourc e of ene r gy.
B.
the powe r radiat e d by the Sun varies significa n tly depe n di n g on the
weat h e r .
C.
a large are a of photovolt aic cells would be nee d e d .
D.
photovolt aic cells cont ai n CFCs, which cont ri b u t e to the gre e n h o u s e
effect.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
960
61 2 . Gree n h o u s e gas es
A.
reflect infrar e d radiation but absor b ultr aviole t radia tion.
B.
reflect ultr aviolet radia tio n but absor b infra r e d radia tion.
C.
tran s m i t infra r e d radiation but absor b ultraviole t radia tion.
D.
tran s m i t ultr aviolet radiation but absor b infra r e d radia tion.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
61 3 . The rat e of global war mi n g might be redu c e d by
A.
replaci n g the use of coal and oil with nat u r a l gas.
B.
a redu c tio n in the Eart h’s albe do.
C.
a redu c tio n in car bo n fixation.
D.
an incr e a s e in defor e s t a t io n.
(Tot al 1 mar k )
IB Questionbank Physics
961
61 4 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri ca l resist a n c e of the met al mer c u r y.
The resist a n c e R of a sam pl e of me rc u r y was mea s u r e d as a function of the
tem p e r a t u r e T of the sam pl e. The sam pl e was cooled and dat a points wer e
take n at tem p e r a t u r e interval s of 0.2 K. The unc e r t a i n ti e s in R and T are
too small to be show n on the gra p h.
The hypot h e s i s is that resist a n c e is propo r tio n a l to absolut e tem p e r a t u r e
for tem p e r a t u r e s grea t e r than 4.5 K.
(a)
(i)
Sugg e s t whet h e r the dat a suppo r t s the hypot h e s i s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Draw a line of best fit throu g h the dat a.
(2)
(b)
Stat e the value of R for which the rat e of cha n g e of resist a n c e of the
sam pl e with tem p e r a t u r e is least.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
962
(c)
At a tem p e r a t u r e T C the resist a n c e sudd e nly beco m e s zero.
(i)
Use the grap h to dete r m i n e the possibl e rang e of the
tem p e r a t u r e T C .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Stat e, to the corr e c t num b e r of signific a n t figur e s , the value of T C
and its unce r t ai n t y.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) Outline how the tem p e r a t u r e T C could be me a s u r e d more
precis ely.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d)
Outline two reas o n s why you could not use the dat a to det e r m i n e an
accu r a t e value for R at room tem p e r a t u r e .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
963
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
964
61 5 . This ques tion is abou t impuls e.
(a)
A net force of magni t u d e F acts on a body. Define the impuls e I of the
force.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
A ball of mas s 0.075 0 kg is travelling horizont a lly with a spe e d of 2.20
m s –1 . It strike s a vertical wall and rebo u n d s horizon t ally.
Due to the collision with the wall, 20 % of the ball’s initial kinetic
ener gy is dissip a t e d .
(i)
Show that the ball rebou n d s from the wall with a spee d of 1.97 m
s –1 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Show that the impuls e given to the ball by the wall is 0.313 N s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
965
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
966
(c)
The ball strikes the wall at time t = 0 and leave s the wall at time t = T .
The sketc h gra p h shows how the forc e F that the wall exert s on the
ball is assu m e d to vary with time t .
The time T is meas u r e d elect r o ni c ally to equ al 0.089 4 s.
Use the impuls e given in (b)(ii) to estim a t e the aver a g e value of F.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(4)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
61 6 . This ques tion is abou t ener gy tra n sf e r s .
(a)
Ener gy degr a d a t i o n takes plac e in the ene r gy tra n sfo r m a t i o n s which
occur in the gene r a t i o n of elect ric al powe r. Explain wha t is mea n t in
this context by ener gy degr a d a t i o n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
967
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
968
Som e of the ene r gy tran sfo r m a t i o n s that take plac e in a coal- fired powe r
station are repr e s e n t e d by the Sank ey diag r a m below.
(b)
(i)
Stat e what is repr e s e n t e d by the width w .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
At the thre e places ma rk e d A, B and C on the diagr a m , ene r gy is
degr a d e d .
Identify the proce s s by which the ene r gy is degr a d e d in eac h of
the places.
A: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
B: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
C: .....................................................................................................
.................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
969
IB Questionbank Physics
970
61 7 . This ques tion is abou t gree n h o u s e effect
(a)
The grap h shows part of the absor p ti o n spec t r u m of nitrog e n oxide
(N 2 O) in which the intensity of absor b e d radia tio n A is plott e d agains t
frequ e n c y f.
(i)
Stat e the region of the elect r o m a g n e t i c spec t r u m to which the
reson a n t frequ e n cy of nitrog e n oxide belong s.
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Using your ans w e r to (a)(i), explain why nitrog e n oxide is
classified as a gree n h o u s e gas.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
971
..................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
972
(b)
Define emis si vit y and albedo .
Emissivity: ...............................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Albedo: ....................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
The diagr a m shows a simple ene r gy bala nc e climat e model in which
the atmo s p h e r e and the surfa c e of Eart h are two bodie s eac h at
const a n t tem p e r a t u r e . The surfa c e of the Eart h rec eive s both solar
radiatio n and radiation emitt e d from the atmo s p h e r e . Assum e tha t the
Eart h’s surfac e beh av e s as a black body.
The following data are availa ble for this model.
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the atmo s p h e r e of Eart h
emissivity, e of the atmos p h e r e of Eart h
aver a g e albed o, α of the atm os p h e r e of Eart h
solar inten sity at top of atmo s p h e r e
m –2
aver a g e tem p e r a t u r e of the surfa c e of Eart h
IB Questionbank Physics
=
=
=
=
242 K
0.720
0.280
344 W
= 288 K
973
Use the data to show that the
(i)
powe r radia t e d per unit are a of the atmo s p h e r e is 140 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
solar powe r absor b e d per unit are a at the surfa c e of the Eart h is
248 W m –2 .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d)
It is hypot h e s iz e d that, if the produ c tio n of gre e n h o u s e gas e s wer e to
stay at its pres e n t level the n the tem p e r a t u r e of the Ear t h’s
atmo s p h e r e would event u a lly rise by 6.0 K.
Calcula t e the powe r per unit are a that would then be
(i)
radi at e d by the atmos p h e r e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
abso r b e d by the Eart h’s surfa c e .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
974
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
975
(e)
Estim a t e , using your ans w e r to (d)(ii), the incr e a s e in tem p e r a t u r e of
Eart h’s surfac e.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 14 mark s )
61 8 . This ques tion is abou t motion of a ball falling in oil.
(a)
Disting ui s h betw e e n aver a g e spee d and insta n t a n e o u s spe e d.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
976
(b)
A small steel ball of mass M is dropp e d from rest into a long vertic al
tube that cont ain s oil.
The sketc h gra p h shows how the spe e d v of the ball varies with time t .
Explain how you would use the gra p h to find the aver a g e spe e d of the
ball betw e e n t = 0 and t = t 1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
The gradi e n t of the grap h at t = t 1 is k . Deduc e an expr e s s io n in ter m s
of k , M and g , the accel e r a t io n of free fall, for the ma g nit u d e of the
friction al force F acting on the ball at t = t 1 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
977
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
978
(d)
Stat e and explain the mag nit u d e of the friction al force acting on the
ball at t = t 2 .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(Tot al 11 mark s )
61 9 . This ques tion is abou t simple har m o ni c motion and wave s.
(a)
A particle of mas s m that is att a c h e d to a light spring is execu ti n g
simple har m o ni c motion in a hori z o n t a l dire c t i o n .
Stat e the condition relati n g to the net force acting on the particle that
is neces s a r y for it to execut e simple har m o ni c motion.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
979
(b)
The grap h shows how the kine tic ene r gy E K of the par ticle in (a) varies
with the displac e m e n t x of the par ticle from equilibri u m .
(i)
Using the axes above, sket c h a gra p h to show how the pote n ti al
ene r gy of the particle varie s with the displa c e m e n t x .
(2)
(ii)
The mas s of the par ticle is 0.30 kg. Use dat a from the gra p h to
show that the frequ e n c y f of oscillation of the par ticle is 2.0 Hz.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(4)
IB Questionbank Physics
980
(c)
The par ticles of a mediu m M 1 throu g h which a tra n sv e r s e wave is
travelling, oscillat e with the sam e frequ e n c y and amplit u d e as that of
the par ticle in (b).
(i)
Describ e, with refer e n c e to the prop a g a t i o n of ene r gy thro u g h
the mediu m , what is me a n t by a tran s v e r s e wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
The spee d of the wave is 0.80 m s –1 . Calcula t e the wavele n g t h of
the wave.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(d)
The diagr a m shows wavefro n t s of the waves in (c) incide n t on a
boun d a r y XY betw e e n mediu m M 1 and anot h e r mediu m M 2 .
IB Questionbank Physics
981
The angle betw e e n the nor m a l, and the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s is 30°.
IB Questionbank Physics
982
(i)
The spee d of the wave in M 1 is 0.80 m s –1 . The spe e d of the
waves in M 2 is
1.2 m s –1 .
Calculat e the angle betw e e n the dire c tion of travel of the
wavefro n t s in M 2 and the nor m al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
On the diagr a m , sket c h the wavefro n t s in M 2 .
(1)
(Tot al 15 mark s )
62 0 . This ques tion is abou t decay of radiu m- 226.
(a)
A nucleu s of the isotop e radiu m- 226 (Ra) unde r g o e s α-dec ay with a
half- life of
1.6 × 10 3 yr to form a nucle u s of rado n (Rn).
Define the ter m s isotop e and half- life .
Isotop e: ...................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
Halflife: ..................................................................................................
....................
.................................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
983
.....................
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
984
(b)
Using the grid below, sketc h a gra p h to show how the activity A of a
sam pl e of radiu m- 226 (Ra) would be expe c t e d to vary with time t over
a period of about 5.0 × 10 3 yr.
The activity of the sam pl e at time t = 0 is A 0 .
(3)
(c)
The nucle a r reaction equa tio n for the dec ay of radiu m- 226 (Ra) may
be writt e n as
226
8 8 Ra
(i)
Rn α
Stat e the value of the proto n num b e r and neut r o n num b e r of the
isotop e of rado n (Rn).
Proto n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
...............
Neut r o n
num b e r : ..................................................................................
.............
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
985
(ii)
Outline why the binding ene r gy of Ra is less tha n that of Rn.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(d)
The following data are availa ble.
mas s of Ra
mas s of Rn
mas s of α
= 226.02 5 4 u
= 222.01 7 5 u
= 4.002 6 u
Show that the ene r gy rele a s e d in the decay of a Ra nucle u s is 4.94
MeV.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
62 1 . This ques tion is abou t inter n al ene r gy, hea t and ideal gas e s .
(a)
The inter n al ene r gy of a piec e of coppe r is incr e a s e d by hea tin g.
(i)
Explain what is mea n t, in this cont ext, by inte r n a l ene r gy and
heati n g.
Inte r n al
ener gy: ....................................................................................
.............
IB Questionbank Physics
986
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Heatin g: ..........................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(ii)
The piece of copp e r has mass 0.25 kg. The incre a s e in inte r n a l
ene r gy of the coppe r is 1.2 × 10 3 J and its incr e a s e in
tem p e r a t u r e is 20 K. Estim a t e the specific heat capa city of
coppe r .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(b)
An ideal gas is kept in a cylinde r by a piston tha t is free to move. The
gas is heat e d such that its inte r n a l ene r gy incr e a s e s and the pres s u r e
rem ai n s const a n t . Use the molec ul a r model of ideal gase s to explain
(i)
the incr e a s e in inter n a l ene r gy.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
how the pres s u r e rem ai n s cons t a n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
987
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tota l 9 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
988
62 2 . This ques tion is abou t elect ri c fields and elect ri c circuits.
(a)
Two par allel, char g e d met al plate s A and B are in a vacuu m .
At a par ticul a r insta n t an elect r o n is at point P.
On the diag r a m , draw
(i)
the elect ric field patt e r n due to the plate s .
(3)
(ii)
an arrow to repr e s e n t the dire c tion of the force on the elect r o n at
P.
(1)
(b)
The accele r a ti o n of the elect r o n at P is 8.8 × 10 14 m s –2 . Dete r m i n e
the mag nit u d e of the elect ric field str e n g t h at the point P.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(c)
The elect ric pote n ti al ener gy of the elect r o n cha n g e s by 1.9 × 10 –17 J
as it moves from one plat e to the othe r. Show tha t the pote n ti al
IB Questionbank Physics
989
differ e n c e betw e e n the plate s is 120 V.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(d)
A resis to r R and a filam e n t lamp L are conne c t e d in serie s with a
batt e r y. The batt e r y has an emf of 12 V and inte r n a l resis t a n c e 4.0 Ω.
The poten t i al differ e n c e acros s the filam e n t of the lamp is 3.0 V and
the cur r e n t in the filam e n t is 0.25 A.
(i)
Define emf and desc ri b e the conc e p t of inte r n a l resis t a n c e .
emf:
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
Inte r n al resist a n c e :
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(ii)
Calculat e the total powe r supplie d by the batt e r y.
.........................................................................................................
IB Questionbank Physics
990
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
991
(iii) Calculat e the powe r dissip a t e d in the exte r n a l circuit.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iv)
Dete r mi n e the resist a n c e of the resisto r R.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(Tot al 16 mark s )
62 3 . This ques tion is abou t vision and resolution.
(a)
Comp a r e scotopic with photopic vision.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
IB Questionbank Physics
992
(2)
IB Questionbank Physics
993
(b)
The grap h shows the variation with wavele n g t h λ of the sensitivity I,
of the rod and the cone cells of a hum a n eye.
A red piece of pape r and a blue piece of pape r are both viewe d in very
low inten si ty light.
Each piece of pap e r reflec t s the sam e inte nsi ty of light.
With refer e n c e to the grap h, sta t e and explain which one of the two
pieces of pap e r will be mor e clearly visible.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
IB Questionbank Physics
994
(c)
The diam e t e r of the pupil of a hum a n eye is 1.5 mm.
(i)
Calculat e the minim u m angul a r sepa r a ti o n of two point s tha t can
be resolved by the hum a n eye for light of wavele n g t h 680 nm.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Two star s , the sam e dista n c e from Eart h, are sepa r a t e d by a
dist a n c e of
4.0 × 10 13 m.
Both star s emit light of wavele n g t h 680 nm.
The two star s are just resolve d by an obse rv e r on Eart h. Estim a t e
the dista n c e to the two sta r s .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 8 mark s )
62 4 . This ques tion is abou t polarizatio n.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by polariz e d light.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
995
(b)
A ray of light is inciden t on the surfac e of a lake. The angle of
inciden c e is φ.
The reflect e d light is comple t e ly polariz e d horizont a lly.
The refra ctive index of wate r is n .
(i)
On the diagr a m above draw the refr a c t e d ray.
(1)
(ii)
Use the diagr a m to deduc e the relation s hi p betw e e n φ and n .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(iii) The refr ac tive index of the wat e r is 1.3. Calcula t e the value of φ.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
996
(1)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
997
62 5 . This ques tion is abou t the Dopple r effect.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the Dopple r effect.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(2)
(b)
Ultra s o u n d of frequ e n c y 5.2 MHz is direc t e d from a station a r y sourc e
towar d s red blood cells in an art e r y. A simplified diag r a m is show n
below in which the blood cells are travelling in the sam e direc tion.
The ultr a s o u n d is reflect e d from the cells and is rec eive d back at the
sourc e.
The meas u r e d frequ e n cy shift is 3.5 kHz. The spe e d of ultr a s o u n d in
blood is
Δf 2v

c .
c = 1.5 × 10 3 m s –1 . The freq u e n c y shift is det e r m i n e d from f
(i)
Stat e the significan c e of the factor of 2 in the form ul a for the
frequ e n c y shift.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
(ii)
Dete r mi n e the spee d of the red blood cells.
.........................................................................................................
..................
IB Questionbank Physics
998
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
999
(iii) Stat e two reas o n s why, in prac tic e, the frequ e n c y shift will have
a rang e of values.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(Tota l 6 mark s )
62 6 . This ques tion is abou t the photo el e c t r i c effect.
(a)
In the photo el ec t r i c effect, elect r o n s are emitt e d from a met allic
surfac e only if the wavele n g t h of the light incide n t on the surfa c e is
below a cert ai n value called the thr e s h ol d wavele n g t h .
Explain this obse rv a tio n.
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(3)
(b)
A monoch r o m a t i c sour c e of powe r 3.0 W emits light of wavele n g t h
4.60 × 10 –7 m. All of the light is incide n t on a met al surfa c e and
caus e s elect r o n s to be emitt e d at a rat e of
4.0 × 10 10 s –1 . The thre s h ol d wavele n g t h of the met al is 5.50 × 10 –7 m.
Calcula t e the
IB Questionbank Physics
1000
(i)
photo el e c t r i c cur r e n t .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(1)
IB Questionbank Physics
1001
(ii)
work function of the met al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(2)
(iii) the ratio of the rate of elect r o n emission to the rat e at which the
photo n s are incide n t on the met al.
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
(3)
(c)
Light from a differ e n t sour c e is incide n t on the met al in (b). The new
sourc e has power 6.0 W and emits light of wavele n g t h 9.00 × 10 –7 m.
Stat e the effect of thes e cha n g e s , if any, on your ans w e r to (b)(i).
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(Tot al 10 mark s )
IB Questionbank Physics
1002
62 7 . This ques tion is abou t qua n t u m aspe c t s of the elect r o n .
The gra p h shows the variation with dist a n c e x of the wavefu n c tio n Ψ of an
elect r o n at a par tic ul a r inst a n t of time. The elect r o n is confine d within a
region of lengt h 2.0 × 10 –10 m.
(a)
Stat e what is mea n t by the wavefun c tio n of an elec t r o n .
.................................................................................................................
.....................
.................................................................................................................
.....................
(1)
(b)
Using data from the grap h esti m a t e , for this elect r o n ,
(i)
its mom e n t u m .
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................
..................
.........................................................................................................